#HowILearn: ManpowerGroup Celebrates First Global “Learnability Week” Promoting the Need for Continuous Skills Development
MILWAUKEE, — ManpowerGroup (NYSE: MAN) today launches “Learnability Week” to help people develop their skills and remain employable for the long term. Throughout the week, more than 25 ManpowerGroup markets across the globe will host events to help people nurture their learnability – the desire and ability to learn new skills and build long-term employability. Some of the activities include:
Promoting ManpowerGroup’s free web-based Learnability Quotient (LQ)™ digital assessment on social media, enabling millions of people at all stages of their careers to discover their unique learning style.
Hosting a partnership webinar with Junior AchievementEurope in which ManpowerGroup experts share practical tips for young people to get work ready, not just graduate ready. The webinar will be recorded and shared worldwide.
Launching a new “Leaders on Learnability” YouTube film series that shares insights from leaders at companies like Facebook, Unilever, PwC and KPMG on how they learn, how they encourage learning in their organizations and why learnability is critical for business success.
ManpowerGroup designed its LQ™ assessment in partnership with Hogan X, the analytics division of Hogan Assessments. The LQ™ assessment helps individuals discover how they learn and enables businesses to better understand the learning styles of their people. As organizations seek to invest and develop their employees, having insight into these metrics will provide guidance on how to best enable performance and make better decisions on how to motivate their workforce.
“When new skills are emerging just as fast as others are becoming obsolete, employability now depends less on what you already know and more on your ability to learn, apply and adapt. Helping people upskill for a fast-changing world of work will be the defining challenge of our time,” said Jonas Prising, Chairman & CEO, ManpowerGroup. “Nobody owns the corner on learnability – it has the potential to be a great equalizer. Everyone can get learning-ready and capture the opportunities the Skills Revolution creates. That’s why we’re celebrating Learnability Week across the globe – helping people discover how they learn so they can stay employable for the long term.”
Find your LQ™ at learnability.manpowergroup.com and share on social media using the hashtag #HowILearn.
About ManpowerGroupManpowerGroup® (NYSE: MAN), the leading global workforce solutions company, helps organizations transform in a fast-changing world of work by sourcing, assessing, developing and managing the talent that enables them to win. We develop innovative solutions for over 400,000 clients and connect 3+ million people to meaningful, sustainable work across a wide range of industries and skills. Our expert family of brands – Manpower®, Experis®, Right Management® and ManpowerGroup® Solutions – creates substantially more value for candidates and clients across 80 countries and territories and has done so for nearly 70 years. In 2017, ManpowerGroup was named one of the World’s Most Ethical Companies for the seventh consecutive year and one of Fortune’s Most Admired Companies, confirming our position as the most trusted and admired brand in the industry. See how ManpowerGroup is powering the future of work: www.manpowergroup.com
About the Learnability Quotient (LQ)™ AssessmentThe Learnability Quotient (LQ)™ is a web-based visual assessment developed by ManpowerGroup, the leading global workforce solutions company, and Hogan X, the new analytics division of Hogan Assessments, the leading provider of personality assessments. This short, responsive assessment identifies an individual’s LQ™ to provide insight into their motivation and style of learning. Results are expressed via three dimensions – Adventurous, Intellectual and Unconventional – and LQ™ helps organizations and individuals to succeed. For more information, visit www.learnabilityquotient.com.
$10,000 in prize money up for grabs in 3rd annual StartUp Lehigh Valley pitch competition for entrepreneurs
BETHLEHEM, Pa., Sept. 1, 2021 /PRNewswire/ — StartUp Lehigh Valley, a pitch competition for area entrepreneurs developed and hosted by Factory LLC, with financial support from Penn State Lehigh Valley’s LaunchBox, is back for a third year.
After a virtual event in 2020, this year’s competition will be held live at Factory’s headquarters in south Bethlehem and broadcast live on WFMZ-TV 69News. The competition is scheduled for October 27, 2021, from 6:30-8:00 PM.
StartUp Lehigh Valley Entrepreneur Pitch Event Trailer
StartUp Lehigh Valley Entrepreneur Pitch Event Trailer
In a Shark Tank-style event designed to showcase startup companies in the Lehigh Valley community and throughout Pennsylvania, 10 finalists will pitch their products and businesses to a panel of judges in front of a live and virtual audience. Ten thousand dollars in prize money is up for grabs, along with essential resources for startup businesses.
“The StartUp Lehigh Valley pitch competition is designed to showcase the entrepreneurship that’s already happening in the Valley and get the community excited about supporting these local startups,” said Richard Thompson, managing partner at Factory. “We are thrilled to be partnering with WFMZ this year to broadcast the event live and reach more people than ever before. We also want to applaud Penn State Lehigh Valley’s LaunchBox for working with us to pull off this competition, and for providing vital resources to our local entrepreneurs year-round.
“We considered dozens of cities across the U.S. before building our innovation and scaleup facility, and we found exactly what we were looking for here in Bethlehem,” Thompson continued. “The Lehigh Valley has easy access to major airports and cities, a competitive talent pool, top-tier universities, and an exploding logistics industry. It’s perfectly poised to become a hotbed for innovation, and this competition is all about building that entrepreneurial community.”
The grand prize winner will take home $5,000. The first runner up will receive $2,500, and three additional finalists will receive LaunchBox Boost awards of $500 each. The live and virtual audience will also vote for the winner of a $1,000 Audience Choice award. Entrepreneurs have until October 15th to apply and can find all the details at startuplehighvalley.com.
The prize money is presented by lead sponsor Lehigh Valley LaunchBox, a hub of resources for entrepreneurs located at Penn State Lehigh Valley in Center Valley. All participants will have the opportunity to network at the event and are invited to take advantage of LaunchBox’s comprehensive startup services, including free legal counsel, access to grant funding, coaching, and more.
“From the first person to rub sticks together to start a fire to those who sparked the industrial age, innovation has lit our pathway to progress,” said Tina Q. Richardson, chancellor of Penn State Lehigh Valley. “But an idea, no matter how bright, is just an idea until an individual with talent, support – and gumption – captures, creates, packages, and successfully promotes it for profit: the entrepreneur. They are the backbone of our workforce, the root of all business and the reason we formed LaunchBox – to double down on our commitment to foster innovation in our region. We are so pleased to be part of this exciting event and look forward to helping these aspiring entrepreneurs gain exposure and traction through this partnership with Factory, and by connecting them to Penn State’s massive network of startup resources moving forward.”
JPMorgan Chase & Co. also contributed towards the cost of producing the event. The company is committed to supporting entrepreneurs and small businesses that create jobs and build vibrant communities.
“As our firm continues to grow in the Lehigh Valley, we couldn’t be prouder to support Factory’s StartUp event,” said Susan Youngs, relationship executive for JPMorgan Chase Commercial Banking. “JPMorgan Chase has a strong commitment to small businesses and entrepreneurs as they generate jobs, create diverse communities and are vital to prosperous cities. It’s our pleasure to help shine a spotlight on local entrepreneurs.”
Startup founders and entrepreneurs from any industry are welcome to apply to pitch. The only criteria are that participants must be 18 or older and based in Pennsylvania.
The pitch contest will be hosted by Thompson and Nancy Werteen, an anchor and reporter for WFMZ-TV. Each pitch will last for two minutes, followed by a round of questions from the judges.
This year’s panel of judges is comprised of local business leaders and innovators:
Sue Yee is the founder and CEO of Active Data, a digital products and services company focused on event commerce and online ticketing. She has also served on the boards of many area organizations, including the Lehigh Valley Health Network Board of Trustees and the PBS-WLTV 39 Board of Directors.
Dan Bosket is an entrepreneur and owner of several small businesses who also serves as a board member of the Allentown Chamber of Commerce, director of the Community Action Development Corporation of Allentown, and advisor for Lehigh Valley LaunchBox.
Tony Iannelli is CEO and president of the Greater Lehigh Valley Chamber of Commerce. He hosts Business Matters, a local business show broadcast by WFMZ-TV featuring face-paced interviews on hot topics.
Roly Nesi is the founder of ROAR Organic, a refreshing electrolyte beverage enhanced with vitamins and antioxidants. He partnered with Factory and moved ROAR’s headquarters to Bethlehem in 2020.
The in-person audience is limited to 100, and those interested in attending must register in advance at startuplehighvalley.com. Audience members and finalists will be asked to show proof of Covid-19 vaccination.
About Factory LLC
Factory is a scale-up facility and investor for food, beverage, and pet brands located in Bethlehem, PA. Factory provides resources—including capital, team members, office space, and industry connections—to startup companies, allowing them to operate more efficiently and secure a profitable exit sooner. Factory’s current investment portfolio includes Stuffed Puffs, the one-of-a-kind marshmallow filled with milk chocolate, and Honey Stinger, a sports nutrition brand offering chews, gels, hydration mixes, and more.
About Lehigh Valley LaunchBox
Lehigh Valley LaunchBox is a Penn State University- and community-sponsored business accelerator program created as part of the Invent Penn State initiative. The Lehigh Valley LaunchBox program awards micro grants to budding entrepreneurs. Partners of Lehigh Valley LaunchBox link micro grant-recipients to alumni, business leaders, and academic partners to provide mentorship and to help launch ideas and turn them into useful products. All Lehigh Valley community members and Penn State faculty, staff, and students who have a scalable business idea are welcome to apply for affiliation with the Lehigh Valley LaunchBox.
About JPMorgan Chase & Co.
JPMorgan Chase & Co. is a leading global financial services firm with assets of $3.2 trillion and operations worldwide. The Firm is a leader in investment banking, financial services for consumers and small businesses, commercial banking, financial transaction processing, and asset management. A component of the Dow Jones Industrial Average, JPMorgan Chase & Co. serves millions of customers in the United States and many of the world’s most prominent corporate, institutional and government clients under its J.P. Morgan and Chase brands. Information about JPMorgan Chase & Co. is available at www.jpmorganchase.com.
$4.2M in Grants to Assist Unemployed Workers in Idaho Awarded by the US Labor Department
WASHINGTON — The U.S. Department of Labor today announced a total of $4,204,401 for two National Emergency Grants to assist approximately 650 workers affected by recent layoffs in Idaho.
“Workers affected by these layoffs will need to be trained in the latest skills in order to be competitive in today’s workforce,” said U.S. Secretary of Labor Thomas E. Perez. “This funding will provide the resources these workers need to become employed in the region’s fastest growing industries and occupations.”
The department is making $2,600,475 in grant funding available for 435 workers affected by the closures that took place from August 2013 to April 2014 of the J.R. Simplot Co.’s facilities, which were located in the Idaho cities of Aberdeen, Caldwell, Heyburn and Nampa. Of the total amount awarded, $1,040,190 will be released initially.
Another grant, worth $1,603,926, is being awarded to assist 219 workers affected by the March 31 closure of the Center Partners call center, located in Idaho Falls, Idaho. Of the $1,603,926 available for these workers, $779,050 will be released initially.
The grants, both awarded to the Idaho Department of Labor, will provide these dislocated workers with re-employment services. For the former Center Partners employees, this will include: career guidance, case management, job search assistance, on-the-job training and other skills training opportunities.
The workers affected by the J.R. Simplot Co.’s closures will receive similar services; however, they are also eligible for Trade Adjustment Assistance benefits, so the TAA program will cover the costs of their training. Because only a portion of the total amount approved for each of the grants is being awarded today, additional funding, up to the total approved amount, will be made available as the state demonstrates a continued need for assistance.
$450M in US Labor Department Grants Available to Expand Training Partnerships for Community Colleges and Employers
WASHINGTON — The U.S. Department of Labor today announced the availability of the final $450 million in grants under the Trade Adjustment Assistance Community College and Career Training initiative. Over the last three years, these unprecedented investments have helped expand the capacity of the American community college system to provide accessible training programs that connect people to available jobs in growing industries in their communities. These grants are an important part of the Obama administration’s job-driven skills agenda and are being implemented in partnership with the U.S. Department of Education.
“Through the first three rounds of grants more than 800 colleges across the country are helping to build strong ladders of opportunity that allow people to secure a foothold in the middle class, while also supporting businesses to compete and grow,” said U.S. Secretary of Labor Thomas E. Perez. “This final round will help scale what works, strengthen career pathways and improve the way employment and education data are used in assessing programs throughout the country.”
Previous grantees have leveraged strong partnerships between community colleges, the workforce system, employers and industry groups to transform the way they design and deliver courses through accelerated learning strategies; redesigned curricula; distance learning; work-based training, such as Registered Apprenticeships; and innovative uses of technology to enhance learning activities. This solicitation continues to promote these strategies.
“Community colleges play a vital role in equipping our nation’s students with the skills they need to meet the demands of today’s careers,” said U.S. Secretary of Education Arne Duncan. “This program is not about tinkering — it’s about transformation. This is not about getting more students to enroll — it’s about getting more students to graduation day and into good jobs.”
The program is designed to ensure that an eligible institution in every state plus the District of Columbia and Puerto Rico receive dedicated funding of at least $2.25 million. Single institutions may apply for grants of up to $2.5 million and consortia of institutions within the same state or among institutions that share an economic region may apply for grants up to $15 million.
This round of funding strengthens employer engagement throughout the grant process. Successful applicants will design programs that are responsive to the workforce needs of multiple employers within an industry sector by working closely with regional and national employers and industry groups. These employer and industry partners will help identify and map necessary skills and competencies, as well as assist in designing curricula, programs, assessments or credentials that will help quickly connect ready-to-work Americans with ready-to-be-filled jobs.
The final round of grants will place a priority on three additional goals by making additional funding available to those applicants who propose to:
develop partnerships with national industry groups or employers to scale strategies across the country;
engage employers, educators, Registered Apprenticeships and the workforce system to support the development or expansion of state career pathways systems; or
improve the integration of state employment and education data.
In an effort to scale promising practices from previous grants and sustain meaningful improvements to the community college system, additional preference will be given to collaborations that include:
in-depth employer partnerships, such as work-based learning and commitments to hire;
partnership with the workforce system and the network of nearly 2,500 American Job Centers to help support program implementation; or
partnerships with Registered Apprenticeship sponsors in their local and regional areas, particularly in occupations and industries with expected workforce shortages.
Those interested in applying for the newly available funding should visit http://www.grants.gov. The deadline to apply is July 7, 2014.
Eligible applicants include community colleges and other public, proprietary or nonprofit educational institutions that offer programs that can be completed in two years and are accredited by an agency or association recognized by the U.S. Department of Education.
All curricula and training materials developed with the support of the grant will be made available for free re-use under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 (CC BY) License, ensuring that colleges around the country can replicate their promising programs.
General information about the TAACCCT program can be found at http://www.doleta.gov/taaccct/.
‘Africa – Europe Alliance’ To Deepen Economic Relations and Boost Investment and Jobs
On 12 September, on the occasion of his State of the Union Address, President Jean-Claude Juncker said: “Africa does not need charity, it needs true and fair partnership. And we, Europeans need this partnership just as much. Today, we are proposing a new Alliance for Sustainable Investment and Jobs between Europe and Africa. This Alliance, as we envision it, would help create up to 10 million jobs in Africa in the next 5 years alone. I believe we should develop the numerous EU-African trade agreements into a continent-to-continent free trade agreement, as an economic partnership between equals.”
The European Commission is proposing a new ‘Africa – Europe Alliance for Sustainable Investment and Jobs’ to substantially boost investment in Africa, strengthen trade, create jobs, and invest in education and skills. Today’s package builds on the commitments taken during the African Union – European Union Summit which took place in November last year in Abidjan, where the two continents agreed to strengthen their partnership. It sets out the key strands of action for a stronger economic agenda for the EU and its African partners.
High Representative/Vice-President Federica Mogherini said: “Europe and Africa share many of the same interests: we both want a stronger Africa – with quality jobs for its youth, a better business climate, and peace and security for all. In these years we have started to build a real partnership of equals with Africa. We are already strong political partners, the next step is to be true economic partners and deepen our trade and investment relationship. We want to give young people opportunities to achieve their aspirations. Boosting responsible investment in Africa is a win-win for both sides.”
Commissioner for International Cooperation and Development Neven Mimica said: “This Alliance is about unlocking private investment and exploring the huge opportunities that can produce benefits for African and European economies alike. It is about stepping up our partnership and putting our weight behind African initiatives such as the African Continental Free Trade Area.”
Today’s proposal shows commitment to reinforce the Africa-EU Partnership and outlines a series of key actions that include:
boosting strategic investment and strengthening the role of the private sector, notably through increased de-risking of investment projects via blending grants and loans, and guarantees;
investing in people by investing in education and skills, at continental and national level to strengthen employability and match skills and jobs, also including scholarships and exchange programmes, in particular through Erasmus+;
strengthening business environment and investment climate, in particular by strengthening the dialogue with African partners and supporting their reforms in this field;
tapping the full potential of economic integration and trade: building on the African Continental Free Trade Area implementation, the long-term perspective is to create a comprehensive continent-to-continent free trade agreement between the EU and Africa. To prepare this, Economic Partnership Agreements, Free Trade Agreements including the Deep and Comprehensive Free Trade Areas on offer to the countries of North Africa, and other trade regimes with the EU should be exploited to the greatest extent, as building blocks to the benefit of the African Continental Free Trade Area;
mobilising an important package of financial resources, as reflected in particular in the ambitious proposal for the future Multi-Annual Financial Framework of the EU on external funding, where Africa is highlighted as a priority region.
Expected results
The Alliance will lead to concrete results such as the creation of up to 10 million jobs in the next 5 years. With EU financial support mobilised by 2020:
35,000 students and academics from Africa will benefit from Erasmus+ by 2020. A further 70,000 will benefit by 2027, reaching a total of 105,000 in ten years.
750,000 people will receive vocational training for skills development.
30 million people and companies will benefit from access to electricity thanks to the EU’s leveraged investment in renewable energy and a boosted generation capacity by 5 GW.
24 million people will have access to all season roads through our leveraged investment in transport infrastructure.
3.2 million jobs in Africa are expected to be created under the External Investment Plan just by the Investment Programmes focussed on small and medium-sized enterprises.
With a guarantee of €75 million, a single investment programme from the External Investment Plan will generate 800,000 jobs.
Consultation and dialogue with African partners will be organised in the coming months to jointly define priorities and take further action. The Alliance will take into account the diversity across the African continent and the specificities of each country, including the contractual relations of the Northern African countries through their Association Agreements and their experience of co-operation with the EU through the European Neighbourhood Policy.
Background
The Commission’s proposal for an ‘Africa – Europe Alliance for Sustainable Investment and Jobs’ is part of a package which also includes a proposal for a more efficient financial architecture for investment outside the European Union, which will also support further investment in Africa.
Under President Juncker’s leadership, the EU has been strengthening its partnership with Africa, including with new innovative tools, on top of traditional cooperation instruments, notably the very ambitious External Investment Plan.
The EU is Africa’s closest neighbour and biggest investor, the main trading and development partner and a key security provider. The EU is providing €31 billion in Official Development Assistance to Africa between 2014-2020 to boost Africa’s economy to give young people in the continent a chance to build a future, to ensure food security and access to energy, and to anchor good governance and respect of human rights. The EU’s Member States held an investment stock of €291 billion in 2016, making the EU the biggest investor in Africa. The EU also offers free access to the EU market via Economic Partnership Agreements, Free Trade Agreements including the Deep and Comprehensive Free Trade Areas with the countries of North Africa and the Everything But Arms scheme with African countries.
100,000 Jobs Mission Hires Over 200,000 Veterans, Four Years after Making Initial Hiring Pledge
New York, – The 100,000 Jobs Mission announced today that its coalition of private companies has collectively hired more than 217,000 U.S. Military veterans through the end of 2014 and is now committed to hire another 100,000 veterans for a total of 300,000.
“Four years ago, servicemembers struggled to find meaningful jobs because many employers did not fully understand how to apply veterans’ skills and experience to their businesses. Since then, the 100,000 Jobs Mission has connected more than 200,000 veterans to good jobs that put their skills to good use,” said Maureen Casey, director of Military and Veterans Affairs for JPMorgan Chase, a founding member of the coalition. “But our work isn’t done yet. With nearly one million military members returning to civilian life over the next few years, the 100,000 Jobs Mission is committed to continuing its mission of helping U.S. veterans and military spouses obtain meaningful careers.”
“JPMorgan Chase and the rest of the 100,000 Jobs Mission should be commended for their leadership and sustained commitment over four years. They have stepped up and joined forces to create opportunities for our nation’s veterans and military spouses,” said Colonel Steve Parker, Executive Director, Joining Forces. “They have been excellent partners with Joining Forces and have made a direct impact on reducing veteran unemployment. We look forward to working with the Mission as they look to hire another 100,000.”
The 100,000 Jobs Mission was founded in 2011 by 11 companies, including JPMorgan Chase & Co., that pledged to hire at least 100,000 veterans by 2020. The coalition reports its hiring results quarterly and shares best practices for hiring and retaining veterans in their organizations. Many of these can be found on jobsmission.com. Since the coalition’s establishment, membership has grown to 184 companies that represent nearly every industry in the U.S. economy, including Timken, which joined the group in late 2013.
“Timken is proud to be a member of the 100,000 Jobs Mission, and being an active member of the coalition helps us stay on the forefront of best practices for hiring and retaining U.S. military veterans and spouses,” said Shaun Branon, Director, Talent Acquisition. “Military veterans possess the skills and experience that make them successful members of our company.”
Among the companies that joined the 100,000 Jobs Mission in 2014 were Amtrak and Chipotle, whose leaders understand the importance of the Mission and similar initiatives.
“Amtrak values the leadership, reliability and technical skills that veterans bring,” said Joseph H. Boardman, a Vietnam Veteran, Amtrak President and CEO. “We joined the 100,000 Jobs Mission because we want to make an impact on veteran employment. Working with the other coalition companies will help us achieve mission success.”
“Chipotle is growing quickly, and we are always looking for top performing employees that have the ability to empower top performers to achieve high standards. We are committed to hiring veterans from all branches of the military who have this ability, and are eager to watch their success as they help build strong restaurant teams!” said Monty Moran, Co-CEO.
The 100,000 Jobs Mission continues to seek like-minded large employers to join the commitment to hiring veterans and military spouses.
About the 100,000 Jobs Mission
Launched in 2011, the 100,000 Jobs Mission brings together companies committed to hiring U.S. military veterans and military spouses. The 184 companies now involved have pledged to hire 300,000 veterans. They have hired 217,344 veterans through the end of 2014. For more information on the 100,000 Jobs Mission, visit jobsmission.com.
11.7 Million Reasons to Lead on Trade – US Trade Rep. Michael Froman and Secretary of Commerce Penny Pritzker
There are 11.7 million reasons to lead on trade. That’s the estimated number of American jobs supported by exports in 2014, our fifth consecutive year of record-breaking exports. These record performances are truly a “Team USA” effort, driven by businesses of all sizes from all sectors across our economy. If any one group deserves special attention, it is our small businesses, which comprise 98 percent of all American exporters.
To recognize that outsized contribution, our agencies have released a report that illustrates how access to global markets is benefiting small businesses across our nation. Currently, around 300,000 small- and medium-sized businesses across the 50 states export to foreign destinations, supporting millions of American jobs. Impressive as they are, these figures only scratch the surface of what is possible. With 95 percent of the world’s customers living outside of U.S. borders, there is enormous potential for our businesses – and small businesses in particular – to grow their exports, hire more American workers, and expand their bottom lines.
Among the many small businesses thriving in global markets is Planson International, which exports information and communication technology from New Gloucester, Maine to over 80 countries. Since 2004, Planson’s annual exports have grown from $5 million to $35 million, and its staff has grown from 5 to 35 employees. As President Connie Justice told us, “We attribute Planson’s success almost exclusively to export sales.” Due to its reliance on local U.S. suppliers, more business for Planson overseas means even more business here at home.
Of course, it is impossible to capture the diversity of talent, innovation, and hard work that help American small businesses drive our economy with a single snapshot. However, small businesses usually share some important characteristics that many of these stories highlight. Accounting for almost all private sector employment growth in recent decades, small businesses are a major source of jobs for American workers. Furthermore, small businesses that export to foreign markets tend to grow faster, hire more, and pay higher wages than small businesses that serve purely domestic markets.
Small businesses also face a common set of challenges when competing in the global marketplace. High tariffs can reduce already small margins, making exporting more difficult. Weak intellectual property rules can jeopardize the hard work, investment, and personal risk that go into making new products. The complexities of customs procedures and the lack of transparency around regulations can be overwhelming to small businesses. While large businesses are not immune to these challenges, smaller firms do not always have the means to take on the extra costs and risks. As a result, the vast majority of American small businesses still do not export at all, and of the small portion that do export, most only export to one country.
President Obama is committed to addressing these barriers and giving American businesses of all sizes a fair shot in markets around the world. The Trans-Pacific Partnership (TPP), which the United States is negotiating with 11 other nations, includes the first chapter dedicated to addressing the challenges faced by many small businesses. Its completion would open markets that are home to the fastest-growing middle class in the world to ‘Made in America’ goods and services. That would be welcome news for small businesses like Planson, which faces tariffs of up to 30 percent in TPP markets.
When TPP is combined with the Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership, an ambitious deal the United States is negotiating with the European Union, American businesses and their workers will be at the center of a free trade zone that covers nearly two-thirds of the global economy. With that central position, America can become the world’s production platform of choice, the place everyone wants to set up shop in order to make things and sell them here and around the world.
But realizing these gains requires leadership. In recent years, countries across the Asia-Pacific have struck more than 200 trade deals, while American workers and businesses have largely missed out. We cannot afford to sit on the sidelines as others strike deals that put our businesses and workers at a competitive disadvantage and encourage a race to the bottom. By moving forward with standards that reflect our interests and values, including the highest labor and environmental protections, we can protect American jobs and catalyze a race to the top.
The first step in that leadership is passing bipartisan trade promotion legislation, which puts Congress in the driver’s seat to define U.S. negotiating objectives and priorities for trade agreements. TPA clarifies and strengthens public and Congressional oversight by requiring consultation and transparency throughout the negotiating process. Importantly, it also makes clear to our trading partners that the Administration and Congress are on the same page in negotiating high standards in our trade agreements. Not surprisingly, Congress has used trade promotion legislation to work with American presidents from both parties going back to FDR, including every president during the last four decades.
As this new report underscores, the world wants what America is selling. To unlock the opportunity that beckons beyond our borders, we must lead on trade.
Article Is By US Trade Representative Michael Froman and Secretary of Commerce Penny Pritzker
Froman is the 17th USTR, serving since 2013. Pritzker is the 38th Secretary of Commerce, serving since 2013
173,000 New Jobs In August And At 5.1 percent, US Unemployment Rate Is Lowest In Seven Years
WASHINGTON — U.S. Secretary of Labor Thomas E. Perez issued the following statement about the August 2015 Employment Situation report released today: “The strong and steady recovery of the U.S. economy continued last month, with the addition of 173,000 new jobs. August was the 66th consecutive month of private sector job growth with private employers having now created 13.1 million jobs since the beginning of 2010.
“The unemployment rate continues to fall, with August’s rate at 5.1 percent, down from a year ago when it was 6.1 percent. That makes a full year below 6 percent, following more than six years (73 straight months) of an unemployment rate above 6 percent.
“We saw growth in different sectors of the economy in August, for instance in health care, a sector that includes traditional occupations like nursing and jobs of the future like health IT. Local governments were also hiring, creating thousands of jobs such as teachers as our children head back to school in the fall.
“While the Great Recession is behind us, not every household is experiencing rising incomes and living standards. So many people are still struggling to find work. Even many of those who have jobs find themselves running in place, still unable to get ahead despite working harder than ever. For an even more robust recovery that lifts up more people, we need Congress to come together to raise the national minimum wage and pass a transportation infrastructure bill, along with avoiding self-inflicted wounds by eliminating sequestration.
“It’s also critical that workers have the ability to stand up and speak out for better wages, benefits and working conditions. The labor movement and union membership have traditionally been our most powerful expressions of worker voice. Next month when President Obama convenes a Summit on Worker Voice, we will focus on ways to strengthen organizing efforts and protect collective bargaining rights, in addition to exploring new models for empowering workers.
“In my travels around the country over the last month, I’ve met with workers, employers and community leaders who are working together to build an economy that expands opportunity for everyone. They share the president’s belief and my belief that we build a stronger nation through shared prosperity, that America is at its best when more people have more.
“As we celebrate Labor Day this weekend, let’s remember that this is a holiday about more than picnics, barbecues and enjoying the final, fleeting days of summer. It is a tribute to the ingenuity and mettle of America’s extraordinary working men and women. For everything they contribute to our economic strength and resilience, let’s do everything possible to help them thrive.”
2015 to Kick Off with Steady Hiring Expectations in the U.S. According to Manpower Employment Outlook
MILWAUKEE, The latest Manpower Employment Outlook Survey, released today by ManpowerGroup, demonstrates a continuation of U.S. employers’ growing optimism about the labor market. The result is a seasonally adjusted Net Employment Outlook of +16% for the first quarter of 2015, a level last reported seven years ago in Q1 2008 when the Outlook was also +16%. The Outlook is relatively stable compared to Q4 2014 and slightly improved from one year ago at this time.
Globally, staffing levels are expected to grow by varying margins in all but four countries, but there is little evidence of a broad-based acceleration of hiring activity. In addition to the U.S., employer confidence in the U.K. also keeps up its gradual improvement. Hiring intentions in China and Brazil remain positive, but the energetic pace that once characterized both labor markets continues to slow to more modest levels. Meanwhile, hiring in Ireland and Spain is expected to regain momentum as Outlooks again turn positive following the dips into negative territory three months ago.
U.S. Results Summary
Of the more than 18,000 U.S. employers surveyed, 19 percent anticipate an increase in staff levels during Q1 2015, while 6 percent expect to reduce workforce levels. Seventy-three percent of employers report no change in their hiring plans, and the final 2 percent of employers are undecided about their hiring intentions. When seasonal variations are removed from the data, the U.S. Net Employment Outlook is +16%.
“As overall demand improves, we continue to see consistent, gradual strengthening in U.S. employers’ hiring plans,” said ManpowerGroup CEO Jonas Prising. “There’s a little wind at our backs, as evidenced by the broadly positive hiring plans, and we see that as boding well for 2015.”
U.S. Hiring Plans by Regions, Industry Sectors and States/Metro Areas
The first quarter research shows a slight increase in U.S. employers’ quarter-over-quarter hiring intentions across all regions, and a moderate increase in the Midwest and West compared to one year ago at this time.
Employers have a positive Outlook in all 13 industry sectors included in the survey, with Leisure & Hospitality, Wholesale & Retail Trade, Transportation & Utilities and Professional & Business Services employers reporting the strongest hiring intentions.
Employers in all 50 states, the District of Columbia and Puerto Rico have positive hiring Outlooks. Those in Hawaii, North Dakota, Delaware, Michigan and Texas indicate the strongest Net Employment Outlooks, while New Jersey, Alaska, New Hampshire and Rhode Island employers project the weakest Outlooks.
Among employers in the 100 largest metropolitan statistical areas, the strongest job prospects are expected in:
Cape Coral, Fla.
McAllen, Texas
Deltona, Fla.
Grand Rapids, Mich.
Milwaukee, Wis.
Oxnard, Calif.
The weakest Outlooks are projected in:
Spokane, Wash.
Portland, Ore.
Syracuse, N.Y.
Rochester, N.Y.
Indianapolis, Ind.
Global Results Summary
More than 65,000 employers across 42 countries and territories were interviewed to anticipate global labor market activity. Around the globe, employers in 38 of the 42 countries and territories report positive first-quarter hiring plans. This compares with 36 of 42 in Q4 2014.
Hiring intentions strengthen in 22 of 42 countries and territories when compared with Q4 2014, but decline in 12. When compared year-over-year, hiring intentions strengthen in 24 countries and territories but decline in 13.
Hiring confidence for the first three months of the new year is strongest among employers in India, Taiwan, New Zealand, Japan, Turkey and Panama while the weakest and only negative outlooks are reported in Finland, Italy, Netherlands and Switzerland.
“Employers are acutely aware that the economic situation could change on short notice due to unfolding geopolitical events or a slowdown in Europe, and that is contributing to moderate global jobs growth and a continuation of the patterns we’ve seen in prior quarters,” added Prising. “It remains a very slow and uneven labor market recovery globally, and employers are reacting to an uncertain environment with a degree of caution.”
Complete results for the Manpower Employment Outlook Survey are available for download. Data specific to the U.S. can be found here, and results for all 42 countries and territories surveyed are available here.
The next Manpower Employment Outlook Survey will be released on March 10, 2015, to report hiring expectations for Quarter 2 2015. Sign-up here to receive e-mail notification when the survey is available each quarter.
*The Net Employment Outlook, often shortened to simply Outlook or NEO, is derived by taking the percentage of employers anticipating an increase in hiring activity and subtracting from this the percentage of employers expecting a decrease in hiring activity.
About ManpowerGroupManpowerGroup™ (NYSE: MAN) has been the world’s workforce expert, creating innovative workforce solutions, for more than 65 years. As workforce experts, we connect more than 600,000 men and women to meaningful work across a wide range of skills and industries every day. Through our ManpowerGroup family of brands — Manpower®, Experis™, Right Management ® and ManpowerGroup™ Solutions — we help more than 400,000 clients in 80 countries and territories address their critical talent needs, providing comprehensive solutions to resource, manage and develop talent. In 2014, ManpowerGroup was named one of the World’s Most Ethical Companies for the fourth consecutive year and one of Fortune’s Most Admired Companies, confirming our position as the most trusted and admired brand in the industry. See how ManpowerGroup makes powering the world of work humanly possible: www.manpowergroup.com.
2021 China Nantong Talent Entrepreneurship Week and Science and Technology Industry Talent Development Conference kicked off
NANTONG, China, Nov. 30, 2021 — On the morning of November 29, the 2021 China Nantong Talent Entrepreneurship Week and Science and Technology Industry Talent Development Conference hosted by Nantong City opened in Nantong. 24 academicians from home and abroad, as well as professors and experts from high-level universities and institutes, top talents, global scientific experts, investors, and national mainstream media gathered in Nantong to share the opportunities of the times and future development, according to Nantong Talent Office.
The opening ceremony of the 2021 China Nantong Talent Entrepreneurship Week and Science and Technology Industry Talent Development Conference
The opening ceremony of the 2021 China Nantong Talent Entrepreneurship Week and Science and Technology Industry Talent Development Conference
Today’s Nantong is more eager for talents than ever before, and it is more qualified to achieve talents than ever.
Nantong will come up with sincere intentions, real conditions and real support, and launch a series of highly competitive products. Nantong will establish and improve a multi-level housing supply system from “a bed” to “a room” to “a house”, continue to improve the supporting functions of public services, and provide maximum support for talents to come and start businesses.
Nantong will be more exciting because of the talents, and the talents will be more excellent in Nantong.
The opening ceremony released the “Policies on Further Improving the Development Index of Youth and Talent-Friendly Cities” (Talent New Policy 3.0) and the plan for the Technology and Innovation Belt along the Yangtze River. A talent map for the biomedical industry was launched to provide all-round policy guarantees and a good environment for companies and talents that come to start-up and develop and send a sincere invitation to the world’s talents. In 2021, Nantong has newly selected 71 talents in provincial innovation system, and 87 talents in municipal innovation system.
This year is the 11th consecutive year that Nantong has held Talent Entrepreneurship Week. In addition to the opening ceremony, this week will continue until December 4, and will simultaneously host 10 more competitions such as the 1st Nantong Overseas High-level Talent Innovation and Entrepreneurship Summit, the 2021 Nantong Technology Innovation Enterprise Summit and the 1st “North High-tech” Talent Competition, which will empower all aspects of this talent conference.
Image Attachments Links:
Link: http://asianetnews.net/view-attachment?attach-id=409271
Caption: The opening ceremony of the 2021 China Nantong Talent Entrepreneurship Week and
Science and Technology Industry Talent Development Conference
SOURCE Nantong Talent Office
CONTACT: Mr. Wang, Tel: +86-10-63074558
2022 Starts with Strong Job Growth
NEW YORK, Feb. 4, 2022 — Today’s jobs report showed a better-than-expected increase in the number of jobs in January. Disruptions related to the Omicron variant do not seem to have derailed continued progress in the labor market. However, headwinds for employers persist, as labor shortages are still severe and economic activity remains healthy.
Nonfarm payroll employment increased by 467,000 in January, after an upwardly revised increase of 510,000 in December. The unemployment rate ticked up slightly to 4.0 percent, as the number of job-leavers and those on temporary layoffs increased; the labor force participation rate remained essentially the same at 62.2 percent in January after taking the new population controls into account. Overall, jobs still number 2.9 million below prepandemic (February 2020) levels, with women representing 63 percent of these employment losses. Note that this month’s release incorporates larger revisions to the Establishment Survey (used for nonfarm payroll employment) and Household Survey (used for the unemployment rate). Revisions to payroll employment were especially large over the past year.
Leisure and hospitality gained 151,000 jobs in January—a possible signal that businesses have become better at continuing operations amid a surge in COVID-19 infections. A majority of other industries also added new jobs, except for construction and mining, where small job losses were recorded. On the other hand, many businesses still experienced disruptions. For example, 6 million people reported that they had been unable to work because their employer closed or lost business due to the pandemic at some point in the past four weeks, up from 3.1 million in December.
Wages continued to rise rapidly. Average hourly earnings increased 5.7 percent over the past 12 months, signaling that recruitment and retention difficulties remain high. With the unemployment rate expected to fall to near 3 percent by the end of the year, labor markets will remain tight in 2022 and likely beyond. The US working-age population is projected to barely grow over the next decade. Employers hiring manual labor and services workers (such as transportation, construction, food services, and personal care) will face an especially hard time finding qualified workers. In such an environment, wage growth will likely remain elevated, which in turn would put more pressure on price inflation.
Some relief could come for employers if more people would return to the labor force, but the labor force participation rate is still at 62.2 percent—more than 1 percentage point below its prepandemic rate. Continued improvements in the labor market and higher wages should attract some people back to the job market, and participation rates may improve slightly during 2022. On the other hand, workers retiring early during the pandemic explain part of the gap in participation, and few of these older workers are expected to return.
Job growth in November and December was revised up by 709,000, implying job growth did not slow towards the end of 2021. This jobs report supports the Fed’s increasingly hawkish guidance, and we are currently expecting at minimum four 25-basis-point interest-rate hikes in 2022.
SOURCE The Conference Board
CONTACT: Jonathan Liu (732) 991-1754 / jonathan.liu@tcb.org
271, 000 New Jobs In October – The Most Robust Month of Job Growth Yet in 2015
The latest jobs report shows that our nation continues to bounce back from our worst economic crisis in generations. October was the most robust month of job growth in 2015, with total nonfarm employment increasing by 271,000.
Performance was especially strong in professional and business services, retail trade, and construction, which nearly doubled its prior 12-month average. Private employers have now added 13.5 million jobs over 68 straight months of growth, the longest such streak on record. The unemployment rate inched downward to 5.0 percent and has not been lower since February of 2008. Wages are up, as average hourly earnings rose by 9 cents in October and have enjoyed their largest over-the-year increase (2.5 percent) in more than six years.
Today’s report comes on top of other promising economic indicators. As of the end of August, there were 5.4 million job openings, the second most since we have been collecting that data. Over the 12-month period ending in September, gas prices fell 29.6 percent, putting more money in the pockets of working people. The U.S. auto industry, left for dead by many seven years ago, is surging back – the Big Three are now in the process of completing new collective bargaining agreements that will ensure their workers can get a fair share of the value they are helping create. In October as in September, auto sales maintained a pace that would surpass 18 million a year, the first time that has happened in back-to-back months since February 2000.
But our work is anything but done. There is ground to make up and challenges that remain. We need to continue creating jobs. We need a tighter labor market to continue putting upward pressure on wages. We need to close opportunity gaps and ensure that the wind at our back propels everyone forward.
President Obama and the Labor Department continue to take steps toward those goals: fighting for a higher minimum wage; investing in successful job-training strategies like the learn-while-you-earn apprenticeship model; giving people who have been involved in the criminal justice system greater access to job opportunities; and making affordable health care available to more people with the launch last week of the latest open enrollment period in the Health Insurance Marketplace.
With 14 and a half months to go in this administration – 441 days until “the weekend” – we want to work with Democrats and Republicans in Congress to complete the unfinished business of this recovery, to create shared prosperity and build an economy that works for everyone.
321,000 New Jobs Added In US – 2014 Is Best Year For Job Gains Since 1999
Total nonfarm payroll employment increased by 321,000 in November, and the unemployment
rate was unchanged at 5.8 percent, the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics reported today.
Job gains were widespread, led by growth in professional and business services, retail
trade, health care, and manufacturing.
Household Survey Data
In November, the unemployment rate held at 5.8 percent, and the number of unemployed
persons was little changed at 9.1 million. Over the year, the unemployment rate and
the number of unemployed persons were down by 1.2 percentage points and 1.7 million,
respectively.
Among the major worker groups, the unemployment rate for adult men rose to 5.4 percent
in November. The rates for adult women (5.3 percent), teenagers (17.7 percent), whites
(4.9 percent), blacks (11.1 percent), and Hispanics (6.6 percent) showed little change
over the month. The jobless rate for Asians was 4.8 percent (not seasonally adjusted),
little changed from a year earlier.
The number of long-term unemployed (those jobless for 27 weeks or more) was little
changed at 2.8 million in November. These individuals accounted for 30.7 percent of
the unemployed. Over the past 12 months, the number of long-term unemployed declined
by 1.2 million.
The civilian labor force participation rate held at 62.8 percent in November and has
been essentially unchanged since April. The employment-population ratio, at 59.2
percent, was unchanged in November but is up by 0.6 percentage point over the year.
The number of persons employed part time for economic reasons (sometimes referred to
as involuntary part-time workers), at 6.9 million, changed little in November. These
individuals, who would have preferred full-time employment, were working part time
because their hours had been cut back or because they were unable to find a full-time
job.
In November, 2.1 million persons were marginally attached to the labor force,
essentially unchanged from a year earlier. (The data are not seasonally adjusted.)
These individuals were not in the labor force, wanted and were available for work,
and had looked for a job sometime in the prior 12 months. They were not counted as
unemployed because they had not searched for work in the 4 weeks preceding the
survey.
Among the marginally attached, there were 698,000 discouraged workers in November,
little different from a year earlier. (The data are not seasonally adjusted.)
Discouraged workers are persons not currently looking for work because they believe
no jobs are available for them. The remaining 1.4 million persons marginally attached
to the labor force in November had not searched for work for reasons such as school
attendance or family responsibilities.
Establishment Survey Data
Total nonfarm payroll employment rose by 321,000 in November, compared with an
average monthly gain of 224,000 over the prior 12 months. In November, job growth
was widespread, led by gains in professional and business services, retail trade,
health care, and manufacturing. (See table B-1.)
Employment in professional and business services increased by 86,000 in November,
compared with an average gain of 57,000 per month over the prior 12 months. Within
the industry, accounting and bookkeeping services added 16,000 jobs in November.
Employment continued to trend up in temporary help services (+23,000), management
and technical consulting services (+7,000), computer systems design and related
services (+7,000), and architectural and engineering services (+5,000).
Employment in retail trade rose by 50,000 in November, compared with an average
gain of 22,000 per month over the prior 12 months. In November, job gains occurred
in motor vehicle and parts dealers (+11,000); clothing and accessories stores
(+11,000); sporting goods, hobby, book, and music stores (+9,000); and nonstore
retailers (+6,000).
Health care added 29,000 jobs over the month. Employment continued to trend up in
offices of physicians (+7,000), home health care services (+5,000), outpatient care
centers (+4,000), and hospitals (+4,000). Over the past 12 months, employment in
health care has increased by 261,000.
In November, manufacturing added 28,000 jobs. Durable goods manufacturers accounted
for 17,000 of the increase, with small gains in most of the component industries.
Employment in nondurable goods increased by 11,000, with plastics and rubber products
(+7,000) accounting for most of the gain. Over the year, manufacturing has added
171,000 jobs, largely in durable goods.
Financial activities added 20,000 jobs in November, with half of the gain in insurance
carriers and related activities. Over the past year, insurance has contributed 70,000
jobs to the overall employment gain of 114,000 in financial activities.
Transportation and warehousing employment increased by 17,000 in November, with a
gain in couriers and messengers (+5,000). Over the past 12 months, transportation
and warehousing has added 143,000 jobs.
Employment in food services and drinking places continued to trend up in November
(+27,000) and has increased by 321,000 over the year.
Construction employment also continued to trend up in November (+20,000). Employment in
specialty trade contractors rose by 21,000, mostly in the residential component. Over
the past 12 months, construction has added 213,000 jobs, with just over half the gain
among specialty trade contractors.
In November, the average workweek for all employees on private nonfarm payrolls rose
by 0.1 hour to 34.6 hours. The manufacturing workweek rose by 0.2 hour to 41.1 hours,
and factory overtime edged up by 0.1 hour to 3.5 hours. The average workweek for
production and nonsupervisory employees on private nonfarm payrolls was unchanged at
33.8 hours.
Average hourly earnings for all employees on private nonfarm payrolls rose by 9 cents
to $24.66 in November. Over the year, average hourly earnings have risen by 2.1 percent.
In November, average hourly earnings of private-sector production and nonsupervisory
employees increased by 4 cents to $20.74.
The change in total nonfarm payroll employment for September was revised from +256,000
to +271,000, and the change for October was revised from +214,000 to +243,000. With
these revisions, employment gains in September and October combined were 44,000 more
than previously reported.
A New Take on Employee Retention: Applying User Experience Principles to Attract and Retain Talent
MILWAUKEE, – ManpowerGroup Solutions, the world’s largest RPO provider, released the insights paper today, “Rethinking Retention: A User Experience Approach to Keeping Great People.” As traditional retention incentives become unsustainable, organizations are looking for new ways to attract and retain the best talent. ManpowerGroup Solutions provides a fresh perspective on retention, using a method most commonly found in product and service development: user experience modeling. This approach places employee motivations, interests and behaviors at the heart of organizational culture.
“Companies aren’t investing in organizationally-aligned retention strategies in the same way they do their brand and employer value proposition,” said Steve Lopez, vice president, ManpowerGroup Solutions, Consulting & Solutions. “Retention strategies that are in place tend to be one-size-fits-all, which doesn’t effectively meet employee needs. We segment our customer market – why not our employees?”
Many companies neglect to invest in making retention a part of organizational culture, with everyone aligned to a singular set of retention-focused expectations and behaviors. Integrating a user experience retention model that starts from the moment an individual first learns about an organization, all the way through to the exit interview, takes significant time, planning and stakeholder engagement, and can be difficult to achieve among competing priorities. Organizations should analyze their existing retention models using the following steps:
1.Conduct a user needs survey: Evaluate your value proposition and understand your candidates and employees – where to find them, what drives them and what they want in their careers.
2.Develop, test and refine content: Gather and analyze survey results to understand what people need. For example, candidates may want more corporate culture insight, while employees might be more motivated by information about development opportunities.
3.Evaluate functionality: Ask people if the systems in place work for them and create engagement. Understand when, where, why and how retention is breaking down.
4.Design the process: Ensure that candidates and employees can intuitively find the resources they need to enjoy doing their job well. This requires understanding when, where and how people interact with the employer brand, from digital channels and internal communication, to managers, mentors, peers and third-party sources.
5.Create a visual experience: Consider how people experience your organization from the standpoint of web/social media, office and workspace, and external marketing. Ensure the visual experiences aligns with the organization’s mission, vision, values and culture.
“Employers are quick to turn to conventional wisdom when it comes to retention, assuming it’s either a must-have or something impossible to achieve. In reality, retention is about strategic growth and finding right-fit employees that contribute to the long-term survival and success of the organization,” said Lopez. “Creating a culture and mindset of user-centered retention will generate deep engagement that yields the retention organizations desire.”
Acquisition of IT Consulting Company Further Strengthens Experis Capabilities in North America
MILWAUKEE, – Experis, the global leader in professional resourcing and project-based solutions, and part of the ManpowerGroup (NYSE: MAN) family of companies, has today announced it will acquire the majority ownership of Veritaaq in Canada. With this transaction, which is expected to close in late September, Experis further strengthens its capabilities across North America and complements the organic growth of the Experis business in Canada.
Veritaaq is one of the largest suppliers of IT consulting services to Canada’s federal government and partner to leading telecommunications, financial services, and oil and gas organizations. Veritaaq currently operates in Ottawa, Toronto, Montreal, Vancouver and Calgary.
“This strategic partnership helps further accelerate our strategy of shifting our business mix towards higher value and professional solutions,” said Jonas Prising, ManpowerGroup CEO. “Employers need the best IT professionals to keep pace with technological advances, and this acquisition allows us to bring even more IT talent to organizations so they can achieve their business objectives.”
“Veritaaq has been looking for a partner to help us continue our growth strategy and build on our success,” said Paul Genier, Veritaaq President. “I am delighted that we have found that partner in Experis, and this strategic initiative will provide tremendous benefits in dramatically increasing Veritaaq’s breadth and scale of service offerings.”
About ManpowerGroupManpowerGroup® (NYSE: MAN) is the world’s workforce expert, creating innovative workforce solutions for more than 65 years. As workforce experts, we connect more than 600,000 people to meaningful work across a wide range of skills and industries every day. Through our ManpowerGroup family of brands – Manpower®, Experis®, Right Management ® and ManpowerGroup® Solutions – we help more than 400,000 clients in 80 countries and territories address their critical talent needs, providing comprehensive solutions to resource, manage and develop talent. In 2015, ManpowerGroup was named one of the World’s Most Ethical Companies for the fifth consecutive year and one of Fortune’s Most Admired Companies, confirming our position as the most trusted and admired brand in the industry. See how ManpowerGroup makes powering the world of work humanly possible: www.manpowergroup.com
About Experis
Experis™ is the global leader in professional resourcing and project-based solutions. Experis accelerates organizations’ growth by attracting, assessing and placing specialized expertise in IT, Finance and Engineering to deliver in-demand talent for mission-critical positions and projects, enhancing the competitiveness of the organizations and people we serve. Experis is part of the ManpowerGroup family of companies, which also includes Manpower, ManpowerGroup Solutions and Right Management. To learn more, visit www.experis.com
About VeritaaqVeritaaq is a leading IT consulting firm helping organizations achieve their business goals by leveraging information technology. With more than 30 years of experience, Veritaaq has a proven track record of building trusted relationships while providing the highest level of IT consulting.
Headquartered in Ottawa, Ontario, with offices in Toronto, Vancouver, Montreal, and Calgary, our team includes more than 750 highly specialized consultants. Veritaaq works with top clients in the telecommunications, financial, and oil and gas sectors and also serves all levels of government.
ADP Joins STEM Mentoring Initiative “Million Women Mentors”
ROSELAND, N.J. – ADP®, a leading global provider of Human Capital Management (HCM) solutions, today announced its sponsorship and collaboration with the Million Women Mentors® (MWM) initiative. MWM will launch Jan. 8, 2014 during National Mentoring Month, in Washington, D.C. at the National Press Club. The initiative will support the engagement of one million science, technology, engineering and math (STEM) mentors – male and female – to increase the interest and confidence of girls and young women to pursue and succeed in STEM degrees and careers.
“Encouraging young people, particularly young women, to consider STEM careers is an important initiative that has significant social and economic benefits, that is why ADP supports several higher learning institutions and non-profit organizations that include this focus in their mission,” said ADP President and CEO Carlos Rodriguez. “Supporting the Million Women Mentors program is a great opportunity for us to expand our efforts and we hope other companies across the country will join us.”
In the past 10 years, growth in STEM jobs has been three times greater than that of non-STEM jobs. Today 80% of the fastest growing occupations in the United States depend on mastery of mathematics and knowledge and skills in hard sciences. While women comprise 48% of the U.S. workforce, just 24% are in STEM fields, a statistic that has held constant for nearly the last decade. Even though 75% of all college students are women and students of color, they represent only 45% of STEM degrees earned each year. Too many of these young women begin in STEM programs but leave those degree paths despite their good academic standing, often citing uncomfortable classroom experiences and disconcerting climate. Even when women earn a STEM degree, they are less likely than their male counterparts to work in a STEM field even though STEM jobs pay more and have a lower wage gap: 92 cents on a dollar versus 75 cents in other fields.*
One STEM initiative launched in 2013 by ADP’s Cobalt division, which supplies digital marketing solutions to the automotive industry, is “Girls Who Code.” Girls Who Code is an eight-week paid summer internship program for high school girls who have studied Advanced Placement computer science. It offers a highly-structured approach where two-girl teams are given a project to complete along with a mentor to guide them. Other opportunities to interact with Cobalt professionals to get advice, mentoring and career insights are provided, particularly by women associates.
“Girls Who Code is a perfect fit with our diversity and inclusion goals at ADP, as is Million Women Mentors,” said Rita Mitjans, Chief Diversity and Corporate Social Responsibility officer at ADP. “It is programs like these that will positively contribute to economic growth by empowering a significant segment of the workforce and help us to attract and retain the next generation of STEM talent among young women.”
Million Women Mentors is a collective effort of more than 41 non-profit, media, education and government industry partners and nine corporate sponsors. During National Mentoring Month ADP will actively engage its Executive Women In Leadership group, IT leaders across the company and ADP’s Regional Diversity Councils and Resource Groups, to bring awareness to the issue of increasing girls in STEM and recruit mentors for the MWM initiative.
This Press Release is courtesy of www.ADP.com
ADP National Employment Report: Private Sector Employment Increased by 152,000 Jobs in May; Annual Pay was Up 5.0%
ROSELAND, N.J., June 5, 2024 — Private sector employment increased by 152,000 jobs in May and annual pay was up 5.0 percent year-over-year, according to the May ADP® National Employment ReportTM produced by the ADP Research Institute® in collaboration with the Stanford Digital Economy Lab (“Stanford Lab”). The ADP National Employment Report is an independent measure and high-frequency view of the private-sector labor market based on actual, anonymized payroll data of more than 25 million U.S. employees.
The jobs report and pay insights use ADP’s fine-grained anonymized and aggregated payroll data to provide a representative picture of the private-sector labor market. The report details the current month’s total private employment change, and weekly job data from the previous month. Because the underlying ADP payroll databases are continuously updated, the report provides a high-frequency, near real-time measure of U.S. employment. This measure reflects the number of employees on ADP client payrolls (Payroll Employment) to provide a richer understanding of the labor market. ADP’s pay measure uniquely captures the earnings of a cohort of almost 10 million employees over a 12-month period.
“Job gains and pay growth are slowing going into the second half of the year,” said Nela Richardson, chief economist, ADP. “The labor market is solid, but we’re monitoring notable pockets of weakness tied to both producers and consumers.”
May 2024 Report Highlights*
View the ADP National Employment Report and interactive charts at www.adpemploymentreport.com.
JOBS REPORT
Private employers added 152,000 jobs in May
Job gains were slower in May due to a steep decline in manufacturing. Leisure and hospitality also showed weaker hiring.
Change in U.S. Private Employment: 152,000
Change by Industry Sector
– Goods-producing: 3,000
Natural resources/mining -9,000
Construction 32,000
Manufacturing -20,000
– Service-providing: 149,000
Trade/transportation/utilities 55,000
Information -7,000
Financial activities 28,000
Professional/business services -6,000
Education/health services 46,000
Leisure/hospitality 12,000
Other services 21,000
Change by U.S. Regions
– Northeast: 44,000
New England -1,000
Middle Atlantic 45,000
– Midwest: 9,000
East North Central 6,000
West North Central 3,000
– South: 101,000
South Atlantic 45,000
East South Central -4,000
West South Central 60,000
– West: -10,000
Mountain 8,000
Pacific -18,000
Change by Establishment Size
– Small establishments: -10,000
1-19 employees 26,000
20-49 employees -36,000
– Medium establishments: 79,000
50-249 employees 49,000
250-499 employees 30,000
– Large establishments: 98,000
500+ employees 98,000
PAY INSIGHTS
Pay gains for job-changers slowed in May
Year-over-year pay gains for job-changers fell for the second month. Pay for job-changers was up 7.8 percent while pay growth for job-stayers held steady for the third month at 5 percent.
Median Change in Annual Pay (ADP matched person sample)
– Job-Stayers 5.0%
– Job-Changers 7.8%
Median Change in Annual Pay for Job-Stayers by Industry Sector
– Goods-producing:
Natural resources/mining 4.4%
Construction 5.3%
Manufacturing 4.7%
– Service-providing:
Trade/transportation/utilities 4.6%
Information 4.6%
Financial activities 5.1%
Professional/business services 4.8%
Education/health services 5.5%
Leisure/hospitality 5.5%
Other services 5.3%
Median Change in Annual Pay for Job-Stayers by Firm Size
– Small firms:
1-19 employees 4.2%
20-49 employees 5.0%
– Medium firms:
50-249 employees 5.2%
250-499 employees 5.0%
– Large firms:
500+ employees 4.9%
To see Pay Insights by U.S. State, Gender, and Age for Job-Stayers, visit here:
* Sum of components may not equal total, due to rounding.
The April total of jobs added was revised from 192,000 to 188,000. The historical data file, and weekly data for the previous month, is available at https://adpemploymentreport.com/.
The April Pay Insights numbers have also been revised from 9.3 percent to 8 percent for job-changers due to a process correction in March to the Pay Insights data.
To subscribe to monthly email alerts or obtain additional information about the ADP National Employment Report, including employment and pay data, interactive charts, methodology, and a calendar of release dates, please visit https://adpemploymentreport.com/.
The June 2024 ADP National Employment Report will be released at 8:15 a.m. ET on July 3, 2024.
About the ADP® National Employment Report™
The ADP National Employment Report is an independent measure of the change in U.S. private employment and pay derived from actual, anonymized payroll data of client companies served by ADP, a leading provider of human capital management solutions. The report is produced by ADP Research Institute in collaboration with the Stanford Digital Economy Lab.
The ADP National Employment Report is broadly distributed to the public each month, free of charge, as part of the company’s commitment to offering deeper insights of the U.S. labor market and providing businesses and governments with a source of credible and valuable information.
About the ADP Research Institute®
The ADP Research Institute delivers data-driven discoveries about the world of work and derives reliable economic indicators from these insights. We offer these findings as a unique contribution to making the world of work better and more productive by delivering actionable insights to the economy at large.
About ADP (NASDAQ – ADP)
Designing better ways to work through cutting-edge products, premium services and exceptional experiences that enable people to reach their full potential. HR, Talent, Time Management, Benefits and Payroll. Informed by data and designed for people. Learn more at ADP.com
ADP, the ADP logo, and Always Designing for People, ADP National Employment Report, and ADP Research Institute are registered trademarks of ADP, Inc. All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright © 2024 ADP, Inc. All rights reserved.
ADP-Media
SOURCE ADP, Inc.
For further information: Joanna DiNizio, ADP, Inc., (973) 369-8167, joanna.dinizio@adp.com
ADP National Employment Report: Private Sector Employment Increased by 205,000 Jobs in January
ROSELAND, NJ – 02/03/16 – Private sector employment increased by 205,000 jobs from December to January according to the January ADP National Employment Report®. Broadly distributed to the public each month, free of charge, the ADP National Employment Report is produced by ADP® in collaboration with Moody’s Analytics. The report, which is derived from ADP’s actual payroll data, measures the change in total nonfarm private employment each month on a seasonally-adjusted basis.
Payrolls for businesses with 49 or fewer employees increased by 79,000 jobs in January, down from December’s upwardly revised 101,000. Employment among companies with 50-499 employees increased by 82,000 jobs, up still further from December’s upwardly revised 77,000. Employment at large companies — those with 500 or more employees — came in at 44,000, half of December’s downwardly revised 88,000. Companies with 500-999 added 15,000 jobs, while companies with over 1,000 employees gained 30,000 jobs.
Goods-producing employment rose by 13,000 jobs in January, well off from December’s upwardly revised 30,000. The construction industry added 21,000 jobs, which was roughly in line with the average monthly jobs gained during 2015. Meanwhile, manufacturing neither added nor lost jobs.
Service-providing employment rose by 192,000 jobs in January, down from an upwardly revised 237,000 in December. The ADP National Employment Report indicates that professional/business services contributed 44,000 jobs, down from 69,000 in December. Trade/transportation/utilities grew by 35,000, up slightly from a downwardly revised 33,000 the previous month. The 19,000 new jobs added in financial activities were the most in that sector since March 2006.
“One of the main reasons for lower overall employment gains in January was the drop off in jobs added at the largest companies compared to December. These businesses are more sensitive to current economic conditions than small and mid-sized companies,” said Ahu Yildirmaz, VP and head of the ADP Research Institute. “Over the past year, businesses with less than 500 employees have created nearly 80 percent of new jobs.”
Mark Zandi, chief economist of Moody’s Analytics, said, “Job growth remains strong despite the turmoil in the global economy and financial markets. Manufacturers and energy companies are reducing payrolls, but job gains across all other industries remain robust. The U.S. economy remains on track to return to full employment by mid-year.”
The matched sample used to develop the ADP National Employment Report was derived from ADP payroll data, which represents 411,000 U.S. clients employing nearly 24 million workers in the U.S. The December total of jobs added was revised from 257,000 to 267,000.
To obtain additional information about the ADP National Employment Report, including additional charts, supporting data and the schedule of future release dates, or to subscribe to the monthly email alerts and RSS feeds, please visit www.adpemploymentreport.com.
About the ADP National Employment Report®
The ADP National Employment Report® is a monthly measure of the change in total U.S. nonfarm private employment derived from actual, anonymous payroll data of client companies served by ADP®, a leading provider of human capital management solutions. The report, which measures nearly 24 million U.S. workers, is produced by the ADP Research Institute®, a specialized group within the company that provides insights around employment trends and workforce strategy, in collaboration with Moody’s Analytics, Inc.
Each month, ADP issues the ADP National Employment Report as part of the company’s commitment to adding deeper insights into the U.S. labor market and providing businesses, governments and others with a source of credible and valuable information. The ADP National Employment Report is broadly distributed to the public each month, free of charge.
The data for this report is collected for pay periods that can be interpolated to include the week of the 12th of each month, and processed with statistical methodologies similar to those used by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics to compute employment from its monthly survey of establishments. Due to this processing, this subset is modified to make it indicative of national employment levels; therefore, the resulting employment changes computed for the ADP National Employment Report are not representative of changes in ADP’s total base of U.S. business clients.
For a description of the underlying data and the statistical model used to create this report, please see “ADP National Employment Report: Development Methodology” at http://adpemploymentreport.com/common-legacy/docs/ADP-NER-Methodology-Full-Detail.pdf.
About Moody’s Analytics
Moody’s Analytics helps capital markets and risk management professionals worldwide respond to an evolving marketplace with confidence. The company offers unique tools and best practices for measuring and managing risk through expertise and experience in credit analysis, economic research and financial risk management. By providing leading-edge software, advisory services, and research, including the proprietary analysis of Moody’s Investors Service, Moody’s Analytics integrates and customizes its offerings to address specific business challenges. Moody’s Analytics is a subsidiary of Moody’s Corporation (NYSE: MCO), which reported revenue of $3.3 billion in 2014, employs approximately 10,200 people worldwide and maintains a presence in 35 countries. Further information is available at www.moodysanalytics.com.
About ADP (NASDAQ: ADP)
Powerful technology plus a human touch. Companies of all types and sizes around the world rely on ADP’s cloud software and expert insights to help unlock the potential of their people. HR. Talent. Benefits. Payroll. Compliance. Working together to build a better workforce. For more information, visit ADP.com.
ADP National Employment Report: Private Sector Employment Increased by 241,000 Jobs in December
ROSELAND, N.J. – January 7, 2015 – Private sector employment increased by 241,000 jobs from November to December according to the December ADP National Employment Report®. Broadly distributed to the public each month, free of charge, the ADP National Employment Report is produced by ADP®, a leading global provider of Human Capital Management (HCM) solutions, in collaboration with Moody’s Analytics. The report, which is derived from ADP’s actual payroll data, measures the change in total nonfarm private employment each month on a seasonally-adjusted basis.
Payrolls for businesses with 49 or fewer employees increased by 106,000 jobs in December, up from 99,000 in November. Employment among companies with 50-499 employees rose by 70,000, down slightly from November’s increase of 73,000. Employment at large companies – those with 500 or more employees – increased from 54,000 the previous month to 66,000 jobs added in December. Companies with 500-999 employees added 22,000 jobs, up from November’s 12,000, which accounted for most of the increase. Companies with over 1,000 employees added 43,000 jobs, just above November’s 42,000.
Goods-producing employment rose by 46,000 jobs in December, up from 40,000 jobs gained in November. The construction industry added 23,000 jobs, up from last month’s gain of 20,000. Meanwhile, manufacturing added 26,000 jobs in December, well above November’s 16,000 and the second highest monthly total of 2014 in that sector.
Service-providing employment rose by 194,000 jobs in December, up from 187,000 in November. The ADP National Employment Report indicates that professional/business services contributed 69,000 jobs in December. Expansion in trade/transportation/utilities grew by 44,000, down from November’s 54,000. The 16,000 new jobs added in financial activities was well above last month’s 5,000 and represented the largest monthly gain for 2014 in that sector.
“December delivered another strong number well above 200,000 to close out a solid year of employment growth with over two and a half million jobs added,” said Carlos Rodriguez, president and chief executive officer of ADP. “Small businesses continued to lead the way, but mid-sized and large companies also showed solid gains.”
Mark Zandi, chief economist of Moody’s Analytics, said, “The job market continues to power forward. Businesses across all industries and sizes are adding to payrolls. At the current pace of job growth, the economy will be back to full employment by this time next year.”
The matched sample used to develop the ADP National Employment Report was derived from ADP payroll data, which represents 411,000 U.S. clients employing nearly 24 million workers in the U.S. The November total of jobs added was revised from 208,000 to 227,000.
To obtain additional information about the ADP National Employment Report, including additional charts, supporting data and the schedule of future release dates, or to subscribe to the monthly email alerts and RSS feeds, please visit www.adpemploymentreport.com.
About the ADP National Employment Report®
The ADP National Employment Report® is a monthly measure of the change in total U.S. nonfarm private employment derived from actual, anonymous payroll data of client companies served by ADP®, a leading provider of human capital management solutions. The report, which measures nearly 24 million U.S. workers, is produced by the ADP Research Institute®, a specialized group within the company that provides insights around employment trends and workforce strategy, in collaboration with Moody’s Analytics, Inc.
Each month, ADP issues the ADP National Employment Report as part of the company’s commitment to adding deeper insights into the U.S. labor market and providing businesses, governments and others with a source of credible and valuable information. The ADP National Employment Report is broadly distributed to the public each month, free of charge.
The data for this report is collected for pay periods that can be interpolated to include the week of the 12th of each month, and processed with statistical methodologies similar to those used by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics to compute employment from its monthly survey of establishments. Due to this processing, this subset is modified to make it indicative of national employment levels; therefore, the resulting employment changes computed for the ADP National Employment Report are not representative of changes in ADP’s total base of U.S. business clients.
For a description of the underlying data and the statistical model used to create this report, please see “ADP National Employment Report: Development Methodology” at www.adpemploymentreport.com/docs/ADP-NER-Methodology-Full-Detail.pdf.
About Moody’s Analytics
Moody’s Analytics helps capital markets and risk management professionals worldwide respond to an evolving marketplace with confidence. The company offers unique tools and best practices for measuring and managing risk through expertise and experience in credit analysis, economic research and financial risk management. By providing leading-edge software, advisory services and research, including the proprietary analysis of Moody’s Investors Service, Moody’s Analytics integrates and customizes its offerings to address specific business challenges. Moody’s Analytics is a subsidiary of Moody’s Corporation (NYSE: MCO), which reported revenue of $3.0 billion in 2013, employs approximately 9,700 people worldwide, and has a presence in 31 countries. More information is available at www.moodysanalytics.com.
About ADP
Employers around the world rely on ADP® (NASDAQ: ADP) for cloud-based solutions and services to help manage their most important asset – their people. From human resources and payroll to talent management to benefits administration, ADP brings unmatched depth and expertise in helping clients build a better workforce. A pioneer in Human Capital Management (HCM) and business process outsourcing, ADP serves more than 610,000 clients in 100 countries. ADP.com.
ADP National Employment Report: Private Sector Employment Increased by 692,000 Jobs in June
ROSELAND, N.J., June 30, 2021 — Private sector employment increased by 692,000 jobs from May to June according to the June ADP® National Employment Report™. Broadly distributed to the public each month, free of charge, the ADP National Employment Report is produced by the ADP Research Institute® in collaboration with Moody’s Analytics. The report, which is derived from ADP’s actual payroll data, measures the change in total nonfarm private employment each month on a seasonally-adjusted basis.
Total U.S. Nonfarm Private Employment: 692,000
By Company Size
– Small businesses: 215,000
1-19 employees 93,000
20-49 employees 122,000
– Medium businesses: 236,000
50-499 employees 236,000
– Large businesses: 240,000
500-999 employees 51,000
1,000+ employees 190,000
By Sector
– Goods-producing: 68,000
Natural resources/mining 2,000
Construction 47,000
Manufacturing 19,000
– Service-providing: 624,000
Trade/transportation/utilities 62,000
Information -4,000
Financial activities 10,000
Professional/business services 53,000
– Professional/technical services 22,000
– Management of companies/enterprises -1,000
– Administrative/support services 32,000
Education/health services 123,000
– Health care/social assistance 93,000
– Education 30,000
Leisure/hospitality 332,000
Other services 48,000
* Sum of components may not equal total, due to rounding.
– Franchise Employment**
Franchise jobs 104,100
**Complete details on franchise employment can be found here.
“The labor market recovery remains robust, with June closing out a strong second quarter of jobs growth,” said Nela Richardson, chief economist, ADP. “While payrolls are still nearly 7 million short of pre-COVID-19 levels, job gains have totaled about 3 million since the beginning of 2021. Service providers, the hardest hit sector, continue to do the heavy lifting, with leisure and hospitality posting the strongest gain as businesses begin to reopen to full capacity across the country.”
The matched sample used to develop the ADP National Employment Report was derived from ADP payroll data, which represents 460,000 U.S. clients employing nearly 26 million workers in the U.S. The May total of jobs added was revised from 978,000 to 886,000.
To obtain additional information about the ADP National Employment Report, including additional charts, supporting data and the schedule of future release dates, or to subscribe to the monthly email alerts and RSS feeds, please visit www.adpemploymentreport.com.
The July 2021 ADP National Employment Report will be released at 8:15 a.m. ET on August 4, 2021.
About the ADP® National Employment Report™
The ADP® National Employment Report™ is a monthly measure of the change in total U.S. nonfarm private employment derived from actual, anonymous payroll data of client companies served by ADP®, a leading provider of human capital management solutions. The report, which measures nearly 26 million U.S. workers, is produced by the ADP Research Institute®, a specialized group within the company that provides insights around employment trends and workforce strategy, in collaboration with Moody’s Analytics, Inc.
Each month, ADP Research Institute issues the ADP National Employment Report as part of the company’s commitment to adding deeper insights into the U.S. labor market and providing businesses, governments and others with a source of credible and valuable information. The ADP National Employment Report is broadly distributed to the public each month, free of charge.
The data for this report is collected for pay periods that can be interpolated to include the week of the 12th of each month, and processed with statistical methodologies similar to those used by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics to compute employment from its monthly survey of establishments. Due to this processing, this subset is modified to make it indicative of national employment levels; therefore, the resulting employment changes computed for the ADP National Employment Report are not representative of changes in ADP’s total base of U.S. business clients.
For a description of the underlying data and the statistical model used to create this report, please see the ADP National Employment Report: Development Methodology.
About the ADP Research Institute
The mission of the ADP Research Institute is to generate data-driven discoveries about the world of work, and to derive reliable economic indicators from these insights. We offer these findings to the world at large as our unique contribution to making the world of work better and more productive, and to bring greater awareness to the economy at large.
About Moody’s Analytics
Moody’s Analytics provides financial intelligence and analytical tools to help business leaders make better, faster decisions. Our deep risk expertise, expansive information resources, and innovative application of technology help our clients confidently navigate an evolving marketplace. We are known for our industry-leading and award-winning solutions, made up of research, data, software, and professional services, assembled to deliver a seamless customer experience. We create confidence in thousands of organizations worldwide, with our commitment to excellence, open mindset approach, and focus on meeting customer needs.
About ADP (NASDAQ – ADP)
Designing better ways to work through cutting-edge products, premium services and exceptional experiences that enable people to reach their full potential. HR, Talent, Time Management, Benefits and Payroll. Informed by data and designed for people. Learn more at ADP.com
ADP, the ADP logo, and Always Designing for People, ADP National Employment Report, ADP Small Business Report, ADP National Franchise Report, and ADP Research Institute are registered trademarks of ADP, Inc. All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright © 2021 ADP, Inc. All rights reserved.
SOURCE ADP, Inc.
CONTACT: ADP-Media: Media Contact: Joanna DiNizio, ADP, Inc., (973) 369-8167, joanna.dinizio@adp.com
Related Links
www.adp.com
ADP Partners with ZipRecruiter to Help Businesses Improve Recruiting Efficiency
ROSELAND, N.J. — More than ever, businesses need to be able to source the right talent with limited resources so they can adapt, recover, and grow. That is why ADP®, a leading global provider of human capital management (HCM) solutions, is deepening its integration with ZipRecruiter®, the fastest-growing online employment marketplace2 and #1-rated job search app.3
ADP is the first HCM provider to make ZipRecruiter available directly to customers through its online platform. ZipRecruiter is now seamlessly embedded within ADP Workforce Now Recruitment, giving recruiters access to more qualified candidates and to intelligent tools that identify the best candidates for their roles.
“ADP is proud to deepen our relationship with ZipRecruiter. Over the past few years, we have helped tens of thousands of our shared customers find and hire the right candidates quickly,” said Laura Brown, president, major account services and ADP Canada. “Further integration will provide a strong return on investment for clients, continuing to lift ADP above competitors through unmatched data and intelligent technology.”
“ZipRecruiter is excited to provide a strong, reliable and streamlined solution for ADP’s customers at an especially challenging time in the economy,” said Ian Siegel, Co-Founder & CEO at ZipRecruiter. “ZipRecruiter’s tools are flexible, efficient, and easy, and free up time so that businesses can focus on adapting to changing business needs, innovating, and achieving their goals.”
The integration includes several key features:
Tools to help businesses find quality candidates faster:
Businesses will be able to distribute their jobs across 100+ job sites and reach over 30 million job seekers a month via mobile and web.1
Businesses will be able to use ZipRecruiter’s sponsored job posts to receive ten times more applicants, on average, than organic job posts typically do.4 Four out of five employers who post on ZipRecruiter receive a quality candidate within the first day.
ZipRecruiter’s industry-leading, smart-matching technology actively identifies qualified candidates and invites them to apply.
Ease and flexibility:
Job slots are flexible, allowing employers to easily swap a new job into a job slot or pause a search and activate it later.
If employers need to sponsor more jobs, they will be able to purchase additional sponsored job slots through the ADP Workforce Now Recruitment Module in 2021.
Employers who want to boost visibility of their jobs can purchase Traffic Boost within the Recruitment Module to drive additional applications in 2021.
Seamless integration with ADP Workforce Now:
Employers receive applications from candidates in real-time and view them directly in the ADP Workforce Now Recruitment module, eliminating complicated workflows, implementation time, and budget management.
One-Click apply ensures companies don’t miss out on top talent due to lengthy applications. With ZipApply, candidates can apply to jobs with just one click.
The integration is also complemented by new embedded recruitment capabilities powered by ADP® DataCloud, an award-winning people analytics and benchmarking platform that provides clients with in-depth workforce and business insights to enable critical HR decisions. These embedded intelligence capabilities are designed to help reduce time to fill and increase offer conversion rate. The first of these new intelligent features for recruitment is Profile Relevancy, a tool to help score, assess and match candidates that are the best fit for a job opening. The machine learning model is trained on 30M+ resumes and 5M+job postings to evaluate the skills, experience, and education fit across applications to bubble up the best candidates for recruiters.
Joining Profile Relevancy are ADP’s Compensation Benchmarks, which provides industry and geographic-level compensation data when creating job requisitions for guided, in-line decision making utilizing insights from over 90M unique employees and over 740k companies. Compensation Benchmarks help ensure confidence when making competitive job offers in a dynamic market.
ZipRecruiter’s smart matching technology and one-click ZipApply is currently available via ADP Workforce Now v24. To learn more about the full benefits that ADP and ZipRecruiter have to offer, please visit this link.
About ADP (NASDAQ – ADP)
Designing better ways to work through cutting-edge products, premium services and exceptional experiences that enable people to reach their full potential. HR, Talent, Time Management, Benefits and Payroll. Informed by data and designed for people. Learn more at ADP.com.
About ZipRecruiter
ZipRecruiter is a leading online employment marketplace that uses smart matching technology to actively connect millions of employers and job seekers. Since its inception in 2010, ZipRecruiter has helped over 2.3 million businesses of all sizes (from SMBs to Fortune 500 companies) find great candidates. Reaching over 30 million job seekers each month1, ZipRecruiter is the #1 Rated Job Search App on iOS and Android3 and is Rated #1 by Employers.5
ADP Research Institute® Report Reveals the Gig Workforce is Filling a Void in the Tight Labor Market
ROSELAND, N.J — While technology and innovation are transforming the way we work, they are also directly impacting why, when and where we work. In a first-of-its-kind study, the ADP Research Institute puts the spotlight on the gig workforce in organizations, often described as a hidden or ‘shadow workforce.’ The research report titled, Illuminating the Shadow Workforce: Insights into the Gig Workforce in Businesses, reveals tenured workers and retirees are capitalizing on the tight U.S. labor market and the need for skilled workers, by turning to gig work. The report also found 1 in 6 enterprise workers are actually gig workers paid as either 1099-MISC (1099-M) workers or short-term W-2 employees working one to six months. The report takes a close look at their compensation, varied skill sets, and motivations.
Backed by anonymized payroll data of 18 million workers from 75,000 companies, coupled with 16,800 direct survey responses from traditional employees and gig workers, and 21 C-level executive interviews, the research shows that this changing composition of the workforce has significant talent management, budget and compliance implications for businesses of all sizes.
In addition, the ADP Research Institute identified two worlds of gig workers in businesses. The first is comprised of 1099-M contractors who are independent contractors, often hired for their skillset on a project basis. These skilled, tenured workers tend to be older, highly educated and choose to work on what they enjoy. In fact, 30% of 1099-M gig workers are aged 55 or older. For some, their gig work is supplemental income to their retirement savings. The second includes short-term W-2 employees who are younger, less educated, have a lower income, and are typically working on a seasonal or on-call hire basis.
“It is clear there is a fundamental shift in the workforce as innovation continues to transform work, increasing the demand for skilled workers,” said Ahu Yildirmaz, co-head of the ADP Research Institute. “To bridge the talent gap in today’s tight labor market, many companies are hiring skilled workers at a premium. Our research shows that companies are turning to tenured, skilled workers and retirees on a gig-basis to meet this growing demand.”
Spotlight on the Gig Employment and Key Findings
Following are additional takeaways from the report:
Gig work is growing: From 2010 to 2019, the share of gig workers in businesses has increased by 15%, with both short-term W-2 and 1099-M gig workers contributing equally to this growth. The research indicates gig work will continue to grow, further impacting workforce dynamics and forcing companies to optimize talent management and workforce strategy.
Every industry relies on gig workers: Recreation, construction and business services are the top three industries utilizing the gig workforce.
Contract life is a choice: More than 70% of 1099-M gig workers say they are working independently by their own choice, not because they can’t find a “traditional” job. Most seem happy with gig work and place a premium on flexibility as a driving motivation behind their decision, over financial security or benefits. In fact, 60% of 1099-M gig workers say they will continue to gig for the next three years.
Gig work is not sporadic: More than half of the 1099-M contractors work for the same company for 12 consecutive months just like any traditional W-2 employee.
Earning potential is similar to a traditional worker: The average income for employees working for 12 consecutive months is similar, regardless of being a 1099-M worker or a traditional W-2 employee.
Millennials and Gen Z gig it their way: Gig workers under the age of 34 view themselves as traditional employees, perhaps reflecting the shift in the workforce. However, the prospect of health insurance does not appear to change their job behavior. In fact, 74% say they would continue to work as a 1099-M worker, even if they lost their current health insurance.
Added Yildirmaz, “While the term ‘gig worker’ has seamlessly integrated into our vernacular and culture, there has been no real data-driven insight into the gig workforce in the enterprise space. This ‘shadow workforce’ is comprised of workers with vast skillsets, who work across all industries and in all regions of the U.S. Additionally, we have found that the majority of these workers are doing gig work out of preference.”
To see the detailed report, Illuminating the Shadow Workforce: Insights into the Gig Workforce in Businesses, including all data and insights, please download the report here.
About the ADP Research Institute
The mission of the ADP Research Institute is to generate data-driven discoveries about the world of work, and to derive reliable economic indicators from these insights. We offer these findings to the world at large as our unique contribution to making the world of work better and more productive, and to bring greater awareness to the economy at large.
About ADP (NASDAQ: ADP)
Designing better ways to work through cutting-edge products, premium services and exceptional experiences that enable people to reach their full potential. HR, Talent, Time Management, Benefits, and Payroll. Informed by data and designed for people. Learn more at ADP.com
ADP to Present at Upcoming Investor Conference
ROSELAND, N.J. — ADP (Nasdaq: ADP), a leading global technology company providing human capital management (HCM) solutions, today announced that it will present at Citi’s 2023 Global Technology Conference in New York on Thursday, September 7 at 4:00 p.m. ET.
Links to the live webcast and archived replay of the event will be available on ADP’s website at investors.adp.com.
About ADP (Nasdaq: ADP)
Designing better ways to work through cutting-edge products, premium services and exceptional experiences that enable people to reach their full potential. HR, Talent, Time Management, Benefits and Payroll. Informed by data and designed for people. Learn more at ADP.com.
Agreements Reached for China and U.S. Farmers, Innovators, Manufacturers and Workers
U.S. Secretary of Commerce Penny Pritzker and U.S. Trade Representative Michael Froman today hosted a Chinese delegation led by Vice Premier Wang Yang for the 25th session of the U.S.-China Joint Commission on Commerce and Trade (JCCT), which took place in Chicago. At the conclusion of the discussions, the United States announced key outcomes in the areas of agricultural market access, intellectual property rights protection, innovation policies, and competition law enforcement.
Today’s negotiations followed a full day of events designed to facilitate private sector engagement with officials from the U.S. and China in a reinvigorated JCCT. Yesterday’s program included a roundtable discussion on bilateral investment hosted by the U.S. Chamber of Commerce and the Paulson Institute; a luncheon to celebrate the Gateway Cities partnership hosted by World Business Chicago; a cooperative travel and tourism program hosted by the U.S. Travel Association; and a discussion on developing a shared vision of economic leadership hosted by The Chicago Council on Global Affairs.
U.S. Secretary of Agriculture Tom Vilsack and U.S. Ambassador to China Max Baucus also participated in this year’s JCCT.
“The JCCT is the time and place for the U.S. and China to address issues of mutual concern so we can get more business done between our two countries,” said U.S. Secretary of Commerce Penny Pritzker. “While we enjoy a robust trade relationship with China – our exports were $161 billion in 2013 – there is more we can do to facilitate greater cooperation between our governments and our private sectors. This year we sought to ‘reimagine’ the JCCT to engage businesses from both countries in a dialogue about how to strengthen the trade and investment relationship between the world’s two largest economies, and we made significant progress.”
“This year’s JCCT produced concrete results. We achieved progress on tough issues that American exporters face in our largest export market outside North America,” said U.S. Trade Representative Michael Froman. “The benefits will be felt around the country, in our agricultural heartland, in high-tech from medicines to semiconductors, in the creative industries, and in many other sectors that support good-paying jobs across our economy.”
“The vice ministerial-level Strategic Agricultural Innovation Dialogue that we agreed to will begin early next year with multiple Chinese ministries,” said Secretary Vilsack. “These discussions will showcase U.S. innovation and create new economic opportunities in a wide range of agricultural industries, while addressing food security, climate change and environmental protection.”
The JCCT holds high-level plenary meetings on an annual basis to review progress made by 16 working groups that meet throughout the year to focus on a wide variety of trade and investment issues. These working groups address topics such as intellectual property rights, agriculture, pharmaceuticals and medical devices, information technology, tourism, commercial law, environment and statistics.
Established in 1983, the JCCT is the primary forum for addressing bilateral trade and investment issues and promoting commercial opportunities between the United States and China. The 2013 JCCT meeting was held in Beijing.
Overview of JCCT Discussions
Through sustained engagement over the course of this past year, the United States and China have reached agreement in several areas of key importance to U.S. farmers, innovators, manufacturers and workers, including in the following areas:
Agriculture market access: China has made commitments that should promote significant increases in U.S. exports of soybeans, corn and dairy products to China. Specifically, China announced that it would approve the importation of new biotechnology varieties of U.S. soybeans and corn – current annual U.S. exports of soybeans and corn to China total $14 billion and $3.5 billion, respectively – and also that it would pursue a regular dialogue with the United States focused on the benefits of the increased use of innovative technologies in agriculture, for both the United States and China. China also agreed to strong IP protections for products that use trademarks or common names like “parmesan” or “feta” cheese, which in recent years have begun to demonstrate a potential for rapid export growth vis-à-vis China.
IPR protection: China’s IPR-related commitments cover a range of needed improvements, which should benefit U.S. businesses in a wide variety of industries that rely on the ability to protect their trade secrets, as well as U.S. holders of patents, trademarks and copyrights. For example, in the area of trade secrets, building on prior bilateral commitments made by China, the United States has gained China’s agreement to take specific additional steps to protect companies’ trade secrets and to work on a new trade secrets law to further enhance their protections. The United States also has secured China’s agreement to, among other things, bring new focus to the two countries’ work together to determine how best to foster a better environment for facilitating increased sales of legitimate intellectual property-intensive goods and services in China.
Innovation policies: The United States continued to pursue changes to Chinese policies and practices that have pressured foreign companies to transfer valuable intellectual property rights to enterprises in China. For example, China committed to ensure that they treat foreign IP rights the same as domestic IP rights. China also has agreed to streamline China’s regulatory processes and cut red tape for imports of new, innovative pharmaceuticals and medical devices, which should lead to increases in U.S. exports and U.S. jobs in these two important sectors.
Indeed, according to industry data, the U.S. pharmaceuticals industry directly employs more than 810,000 workers and supports a total of 3.4 million jobs in the United States, while annual exports of U.S. pharmaceutical products to China have exceeded $1.2 billion. The U.S. medical device industry, meanwhile, includes over 7,000 companies, most with less than 100 employees, supports 1.9 million U.S. jobs overall, and was responsible for $2.7 billion in exports to China in 2013.
Competition policy enforcement: The United States was able to address a significant concern for many foreign companies, which have expressed serious concern about insufficient predictability, fairness and transparency in the investigative processes of China’s Anti-Monopoly Law enforcement. The Chinese side agreed that, under normal circumstances, a foreign company in an Anti-Monopoly Law investigation would be permitted to have counsel present and to consult with them during proceedings. China also made several additional commitments, including to treat domestic and foreign companies equally and to provide increased transparency for investigated companies.
The United States and China also held a strategic economic discussion of excess capacity – from steel to solar panels, its causes and costs, and strategies for dealing with it.
Alibaba Entrepreneurs Fund/HSBC JUMPSTARTER 2022 Global Pitch Competition Launches
HONG KONG, Oct. 11, 2021 — Alibaba Hong Kong Entrepreneurs Fund (“AEF”) today announced that HSBC will be the title sponsor of the startup event JUMPSTARTER, which will be named Alibaba Entrepreneurs Fund/HSBC JUMPSTARTER 2022 Global Pitch Competition (“JUMPSTARTER 2022”). AEF and HSBC will be working closely together to promote the event to startups worldwide, and encourage interaction and experience sharing among entrepreneurs.
JUMPSTARTER 2022 is now open for applications until November 28, 2021. The top 100 entrants will be selected by the judging panel and enter the pitching phase in December. The top 10 will participate in the finals early next year, competing for a total of up to USD4 million investment* and other various awards. Hong Kong Cyberport Management Company Limited (“Cyberport”) and Hong Kong Science and Technology Parks Corporation (“HKSTP”), co-organizers of the event, will take part in a joint investment to provide further support to fuel the growth of startups.
The top 10 finalists of JUMPSTARTER 2022 will have the opportunities to participate in exchange programs and/or market research activities managed by AEF in Hong Kong and other cities in the Greater Bay Area (“GBA”). In addition, JUMPSTARTER 2022 will arrange industry experts to share their experience, helping startups to understand more about the market environment in the GBA and expand their business network, so as to identify opportunities for future growth.
Meanwhile, the top 100 of JUMPSTARTER 2022 will take part in the Alibaba Netpreneur Training Program. The quota is increased from the top 20 last year to the top 100 this year, as a way to provide network and resource support, apart from capital, for the startups.
Cindy Chow, Executive Director of Alibaba Hong Kong Entrepreneurs Fund, said, “Since onset of the pandemic, like other startups, Alibaba Hong Kong Entrepreneurs Fund has never slowed down its pace and continued to respond to market change in a swift and active manner. Noticing the rapid development of the startup ecosystem and market, JUMPSTARTER 2022 caters to the current trend and focuses on five sectors including Fintech, Deep Tech, Healthcare, Art Tech and Sustainability. It hopes to act as a bridge to connect the startups, facilitating them to learn more about the latest trends in the market. AEF believes that JUMPSTARTER 2022 can encourage and support the startups to further develop, injecting new impetus into Hong Kong and other cities in the GBA.”
Christina Ong, Head of Business Banking, Commercial Banking, Hong Kong, HSBC, said: “HSBC is committed to supporting start-ups and small businesses across all sectors along their growth journey. As an up-and-coming economic powerhouse, the Greater Bay Area offers the combined strengths of an international capital market for fundraising, research capabilities, manufacturing facilities and an enormous consumer market for start-ups to grow and thrive. JUMPSTARTER 2022 offers an excellent platform for entrepreneurial talents to capture the ample market opportunities in this vibrant city cluster, and unleash their potential over time.”
Peter Yan, Chief Executive Officer, Cyberport, said: “Complementing the National 14th Five-Year Plan, Hong Kong is deepening and expanding its connection with the GBA to allow more room to develop technology and innovation. As the digital technology flagship of Hong Kong, Cyberport has been actively supporting startups to expand their business and tap into the GBA. We encourage more startups to seize the opportunity and compete for the support offered by JUMPSTARTER 2022. With an increasing number of startup projects supported by capital from Mainland China and successful landings in the GBA, we believe we can achieve greater synergy to facilitate the development of the GBA as an international technology and innovation hub.”
Albert Wong, Chief Executive Officer, HKSTP, said: “HKSTP has always been dedicated to building a vibrant and competitive I&T ecosystem in Hong Kong and GBA by helping startups scale and access a host of resources including industry expertise, partner and investor networks, and R&D support. We are delighted to continue our partnership with Alibaba Hong Kong Entrepreneurs Fund to support promising startups and inspire more young talent to begin their entrepreneurial journey through JUMPSTARTER 2022. Together, we will capture new opportunities emerging from GBA to accelerate the development of I&T for a brighter future.”
JUMPSTARTER 2022 is open to startups that have been operating for less than five years and plan to expand into Hong Kong or other cities in the GBA (see below appendix for more requirements).
Another highlight this year is the four online sharing sessions in early November that will target startups from cities in Mainland China, Guangdong-Hong Kong-Macao Greater Bay Area and Southeast Asia. Successful startups and experts from a variety of industries will be invited to share their experiences during their entrepreneurial period, such as how to solve problems, the reasons for choosing Hong Kong or other cities in the GBA to develop business, analyze the business environment in the region, and the development opportunities of multiple emerging industries.
“Developments in the GBA offer unlimited opportunities, the economic scale is comparable to that of metropolitan areas such as New York, San Francisco and Tokyo, bringing huge development potential for startups. We have noticed the rising demand from startups to explore business and financing opportunities in the GBA. With the help of our partners, we hope to deliver more abundant online and offline resources and sharing activities, which support them to further explore the business environment for startups in these cities. Looking forward, AEF will continue to focus on achieving goals for participants, and encourage more institutions with the same vision to join us in nurturing startups,” Chow added.
Since its establishment, Alibaba Hong Kong Entrepreneurs Fund has invested approximately USD80 million into 55 startups^, attracting co-investment funding of about USD2 billion to support these startups. Its investment portfolio covers a wide range of areas, including green technology, educational technology, fintech, medical and healthcare, logistics and e-commerce.
JUMPSTARTER 2022 is now open for application. Interested parties can visit www.jumpstarter.hk/tc for more information.
* Compliance with the criteria for and completion of due diligence and other steps is required.
^ Including HKAI Lab and the investment by AEF Greater Bay Area Fund.
Appendix – JUMPSTARTER application requirement and timeline
Application requirement
If your startup fulfils the following criteria at the time of your application, you are eligible to apply:
In operation for fewer than five years
Raised less than USD20 million in funding
Startup funding is between the Seed and Series C stages
Possess a ground-breaking and innovative product or service
Desire to make Hong Kong and/or the GBA as part of your future plans
JUMPSTARTER 2021 Global Pitch Competition Time Table
Item
Date
Global callout
Mid-Sept 2021 – 28 Nov
Announcement of Top 100 and semi pitch
Dec 2021
Announcement of Top 10
Jan, 2022
Grand Finale
Mar, 2022
About Alibaba Hong Kong Entrepreneurs Fund
Alibaba Hong Kong Entrepreneurs Fund (“AEF”) is a not-for-profit initiative launched by Alibaba Group in 2015. To vitalize the development of innovation and technology, AEF’s mission is to help Hong Kong entrepreneurs and young people realize their dreams and visions for a Hong Kong that is vibrant and engaged regionally and globally. As part of its investment program, AEF provides Hong Kong-based entrepreneurs with investment capital and strategic guidance to help them grow their businesses and penetrate the mainland Chinese and global markets, by utilizing Alibaba’s Ecosystem. For more information, please visit the website: http://ent-fund.org
About JUMPSTARTER
JUMPSTARTER is a not-for-profit initiative created by Alibaba Hong Kong Entrepreneurs Fund that provides a platform for all entrepreneurs and young people to jump start their dreams in Hong Kong. It is a first-of-its-kind startup event focused exclusively on showcasing quality startups and providing high-impact networking opportunities. Its goal is to build, empower and boost Hong Kong’s startup ecosystem and entrepreneurship by bringing entrepreneurs, corporations, investors and the public together, helping to transform Hong Kong into a leading hub for global innovation and technology. For more information, please visit the website: https://www.jumpstarter.hk/
SOURCE Alibaba Hong Kong Entrepreneurs Fund
CONTACT: Eva Lee, Alibaba Group, Tel: +852 5237 8897, E-mail: eva.lee@alibaba-inc.com; Gigi Lai, Alibaba Group, Tel: +852 6840 2142, E-mail: wb-gigi.lai@alibaba-inc.com
Related Links
http://ent-fund.org
Amazon Payments Launches Global Partner Program
SEATTLE– Amazon (NASDAQ: AMZN) today announced the launch of the Amazon Payments Partner Program, a new global program designed to help ecommerce platform providers and developers extend the trust and familiarity of Amazon Payments to their merchant customers. The Amazon Payments Partner Program offers unique tools and services to help Partners grow their merchant business by offering easy integration with Amazon Payments.
The Amazon Payments Partner Program includes solution pre-integration and best practices to help ensure that merchants receive the most effective solutions. Merchants will be eligible to receive exclusive benefits and services from the program such as knowledge-sharing and white glove integration services. The program is free to participate in and available by invitation in the United States, Germany, United Kingdom and Japan.
“The Amazon Payments Partner Program provides Partners with the tools and resources needed to extend the trust and convenience of the Amazon experience to their merchant customers,” said Patrick Gauthier, vice president, Amazon Payments. “We are working together across geographies and industries to help merchants grow and create experiences that delight customers throughout the shopping journey.”
The Amazon Payments Partner Program includes Premier Partner, Certified Partner, and Certified Developer levels, with distinct certified categories for ecommerce platform providers and developers. As members of the Amazon Payments Partner Program, Partners are eligible to receive account management, planning support, technical resources and training, Partner directory listing, Partner designation with exclusive logos, and certain Partners may also be eligible for co-marketing activities.
“The convenience and trust that Amazon Payments provides customers already attracts lots of our merchants. We are honored to participate in the Amazon Payments Partner Program,” said Yuko Hoshino, President of Future Shop Co., Ltd. “Together, we will support the growth of our merchant business and contribute to the revitalization of the ecommerce industry in Japan by combining the capabilities of FutureShop2 with the convenience of Amazon Payments.”
“Amazon Payments extends the trusted and familiar experience of Amazon to our merchants across Europe and the United States,” said Corinne Lejbowicz, CEO PrestaShop SA. “We’re excited to be a Premier Partner in Amazon Payments Partner Program as we provide our users with the tools and resources necessary to grow their business.”
“Our merchants want to offer their customers a payment solution that is trusted, easy and familiar,” said Brennan Loh, Director of Business Development at Shopify. “We’re excited to be a Premier Partner in the Amazon Payments Partner Program, enabling our merchants to offer Pay with Amazon.”
To learn more about Amazon Payments Partner Program, visit: https://payments.amazon.com/merchant/global-partner-program.
About Amazon
Amazon.com opened on the World Wide Web in July 1995. The company is guided by four principles: customer obsession rather than competitor focus, passion for invention, commitment to operational excellence, and long-term thinking. Customer reviews, 1-Click shopping, personalized recommendations, Prime, Fulfillment by Amazon, AWS, Kindle Direct Publishing, Kindle, Fire tablets, Fire TV, Amazon Echo, and Alexa are some of the products and services pioneered by Amazon. For more information, visit www.amazon.com/about.
Amazon PPC Ads Advertising Business Agency, Clear Ads, Discusses Advertising Opportunities on Twitch
LONDON, May 26, 2021 — Recognized as the UK’s leading Amazon PPC ads advertising business agency, Clear Ads recently discussed the importance for businesses and online retailers to embrace new advertising strategies to overcome the ever-growing competition faced in today’s online marketplace. Clear Ads is recommending Twitch as a valuable tool in conjunction with Amazon DSP when exploring advertising opportunities to expand audience reach.
Learn more about Amazon ads at https://www.clearads.co.uk/.
Twitch is an American video live streaming service that focuses on video game live streaming, including broadcasts of e-sports competitions as well as music broadcasts, creative content, and more recently, “in real life” streams. It is operated by Twitch Interactive, a subsidiary of Amazon.com, Inc.
Amazon itself has been expanding its advertising means, venturing into the world of video and streaming ads for some time now. Recently, however, Amazon has extended its programmatic capabilities to include the live streaming channel Twitch. “While Twitch has previously managed its own independent advertising channel, parts of it are now being absorbed into the Amazon Demand Side Platform (DSP), sharing some functionality between the two and giving today’s advertisers more opportunities to utilize the best of both platforms to really engage with new audiences,” explains Clear Ads’ CEO George Meressa.
Meressa points to the business-focused site Quartz, which states, “Twitch, the Amazon-owned platform that live-broadcasts gamers playing video games, is the undisputed champion of its arena. It hosts 91% of all video game streaming, dwarfing competitors from YouTube and Facebook. In less than a decade, Twitch has become one of the most popular platforms on the internet, serving more than 2 million viewers at any given time of any given day.”
The most appealing factor to incorporating Twitch in an advertising scheme is the access Twitch provides to historically elusive and hard to reach audiences. Twitch is dominated by gaming demographics. “This younger demographic has long proven to be challenging for advertisers to engage with, with research from the IAB Tech Lab noting that men aged between 18-34 are statistically most likely to use ad blockers. This has made it very difficult for advertisers to get their ads in front of this particular demographic, resulting in a huge untouched pool,” Meressa says.
Amazon announced the following changes as a result of combining Amazon DSP and Twitch into an advertising powerhouse
Advertisers that purchase ads programmatically through the Amazon DSP will be able to show content through the Twitch video and digital display, increasing the number of channels Amazon advertisers can push their content across.
The integrated Twitch Audiences feature – a powerful audience builder utilized by existing Twitch advertisers – is now accessible to advertisers using the Amazon DSP. This allows Amazon advertisers to target audiences more closely using Twitch user behavior.
Advertisers already pushing campaigns through Twitch now have access to Amazon’s unrivaled first-party user data, including browsing, purchasing, searching, and viewing behaviors.
The move to online has been a gradual process over the last few years, but there is no denying that the COVID-19 pandemic has made it necessary to speed up the process. Not only have lockdowns required businesses and retailers to significantly alter how they operate, but the increase in people needing to stay home has resulted in a drastic increase in the amount of online content being absorbed daily. Amazon’s step to sharing functionality between Twitch and Amazon DSP offers a unique edge to advertising not seen on other platforms — the merger of hard-to-reach audiences with an immense customer data bank.
For additional information about the advantages of working with the Amazon advertising agency, Clear Ads, please visit the official company website.
Contact Name : George Meressa
Contact Phone: +442037474686
Contact Email: info@clearads.co.uk
About Clear Ads
Clear Ads is a paid advertising agency focusing on Amazon and Google for small and medium-sized enterprises around the world.
SOURCE Clear Ads
Amazon Rolls Out the Red Carpet for Startups with Amazon Launchpad
SEATTLE — (NASDAQ: AMZN) – Amazon today announced Amazon Launchpad, a new program that makes it easy for startups to launch, market, and distribute their products to hundreds of millions of Amazon customers across the globe. The program offers a streamlined onboarding experience, custom product pages, a comprehensive marketing package, and access to Amazon’s global fulfillment network, all geared toward helping startups successfully launch their innovations and share their stories. With Amazon Launchpad, startups can overcome many of the challenges associated with launching new products by using Amazon’s retail expertise and infrastructure to create awareness and drive sales.
“As the pace of innovation continues to increase within the startup community, we want to help customers discover these unique products and learn the inspiration behind them. We also know from talking to startups that bringing a new product to market successfully can be just as challenging as building it,” said Jim Adkins, Vice President, Amazon. “Amazon Launchpad gives customers access to a dedicated storefront featuring a variety of innovative new products from emerging brands. For startups, we handle inventory management, order fulfillment, customer service, and more, allowing them to focus their efforts on the innovation that results in more cool products.”
Amazon Launchpad offers participating startups:
Brand Development: Custom product pages help bring products to life through visually-compelling imagery and videos. Founders can tell their story and connect with customers in a personal way with Q&A about the startup. Products from these emerging brands are featured in the new Amazon Launchpad store, which is dedicated to showcasing startups and their innovations.
Customer Reach: Amazon’s most powerful marketing tools – including merchandised placements, personalized recommendations, and participation in the Amazon Vine customer reviews program – give products from startups added visibility. Startups also enjoy access to Amazon’s global fulfillment network, fast and free shipping with Amazon Prime, and customer service.
Global Expansion: When startups are ready to reach customers outside the U.S., Amazon Launchpad can help them expand globally with cost-effective supply chain solutions and marketing programs in more than 10 Amazon marketplaces around the world.
Amazon is working with more than 25 venture capital firms, startup accelerators, and crowd-funding platforms to bring startups into the Amazon Launchpad program. Andreessen Horowitz, Y Combinator, and Indiegogo are a few of the companies that have funded the more than 200 products currently available in the Amazon Launchpad store – which features everything from Electronics to Kitchen to Beauty items. Products from startups in the program include the Bluesmart Smart Carry-On Luggage, eero Home Wi-Fi System, Cuff DVB Smart Sport Band, Fenugreen FreshPaper Produce Saver Sheets, Electric Objects EO1 Digital Art Panel, Soma Sustainable Pitcher & Plant-Based Water Filter, Thync Mood-Changing Wearable System, and Casper Mattress, among others.
Initial feedback from some of the companies in the Amazon Launchpad program includes:
“Launchpad makes Amazon an ideal partner for the most innovative young tech companies,” said Marc Andreessen, Co-Founder and General Partner, Andreessen Horowitz. “It’s yet another way Amazon fosters a real ecosystem of invention and creativity.”
“At Y Combinator, our support doesn’t end on Demo Day. With Amazon Launchpad, we are reinforcing our commitment to help bring physical products to a wide audience,” said Luke Iseman, Partner, Y Combinator. “This program will help our hardware startups get in front of more users than ever before.”
“Indiegogo empowers campaigners to turn ideas into reality through customer engagement and funding mechanisms. By partnering with Amazon Launchpad, Indiegogo entrepreneurs gain instant access to Amazon’s powerful distribution capabilities and massive audience,” said Slava Rubin, Co-Founder and CEO, Indiegogo. “I’m excited to see how this unique partnership enables startups to accelerate their growth and share their innovative products with the world.”
“Amazon recognizes the increasing importance of fast and reliable home Wi-Fi as consumers stream more video and music than ever before and connected devices go mainstream,” said Nick Weaver, Co-Founder and CEO, eero. “We couldn’t ask for a better partner and are honored to be one of the emerging companies in the Amazon Launchpad program. We’re excited to showcase our product on the world’s largest discovery platform.”
“Amazon Launchpad is the perfect home for our smart jewelry. This innovative way to shop lets us tell consumers the story and philosophy behind Cuff, and hopefully makes them fall in love with our product,” said Deepa Sood, Founder and CEO, Cuff. “We couldn’t be more thrilled to be a part of this initiative.”
“I am an accidental entrepreneur – I never dreamed that FreshPaper, which started as my middle school science project, would one day be in the hands of farmers and families across the globe. But my unlikely story is only possible because of visionary partners like Amazon who believe in our product’s potential to change the way the world eats,” said Kavita Shukla, Inventor and Founder, Fenugreen FreshPaper. “By throwing their considerable weight behind ideas like FreshPaper, Amazon is using its technology and reach to make innovation accessible to all.”
“The sheer scale that Amazon Launchpad offers a startup like Electric Objects is unparalleled,” said Jake Levine, Founder and CEO, Electric Objects. “Working closely with their team these last few months, I’ve been consistently impressed with the level of service and access that this program makes available. This partnership could be game-changing for our company, and we’re thrilled to have the opportunity to participate.”
To learn more about the Amazon Launchpad program, visit www.amazon.com/launchpad/signup. To shop the Amazon Launchpad store, visit www.amazon.com/launchpad.
About Amazon
Amazon.com opened on the World Wide Web in July 1995. The company is guided by four principles: customer obsession rather than competitor focus, passion for invention, commitment to operational excellence, and long-term thinking. Customer reviews, 1-Click shopping, personalized recommendations, Prime, Fulfillment by Amazon, AWS, Kindle Direct Publishing, Kindle, Fire phone, Fire tablets, Fire TV, and Amazon Echo are some of the products and services pioneered by Amazon.
Analysis: Goldman Sachs And Subtle Headwinds…
This report focuses on the equity investments and advisory services of Goldman Sachs in medium and large-scale enterprises. While the firm has a record of outstanding performance in its business overall; from the vantage points of global trends to the variables of potential disruptions, this report evaluates how the firm may already be facing light headwinds that will tend to increase significantly in the long-term.
Global challenges that are just brewing up include cybersecurity and artificial intelligence while localized issues range from mission dynamics, human and corporate resource, productivity, market and finance disruptions. As artificial intelligence technology matures, we are headed to the point where everyone has similarly equal access to information and methodologies that were previously confidential. How do we compete if we are all privy to the same strategies? With artificial intelligence increasing the capacity of computing prowess significantly, what will be the exponential degree of cybercrime escalation? As many professionals become redundant what could be the potential and consequences for mass human dissension.
While it is not yet clear how such global challenges may impact the economics of tomorrow, more than is rational has already been invested in anticipation of high dividends. With such magnitude of underlining unknowns, the current methodologies for risk assessment and mitigation will certainly be inefficient hence the essence of new calculus for computing the path through these emerging realities.
Goldman Sachs furnishes investments through the prudent processes of the Investment Committee for Investments, Criteria, Structure and Allocation of Opportunities and while the firm has incorporated awareness of the recent pandemic related work-from-home challenges, cybersecurity threats and extreme weather to factor in their corporate diligence, it would soon be apparent and catch many by surprise that the overall dynamics of enterprise success is forever changed…
Full report by Kenneth Walley is available only to Goldman Sachs and may be requested by email to kwalley@cibunet.com
ANNpower Launches Annual Search For Next Generation of Female Leaders
NEW YORK, – The ANNpower Vital Voices Initiative announced today that it is launching a search in the United States, Puerto Rico, and Canada to identify the next generation of female leaders. Now through March 1, 2014, high school sophomores and juniors can apply at ANNpower.org for the opportunity to become an ANNpower Fellow and receive leadership training and mentorship by global women leaders. ANNpower is a partnership between ANN INC. (NYSE: ANN), the parent Company of Ann Taylor and LOFT, and Vital Voices Global Partnership.
50 young women will be selected and invited to the ANNpower Vital Voices Leadership Forum in Washington, D.C., June 16 – 19, 2014, where they will receive leadership training from influential women leaders who are part of the Vital Voices Global Leadership Network, as well as executives from ANN INC., including the Company’s President and CEO, Kay Krill. The Forum’s curriculum equips these aspiring young leaders with the training and mentorship they need to realize their full potential as future leaders. Armed with these new skills, the Fellows will then return to their communities to create projects to affect change and apply for project grants to put their ideas into action. ANNpower Grants will be awarded in the Fall of 2014, and winning Fellows will spend the school year implementing their projects and receiving mentoring from ANN INC. associates.
“We look forward to welcoming our next class of ANNpower Fellows,” said Kay Krill, President and CEO, ANN INC. “These girls are so committed to making a difference in their communities and the world. I have so much confidence in the Fellows we have seen come through the program and cannot wait to be further inspired by this next group of young women.”
“ANNpower Fellows are passionate and innovative trailblazers implementing truly effective and sustainable programs in their communities,” said Alyse Nelson, President and CEO of Vital Voices Global Partnership. “We are proud to partner with ANN INC., together providing unique and life-changing opportunities for these young women leaders.”
Selected Fellows will also have the opportunity to participate in high profile global leadership events throughout the year. This past year, six ANNpower Fellows were given the once-in-a-lifetime opportunity to witness history in the making and travel to Burma to attend the Women’s Forum Myanmar, the first of its kind in the country. During the nine-day trip, the Fellows engaged with global women leaders while immersing themselves in the Burmese culture, a country which is undergoing rapid transformation as it opens up to dialogue and exchange both domestically and regionally.
“Being an ANNpower Fellow has been an amazing opportunity that has shaped who I am today. I learned so much by participating in this historic event, hearing stories from influential world leaders like Aung San Suu Kyi and Melanne Verveer. The experience was extremely powerful and I left inspired to do more with the project I’m implementing in my community.” – Emily Kosse, 2012 ANNpower Fellow and Grantee.
During the months of January and February, Ann Taylor, Ann Taylor Factory, LOFT and LOFT Outlet stores across the U.S., Puerto Rico, and Canada will support the search for the next generation of leaders in store with the ANNpower call-to-action: “Know a girl who wants to change the world?” Additionally, the 50 young women selected will received a special discount card redeemable for two years at Ann Taylor and LOFT.
For more information about the ANNpower Vital Voices Initiative or to apply to become an ANNpower Fellow, please visit ANNpower.org.
This Press Release is courtesy of www.anninc.com
Another Hiring Wave with 559,0000 Jobs Added in May; U.S. Poised for Labor Shortage
DALLAS, June 4, 2021 — After a disappointing April jobs report, hiring is on the rise again, with 559,000 jobs added in May. While a move in the right direction, talent acquisition professionals and hiring managers still struggle to find and attract talent. As consumer demand continues to increase, specific industries are dealing with acute hiring challenges.
ThinkWhy, a labor market data and analytics firm, released its National Jobs and Industry Performance Outlook following an announcement from the Bureau of Labor Statistics that the economy added 559,000 jobs in May, with the unemployment rate at 5.8 percent.
Of the 7.6 million jobs that remain lost from the pandemic, close to 2.5 million are in the Leisure and Hospitality industry, which includes restaurants, hotels, and entertainment venues. The biggest challenge persists in people’s willingness to return to work, as they receive equivalent to the industry’s average wage, depending on the state, in unemployment benefits and the additional $300 federal stimulus.
“The challenge to find skilled and service workers remains a real threat to company growth and productivity. The difficulty of filling both white- and blue-collar roles creates hardships to keep up with demand across industries – inevitably impacting a full economic recovery in those sectors and the local areas in which they operate,” says Jay Denton, chief analyst for ThinkWhy.
“While some policy issues focus on blue-collar jobs, the labor market is already incredibly tight for many occupations. As of May, jobs in management, technology, legal, architecture, and healthcare practitioners already had unemployment rates of 2.9% or less,” Denton explains.
Recruiting and hiring will require the right tools to source and win candidates. Most important will be refining compensation plans based on today’s competitive job market and shifts in talent availability.
Local Markets Adding the Most Jobs
While the U.S. employment recovery is widespread, the pace varies across the nation. The following labor markets recovered the total jobs year to date, through April 2021:
New York-Newark-Jersey City, NY-NJ-PA (111,200)
Los Angeles-Long Beach-Anaheim, CA (103,000)
Chicago-Naperville-Elgin, IL-IN-WI (63,200)
Minneapolis-St. Paul-Bloomington, MN-WI (55,100)
Boston-Cambridge-Nashua, MA-NH NECTA (54,500)
Houston-The Woodlands-Sugar Land, TX (44,900)
Detroit-Warren-Dearborn, MI (42,600)
San Francisco-Oakland-Hayward, CA (41,600)
Denver-Aurora-Lakewood, CO (40,700)
Seattle-Tacoma-Bellevue, WA (40,000)
“Economic demand will not be the challenge for sustaining robust hiring levels. Impacts from labor shortages, rising wages and limitations to how quickly goods can be produced will slow down the process of hiring talent, and make keeping them even more important,” continues Denton.
Many of these cities were among the hardest hit at the onset of the pandemic-induced economic fallout. Further, industry recovery will be based on varying economic influences. As a result, each city will be impacted differently.
Industry Performance & Recovery
May’s jobs report indicates the most job gain was in Leisure and Hospitality, and Education and Health Services sectors.
The pace of recovery will vary across cities, dependent upon their respective talent supply and industry growth. Here is a look at LaborIQ’s recovery timeline across the major sectors.
The Outlook
The outlook for the second half of the year remains strong, and it is still expected that the U.S. will add a significant number of jobs back to the economy. ThinkWhy’s talent intelligence software LaborIQ® estimates 5.4 million jobs will be added back to the economy in 2021.
The domino effect of people moving from one job to another is predicted to result in more than 73 million hires for the year, which will require a significant effort from talent acquisition professionals. The wave of hiring is just getting started.
To read the full National Jobs and Industry Recovery Outlook for May, click here.
About LaborIQ by ThinkWhy
LaborIQ is a SaaS solution providing HR and talent acquisition professionals with talent and labor market intelligence. LaborIQ by ThinkWhy reports, forecasts, and advises on employment conditions and the impact to jobs, industries, and businesses across all U.S. cities. Our machine learning and advanced data science deliver precise compensation, talent supply forecasts, retention tools and job market answers for more than 20,000 occupations.
Visit www.ThinkWhy.com to learn more or request a demo. Follow us on LinkedIn, Twitter, Instagram, or Facebook.
SOURCE ThinkWhy
CONTACT: Paige Dawson, paige@mpdventures.com | 214-808-7341
Related Links
https://www.thinkwhy.com/
APEC Leaders Agree on Actions to Promote Regional Economic Integration and Trade
Strengthening regional economic integration (REI) in the Asia-Pacific region by removing barriers to trade and investment remains the core mission of APEC and was one of the main themes for work in APEC in 2014. This year, APEC Leaders agreed on a series of outcomes that will help advance U.S. trade and investment interests, and build on APEC’s successes in this area over the past several years. Most notable among these are the establishment of an APEC fund dedicated to helping economies overcome specific obstacles to implementation of APEC and WTO commitments on supply chain and trade facilitation and the groundbreaking APEC commitment to reduce tariffs on a list of environmental goods to 5 percent or less by the end of 2015.
Environmental Goods- To ensure the full implementation of APEC’s ground-breaking 2011 commitment to reduce applied tariffs on the 54 products in the APEC List of Environmental Goods to five percent or less by the end of 2015, economies agreed to submit implementation plans by the time of the Ministers Responsible for Trade Meeting in spring of next year. APEC is also undertaking technical assistance that will help economies fully implement their commitments.
Good Regulatory Practices- APEC economies continue to strengthen the implementation of good regulatory practices. This year Leaders agreed to take steps to improve the conduct of public consultations through using information technology and the Internet. This new approach presents enormous opportunities for regulators in the region to consult more effectively with stakeholders, both foreign and domestic, and gain the best possible understanding of the possible economic impact of regulations. APEC Ministers encouraged economies to provide innovative capacity building approaches to the implementation of good regulatory practices and the use of regulatory tools.
Electric Vehicles- To promote the widespread use of environmentally friendly, technologically-advanced electric vehicles, APEC economies agreed to several steps, including using international standards as the basis for regulations on electric vehicles; creating a priority list of international standards important for electric vehicles; working towards aligning regulations and avoiding regulatory divergences, particularly regarding electric vehicle charging; and establishing and APEC Electric Vehicles Interoperability and Research Center to help economies meet their regulatory alignment objectives. Through these steps, APEC will encourage greater electric vehicle production and use – and greater trade and investment opportunities – while advancing APEC’s green growth, connectivity, regulatory coherence, and regional economic integration objectives.
Supply Chain Performance- APEC Leaders agreed to accelerate technical assistance and capacity building to help economies improve supply chain performance, in support of the APEC-wide goal of a ten percent improvement in supply chain performance by the end of 2015. With a dedicated fund already in place, economies this year agreed to create a comprehensive capacity building plan for using the resources in this fund, and established a new body of public and private supply chain experts to advise the technical assistance and capacity building projects under the plan.
Applications open for the EY Entrepreneurs Access Network, a business accelerator program for Black and Latino entrepreneurs
NEW YORK, June 15, 2022 – Today, Ernst & Young LLP (EY US) announces that applications are open for the 2023 class of the EY Entrepreneurs Access Network (EAN), and qualified Black and Latino CEOs and founders nationwide are encouraged to apply.
Entrepreneurs from historically underrepresented communities lead or own 18% of all businesses nationwide and by one estimate, generate $396b in economic activity. But despite this far-reaching economic impact, systemic discrimination still prohibits some Black and Latino entrepreneurs from reaching their full potential.
In response, the EAN was created to support Black- and Latino-owned companies by helping close disparity gaps in accessing capital, connections and resources.
More details are available below and also at ey.com/ean.
What: The EY Entrepreneurs Access Network (EAN) is a business accelerator for high-growth Black and Latino entrepreneurs. EAN participants receive yearlong access to mentors, an executive curriculum, growth resources and capital connections.
Why: In 2019, EY leadership observed a lack of access to connections and funding that hinders many Black- and Latino-owned businesses from scaling, and the pandemic further amplified these barriers. As an expansion of our current entrepreneurial ecosystem (35 years Entrepreneur Of The Year®; 15 years Entrepreneurial Winning Women™), EY US developed the EAN to help bridge the gaps for these companies to thrive.
When: Applications are being accepted now through September 15, 2022. The EAN will notify companies of their acceptance on a rolling basis, beginning early December 2022.
Who: Black and Latino business owners who meet the criteria may apply online at ey.com/ean. Applicants must be Black or Latino business owners who are founding CEOs and majority owners of any privately held, for-profit company based in the US. The company must be more than two years old and 51% minority (Black/Latino) owned.
How: The EAN is designed to be a manageable 12-month program for busy executives. The platform includes assessments, one-on-one coaching, a curriculum customized based on needs, access to online tools and networking events, and promotional exposure. There is no cost to participate.
Quotes:
From EY US: “Black and Latino businesses are often underestimated and under supported. Although they contribute billions to our economy in revenue and jobs, they still experience systemic barriers. The EY EAN is seeking ambitious leaders who are hungry for professional and company growth and ready to soar to new heights.” – Nit Reeder, EY Americas Markets Communications and Enablement Leader; EY Entrepreneurs Access Network Program Director
From EY Entrepreneurs Access Network participant: “The Entrepreneurs Access Network has been invaluable. My EY mentor facilitated connections with venture capital firms and has even helped me launch a brand-new electric vehicle business. Although I’ve been a CEO for nearly 20 years, this program gave me the opportunity to work on my business, not just in it — with real results.” – Maurice Brewster, Founder & Chief Executive Officer, Mosaic Global Transportation
SOURCE EY
CONTACT: Barbara Dimajo, Ernst & Young LLP, +1 954 865 7549, barbara.dimajo@ey.com
Artivest Raises Series A Funding to Connect Top Alternative Investment Managers with Investor Community Online
NEW YORK- Artivest, a cutting-edge technology platform that connects leading private equity and hedge funds with a wider audience of suitable investors, announced today a $15 million round of funding led by prominent global investment firm KKR, with existing investors RRE Ventures, Peter Thiel, Nyca Partners, Anthemis Group and FinTech Collective participating as well. Artivest will use the funding to accelerate the growth of its technology, infrastructure and sales teams and the execution of its product roadmap.
“Artivest combines leading technology with operational tools for feeder funds that will further open the door for financial advisors and high net worth investors looking to commit capital to a wide variety of top private equity funds. Most private equity firms are very interested in accessing this capital but do not have the technical or operational capability to do so today. We look forward to partnering with Artivest as they expand their business,” said Ed Brandman, KKR’s Chief Information Officer, who will join Artivest’s Board of Directors.
Founded in 2012 and headquartered in New York City, Artivest provides access at lower investment minimums to a select assortment of privately offered alternative investment funds. To date, Artivest has offered premier private equity and venture capital funds and will soon be offering hedge funds.
“The process of investing in private placements—previously inefficient for all involved–has not changed in any meaningful way for decades. A number of trends have come together, including alternative funds’ increasing focus on individual investors and investors’ growing appetite for all types of alternatives. At this crucial moment, we are bringing private investing a much-needed digital upgrade,” said Artivest CEO and Founder, James Waldinger. “It’s a great honor and a meaningful endorsement to be backed by KKR, one of our first partners.”
High net worth investors — a crucial and complicated customer base
Qualified investors, including those served by the rapidly growing independent advisor community, are fueling a new wave of demand for alternative strategies and are, in fact, the fastest growing segment of assets allocated to alternative funds. With equity markets periodically testing new highs and publicly available fixed income investments providing unsatisfactory yields, clients and their advisors are actively seeking alternative solutions for compounding wealth over long time periods. Top private equity and hedge funds, which have historically raised capital exclusively from institutions and those capable of writing institutional-sized checks, are compelled by this investor base but challenged by the implications of sourcing, onboarding and serving a much more fragmented clientele.
Artivest provides a multi-pronged solution to connect these two constituencies at scale. Key Artivest features for qualified investors include more accessible investment minimums, online access to intuitive displays of fund metrics and electronic completion of all legal documentation. Funds utilize Artivest technology to manage investor relations and client operations at scale. Both user types benefit from best-in-class-security and encryption protection.
About Artivest
Artivest offers a digital platform for private investment managers and investors. We connect a wider audience of suitable investors with investment opportunities in top-quality private equity and hedge funds that are typically available only at institutional minimum investment sizes. Our technological, financial, and operational expertise powers a seamless experience for individual investors and a scalable point of access for financial advisors and fund managers. Ultimately, our mission is to bring private investment management into the digital age. Artivest is a FINRA member registered Broker Dealer. For more information, please visit www.Artivest.co. Follow Artivest on Facebook: facebook.com/artivest and Twitter: @artivest
About James Waldinger, Founder and CEO
James drew on his background in investing and online marketing to found Artivest. He identified a compelling opportunity to deliver to a wider audience intuitive access to the best that money managers had to offer, and let the best money managers focus on what they do best. Previously, he served on the investment team at the global macro hedge fund, Clarium Capital Management, where he also ran an emerging markets-focused investment portfolio. He has worked with a variety of internet startups, in investment, advisory and operational roles, including as an analyst on Peter Thiel’s initial investment in Facebook. James earned his BA in History from Yale, and he holds both a JD and MBA from Stanford.
About KKR
KKR is a leading global investment firm that manages investments across multiple asset classes including private equity, energy, infrastructure, real estate, credit and hedge funds. KKR aims to generate attractive investment returns by following a patient and disciplined investment approach, employing world‐class people, and driving growth and value creation at the asset level. KKR invests its own capital alongside its partners’ capital and brings opportunities to others through its capital markets business. References to KKR’s investments may include the activities of its sponsored funds. For additional information about KKR & Co. L.P. (NYSE:KKR), please visit KKR’s website at www.kkr.com and on Twitter @KKR_Co.
Asia Briefing Releases 2021 Country Guide Series for Doing Business – The Series Covers China, Hong Kong, India, Singapore, Vietnam, Russia, Plus a Special Guide on ASEAN
HONG KONG, April 14, 2021 — Following a challenging 2020 – where many international businesses around the world focused on operational continuity, crisis management, and transformation issues at home – 2021 beckons with the promise of some new growth opportunities at home and overseas in Asia.
Asian countries are demonstrating remarkable attractiveness in 2021, stemming from high GDP growth expectations, burgeoning markets, booming technology sectors, and large new shifts in supply chains – resulting in new opportunities for trade, partnerships, and expansions for international investors.
Entering new markets in Asia successfully can be aided by a deeper, practical understanding of the focal country’s business and regulatory environment, expert advisory regarding the changes in Asia, identified areas of risk, incentive and opportunity, as well as the advised steps to prepare for and seize opportunities from entry to profit.
These and several other areas are covered in this guide series.
Designed to introduce the fundamentals of investing in ASEAN, China, Hong Kong, India, Vietnam and Russia, the Introduction to Doing Business guides are compiled by the experts at Dezan Shira & Associates, a specialist of foreign direct investment, providing corporate establishment, business intelligence, business advisory, tax advisory and compliance, accounting, payroll, due diligence and financial review services to multinationals investing in emerging Asia.
Each Introduction to Doing Business 2021 guide is free to download, and discusses:
Establishing and running a business
Tax, audit, and accounting
Human resources and payroll
Within the chapters, a range of different topics that affect doing business in the country of interest are discussed – including investment models, intellectual property considerations, key taxes applicable for foreign companies, and several types of employment contracts. Additionally, the guides examine how business practices have changed, such as new requirements and how to open bank accounts.
Download the reports free at AsiaBriefing.com:
An Introduction to Doing Business in ASEAN
An Introduction to Doing Business in China
An Introduction to Doing Business in Hong Kong
An Introduction to Doing Business in India
An Introduction to Doing Business in Indonesia
An Introduction to Doing Business in Russia
An Introduction to Doing Business in Singapore
An Introduction to Doing Business in Vietnam
Identifying Opportunities Within the Belt and Road Initiatives 2021
Other ways to access special reports and knowledge about Asia:
Download magazines and guides about various aspects of different Asian economies, business, and regulatory environments at www.AsiaBriefing.com/Bookstore,
For media enquiries please contact media@asiabriefing.com or download our Media Kit.
Subscription to Asia Briefing is free, and provides you with access to our reports, the Asia Briefing Weekly roundup of latest business and investment news from across the region, and invitations to webinars on in-depth business topics. Subscribe here.
Dezan Shira & Associates – Founded in Hong Kong in 1992, Dezan Shira & Associates is a pan-Asia, multi-disciplinary professional services firm, providing market entry, legal, accounting, tax, HR, technology, and operational advisory to international investors. The mission of the firm is to guide foreign companies through Asia’s complex regulatory environments and assist with all aspects of establishing, maintaining, and growing their business operations throughout the region.
Asia Briefing Limited – Asia Briefing is a wholly owned subsidiary of Dezan Shira & Associates, Asia’s largest independent foreign direct investment practice. Founded in 1999, Asia Briefing through its stable of titles including the ten ASEAN countries of Brunei, Cambodia, Indonesia, Laos, Malaysia, Myanmar, Philippines, Singapore, Thailand and Vietnam, as well as mainland China, Hong Kong, India, Russia, Vietnam and Silk Road Briefings which focus on the Belt and Road Initiative. These collectively provide business intelligence to foreign investors interested in or operating in these markets, together with regulatory updates, analysis and commentary on today’s real issues concerning the foreign investor in Asia.
Contact
Dezan Shira & Associates / Asia Briefing Limited
Rohini Singh
Group Media and Content
+91 11 4706 8058
Email: media@asiabriefing.com
Website: www.asiabriefing.com
Holly McCleery
US Desk Marketing & Communications
+1 801 833 6645
Email: usa@dezshira.com
Attracting Manufacturing Investment in American Communities
To compete in an increasingly global economy, the United States must come up with innovative strategies that will lead to economic growth and job creation around the country. The ‘Investing in Manufacturing Communities Partnership’ (IMCP) seeks to enhance the way we leverage federal economic development funds to encourage American communities to focus not only on attracting individual investments one at a time, but transforming themselves into globally-competitive manufacturing hubs.
An administration-wide initiative led by the White House and the U.S. Department of Commerce, the ‘Investing in Manufacturing Communities Partnership’ will encourage communities to devise comprehensive economic development strategies that strengthen their competitive edge in attracting global manufacturers and their supply chains. IMCP specifically brings together the resources of multiple federal departments and agencies involved in economic development.
In Phase One of the of the ‘Investing in Manufacturing Communities Partnership,’ 44 communities were awarded a total of $7 million to support the creation of economic development strategies that recognize the community’s comparative advantages as a place to do business, invest in public goods, and encourage collaboration between multiple entities to expand the area’s commercial appeal to investors.
Today, U.S. Secretary of Commerce Penny Pritzker announced that the competition for Phase Two of the ‘Investing in Manufacturing Communities Partnership’ is now open, and the Federal Register Notice will be posted in the coming days. In this phase, communities will have an opportunity to compete for a special designation that will elevate them in consideration for $1.3 billion in federal dollars and assistance from 10 cabinet departments/agencies. These communities could also potentially receive catalytic additional federal investments to further support their economic development strategies. The IMCP is a critical component of the Department of Commerce’s “Open for Business Agenda,” which prioritizes trade and investment.
Phase Two of the Investing in Manufacturing Communities Partnership
In Phase Two of the IMCP, up to 12 communities that come up with winning strategies will receive a designation of “Manufacturing Community” that gives them elevated consideration for $1.3 billion in federal dollars and assistance from 10 cabinet departments/agencies. These communities would also potentially receive additional catalytic federal investments to support their economic development strategies. In order to earn the designation, communities must present strategies that identify technologies or industries in which they would be competitive in the future and would make investments in the following areas:
workforce and training;
advanced research;
infrastructure and site development;
supply chain support;
export promotion;
and capital access
These communities will receive:
Elevated consideration for federal dollars and assistance across 10 cabinet departments/agencies, totaling $1.3 billion;
A dedicated federal liaison at these agencies who can act as their concierge to the specific services they need;
Subject to funding availability, challenge grants may become available to some awardees from the pool of designated manufacturing communities;
Recognition on a government website, accessible to prospective private investors (foreign and domestic alike) looking for information on communities’ competitive attributes
This Press Release is courtesy of www.commerce.gov
Automaker sponsors Veteran’s Innovation Partnership Fellowship and Helps Employment and Professional Development
WASHINGTON, D.C. – General Motors announced its support for the U.S. Department of State Veterans Innovation Partnership (VIP), which offers military veterans a one-year paid fellowship in a U.S. Government agency.
“We know that transitioning from military to civilian life can seem like a daunting task, and we want to do everything in our power to help them,” said Ken Barrett, GM chief diversity officer. “These men and women have given so much for our country that they deserve our best efforts to make a difference in their life.”
Launched by the U.S. Department of State in support of Executive Order 13518, Employment of Veterans in the Federal Government, VIP supports veterans’ transition to diplomacy and development careers by assisting with educational opportunities to study international relations; establishes fellowship opportunities at U.S. Government foreign affairs agencies, and facilitates international public and private employment opportunities.
GM employs thousands of military veteran employees and has supported the U.S. armed forces for generations. GM is a corporate sponsor of the U.S. Chamber of Commerce Foundation’s “Hiring Our Heroes” program, which helps returning veterans and their spouses find jobs and a partner in the a coalition of private sector businesses dedicated to hiring 100,000 veterans by 2020.
The company also established GM’s Service Technical College, which offers free training to veterans and returning service members to prepare them for technical and non-technical entry-level roles in a dealership. GM also assists veterans by supporting The Achilles Freedom Team of Wounded Veterans, which helps wounded veterans overcome injuries through athletics.
“The Veterans Innovation Partnership is about recognizing not just how the State Department can help veterans, but about how veterans can help the State Department – we want to tap into the important leadership and service experience that they offer,” said Andrew O’Brien, special representative for Global Partnerships. “We are grateful to partners like General Motors for their commitment in making a program like this possible.”
General Motors Co. (NYSE:GM, TSX: GMM) and its partners produce vehicles in 30 countries, and the company has leadership positions in the world’s largest and fastest-growing automotive markets. GM, its subsidiaries and joint venture entities sell vehicles under the Chevrolet, Cadillac, Baojun, Buick, GMC, Holden, Jiefang, Opel, Vauxhall and Wuling brands. More information on the company and its subsidiaries, including OnStar, a global leader in vehicle safety, security and information services, can be found at http://www.gm.com.
Azevêdo Lunches Intensive Process To Agree On Doha Work Programme
At an open-ended meeting with all members today – the first of 2015 – Director-General Roberto Azevêdo launched a new process of consultations with the aim of agreeing a work programme on the remaining Doha Development Agenda issues by July this year. This new deadline was set by members at a special meeting of the General Council in November.
150pxls.gif (76 bytes)
MORE:
> Director-General
> Trade Negotiations Committee
> Doha Development Agenda
> General Council
The Director-General urged members to build on the progress that had been made during 2014 and to recall the ingredients which they would need in order to reach a successful outcome, such as:
maintaining a sense of urgency;
identifying and prioritising the issues that are of the most substantive importance;
targeting outcomes that are doable for all parties;
maintaining a high level of engagement;
and tackling all issues at the same time rather than trying to sequence them.
The Director General told members attending the meeting:
“We must maximise the time we have available to us before July — and maintain the momentum that we regained at the end of 2014. We need to have a detailed, substantive discussion that includes agriculture, non-agricultural market access, services and all of the other DDA issues, including development and issues of interest to LDCs. Today we are restarting our conversation on all of these issues. So be ready — and get involved.”
Under the intensified process launched today, discussions on the substantive issues of the DDA will be convened by the Chairs of the various Negotiating Groups and by the Director-General. Meetings will be held in a variety of formats and configurations. Replicating the inclusive and transparent approach that proved effective in the lead up to Bali, regular meetings of all members will be the spine of this work. The next such meeting is scheduled for Thursday 29 January.
Azevêdo Urges G20 Leaders’ Commitment To Improve The Functioning Of The WTO
Director-General Roberto Azevêdo strongly welcomed the communiqué agreed by G20 leaders at the summit in Buenos Aires, Argentina, on 1 December and said he would work with all WTO members to improve and strengthen the trading system. The Director-General also called on the leaders to act urgently to address the blockage in the WTO dispute settlement system.
Speaking in Buenos Aires at the close of the summit, the Director-General said:
“This has been a very productive G20 summit. I have heard firm support for trade and the WTO throughout my meetings with leaders in Buenos Aires and heard a range of ideas about strengthening our work. This is reflected in the leaders’ declaration, which I strongly welcome. The declaration represents a very important moment in tackling the current challenges in global trade. With this statement, the leaders underline the vital importance of trade and of the multilateral trading system in supporting growth, productivity, innovation, job creation and development. They call for improvements and “necessary reforms” to the functioning of the WTO to ensure that it can continue playing this essential role. I will work with WTO members to take this forward in the interests of all.”
“International trade and investment are important engines of growth, productivity, innovation, job creation and development. We recognize the contribution that the multilateral trading system has made to that end. The system is currently falling short of its objectives and there is room for improvement. We therefore support the necessary reform of the WTO to improve its functioning. We will review progress at our next Summit.”
Better HR through Better IT: A Theoretical Limit in Practice Jan 19 2017
What does an improved safety culture have to do with making hiring easier and faster? A lot, it turns out, if you work at NIST. In the spring of 2014, Paul O’Neill, former CEO of Alcoa and U.S. Treasury Secretary from 2001-2002, spoke to the NIST community about the “theoretical limit” for safety. He explained that when an organization’s culture focuses on safety and everyone doing the right things, the theoretical limit for safety incidents is zero. This is pretty easy to understand and straightforward: doing the right safety things ensures that no one gets hurt at work.
This got our Office of Human Resources (HR) Management staff thinking: what’s the theoretical time limit for a successful and compliant federal hiring action under current authorities? If everyone was on board with doing the right HR things, could we make hiring faster? After some research and assessing our own hiring data, we concluded that the theoretical limit for a NIST hiring action, depending on recruitment type, could be as fast as 12 to 20 days. We then started asking: How do we move from where we are now to that theoretical limit? And, would everyone get on board with doing the right things to achieve that speed? The answer was a resounding yes. We shared the theoretical limit analysis with our customers and they agreed that if we improved technology and made HR things easy to do correctly, hiring managers would be on board. This “yes” allowed the HR staff, our IT partners and our customers to start our journey toward faster and easier hiring.
On November 17, 2016, after a six-month development window and six-month pilot with one of NIST’s research laboratories, we fully deployed a new IT application called HR STAT (Submission, Tracking and Analytics Tool). Knowing we needed HR STAT to work for all of NIST, the tool was developed, tested and deployed in partnership with our customers.
HR STAT allows customers to:
Submit requests for recruitment actions via an online portal;
Track the full progress of the request from initiation to new employee start date, including integration with the security process; and,
Know the expected start date of the selectee, based on a mutually agreed hiring timeline and built in timeliness targets.
Working in collaboration with our partners, HR designed the workflow to track an aggressive timeliness target (typically 35 days) for our mission-critical occupations at NIST—a first step in moving closer to the theoretical limit. The initial results are promising!
During the pilot phase, 20 cases were completed and our average timeliness was 58 days. In comparison, our average timelines for the 140 completed cases outside of the pilot was 66 days. Since full deployment, 52 cases have been completed in HR STAT; timeliness ranged from 12 to 49 with an average of 26 days. By comparison, in the first quarter of fiscal year 2016, average timeliness for the 125 completed cases prior to HR STAT was 73 days.
In addition to speed, customers have reported via survey, direct email and anecdote that the application is easy to use and that the transparency provided is excellent.
As we continue to use HR STAT, we expect the benefits to grow. Full transparency and access to real-time data allows both HR and clients to address process issues and training needs. HR STAT represents what we need to deliver to our clients: collaborative HR services that are easy, compliant and fast.
HR STAT is better HR through better IT and, for us at NIST, it represents significant progress toward that theoretical limit and overall operational excellence.
For more information on HR STAT, you may contact Susanne Porch, NIST’s HR Director, at Susanne.porch@nist.gov.
Biden-Harris Administration Announces $13.9 million to Pennsylvania in Environmental and Climate Justice Community Change Grants
PHILADELPHIA— Today, July 25, 2024, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency announced $13.9 million in funding coming to Pennsylvania to help disadvantaged communities tackle environmental and climate justice challenges through projects that reduce pollution, increase community climate resilience, and build community capacity.
Made possible by President Biden’s Inflation Reduction Act, the Community Change Grants Program is the single largest investment in environmental and climate justice in history. The funding announcement today is the first tranche of nearly $2 billion from the program that was designed based on community input to award grants on a rolling basis.
In Pennsylvania, nearly $14 million is being awarded to the Pittsburgh Conservation Corps and PowerCorpsPHL to work in disadvantaged neighborhoods in Pittsburgh and Philadelphia to expand and create critical infrastructure for upcycling and commercializing materials from urban tree waste. The project will offer workforce development and training for area residents to provide career pathways in land stewardship services and wood products.
These selected applications are the first to come under the Community Change Grants Program’s rolling application process. Informed by robust stakeholder engagement and community feedback, the innovative rolling application process will ensure that applicants have ample time to prepare and take advantage of this historic resource. The Community Change Grants Program Notice of Funding Opportunity (NOFO), administered through EPA’s Office of Environmental Justice and External Civil Rights, is still accepting applications through November 21, 2024. EPA will continue to review applications and announce selections on a rolling basis.
“Our ability to deliver tangible results for communities depends on listening to them and developing innovative solutions through inclusive stakeholder engagement,” said EPA Administrator Michael S. Regan. “Today, thanks to President Biden’s Inflation Reduction Act, EPA has selected the first cohort of community partnerships to solve emerging and longstanding environmental and climate justice challenges.”
“These organizations recognized a need and took the steps to make their communities stronger now and in the future. This funding is a boost towards a cleaner environment while also building community capacity and addressing environmental justice”, said EPA Mid-Atlantic Regional Administrator Adam Ortiz. “We will continue to partner with these groups and look forward to watching the progress that will be made.”
The Community Change Grants also deliver on President Biden’s commitment to advance equity and justice throughout the United States through his Justice40 Initiative to ensure that 40 percent of the overall benefits of certain federal investments go to disadvantaged communities that are marginalized by underinvestment and overburdened by pollution.
See the full listing of the initial 21 organizations receiving a CCGP grant and learn more about CCGP here: https://www.epa.gov/inflation-reduction-act/community-change-grants-selections.
The Community Change Grants Program is still accepting applications through November 21, 2024, so EPA encourages applicants to submit applications as soon as they completely meet the NOFO requirements. EPA will be making additional selections on a rolling basis for the remainder of 2024. EPA also encourages interested applicants to apply for technical assistance as soon as possible, as the last day to request new technical assistance is August 16, 2024.
Read the Community Change Grants NOFO here: https://www.epa.gov/inflation-reduction-act/inflation-reduction-act-community-change-grants-program.
To learn more about the Community Change Grants and Technical Assistance: https://www.epa.gov/inflation-reduction-act/inflation-reduction-act-community-change-grants-program
To learn more about environmental justice at EPA, visit: https://www.epa.gov/environmentaljustice
For up-to-date information about the NOFO, including information on the webinars, subscribe to the Office of Environmental Justice and External Civil Rights’ listserv by sending a blank email to: join-epa-ej@lists.epa.gov. Follow us on X (formerly Twitter): @EPAEnvJustice.
###
Biden-Harris Administration Announces New Actions and Resources to Advance Clean Energy Economy
WASHINGTON – Administrator Isabel Casillas Guzman, head of the U.S. Small Business Administration (SBA) and the voice in President Biden’s Cabinet for America’s more than 33 million small businesses, announced that the agency has removed its 504 Loan Program’s cap on lending for clean energy projects as part of broader SBA and Biden-Harris Administration efforts to usher in our nation’s clean energy future.
“Small businesses and start-ups play a crucial role not only in innovating to develop the future of climate technology but also in adopting sustainable practices and transitioning to clean energy to help advance President Biden’s ambitious goal of net zero by 2050,” said Administrator Guzman. “As the Biden-Harris Administration makes historic public investments in climate resilience, clean energy, and infrastructure, the SBA is focused on ensuring small businesses have access to the capital they need to help our nation transition to a clean energy economy. By outlining SBA resources in the White House Climate Capital Guidebook and removing the cap on 504 loans for energy projects, the SBA can put itself in a stronger position to achieve this vital goal.”
The SBA’s lending cap removal for clean energy projects is part of a suite of initiatives under the Biden-Harris Administration announced today to catalyze and democratize investment in climate and clean energy. Previously, small businesses financing “energy public policy projects” were limited to three SBA 504 loans of $5.5 million each, for a maximum total of $16.5 million. Going forward, borrowers may secure as many 504 loans up to $5.5 million for which they otherwise qualify. Energy public policy projects include those that reduce energy consumption (e.g., retrofits) and renewable energy projects (e.g., adding solar), etc.
In addition to this announcement, the SBA continues to advance its core lending and investment programs in collaboration with the private capital markets to advance capital access for small businesses fueling the clean energy economy. A new Climate Capital Guidebook released today by the White House provides a comprehensive map of financing programs across the federal government, including from the SBA, that are available to climate-related small businesses and their investors. The guidebook complements the SBA’s recently released Investing in America Small Business Hub, which provides technical assistance to small businesses on how to access grants, loans, and market opportunities stemming from the climate investments under the Biden-Harris Administration.
###
About the U.S. Small Business Administration
The U.S. Small Business Administration helps power the American dream of business ownership. As the only go-to resource and voice for small businesses backed by the strength of the federal government, the SBA empowers entrepreneurs and small business owners with the resources and support they need to start, grow, or expand their businesses, or recover from a declared disaster. It delivers services through an extensive network of SBA field offices and partnerships with public and private organizations. To learn more, visit www.sba.gov.
Biden-Harris Administration to Expand Support for Veteran Small Business Owners
WASHINGTON – The U.S. Small Business Administration (SBA) announced $3.5 million in grant awards to support outreach organizations focused on veteran small businesses. The grants provide critical funding to create new Veterans Business Outreach Centers (VBOCs) in Alaska, California, Colorado, Iowa, Nebraska, Nevada, and South Carolina, strengthening training and counseling services for aspiring and existing veteran and military spouse small business owners. In the United States, there are nearly two million veteran-owned small businesses, employing over five million people and generating over $1.3 trillion in annual revenue.
“Our servicemembers have protected our Nation with selfless honor and sacrifice, and the Biden-Harris Administration is committed to supporting them with resources and opportunities as they pursue their American dreams of business ownership,” said U.S. Small Business Administrator Isabella Casillas Guzman. “With this expansion of our veteran-focused network of small business centers, we can help more transitioning service members, veterans, National Guard and Reserve members, and military spouses start and grow their businesses and advance our economy.”
“VBOCs are a one-stop shop for business training, counseling, and resource partner referrals to transitioning service members, veterans, National Guard and Reserve members, and military spouses interested in starting or growing a small business,” said Timothy Green, Acting Associate Administrator for the Office of Veterans Business Development. “The new centers will provide additional resources to increase support and access for nearly 2 million veteran-owned small businesses. The expanded locations aim to enhance the veteran small business owner experience with more opportunities for training and less appointment wait times.”
Today’s announcement expands the VBOC program from 22 to 28 locations, fully servicing all 50 states, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, U.S. Virgin Islands, Guam, and American Samoa. Organizations receiving grants from the SBA have demonstrated a commitment to addressing challenges that veteran-owned small businesses face and helping them succeed through the Department of Defense’s Transition Assistance Program. Grants will support a range of services, including:
Business planning: Provides veterans with training and counseling on accounting, financial planning, and management.
Assistance accessing capital: Provides veterans help in understanding the multitude of sources of capital available to them, as well as helps them in accessing financing, loans, and grants.
Marketing and outreach: Provides marketing and outreach services to promote veteran-owned businesses in their communities and beyond.
Transitioning: Provides Boots to Business instruction to help active duty servicemembers transition out of the military.
Grant awardees are as follows:
Seattle Economic Development Fund – Business Impact Northwest
Seattle, WA
Coverage Area: Alaska
University of Texas Arlington College of Business
Arlington, TX
Coverage Area: Nevada
Mt. Carmel Veterans Service Center
Colorado Springs, CO
Coverage Area: Colorado
Nebraska Enterprise Fund
Oakland, NE
Coverage Area: Nebraska and Iowa
The Citadel
Charleston, SC
Coverage Area: South Carolina
Long Beach City College
Long Beach, CA
Coverage Area: California – Los Angeles County, San Bernardino County, Ventura County, Orange County, Santa Barbara County, and Riverside County
For more information or to find a VBOC near you, visit www.sba.gov/vboc.
To learn more about SBA’s programs for veterans, visit www.sba.gov/veterans.
###
About the U.S. Small Business Administration
The U.S. Small Business Administration helps power the American dream of business ownership. As the only go-to resource and voice for small businesses backed by the strength of the federal government, the SBA empowers entrepreneurs and small business owners with the resources and support they need to start, grow, expand their businesses, or recover from a declared disaster. It delivers services through an extensive network of SBA field offices and partnerships with public and private organizations. To learn more, visit www.sba.gov.
BlackGold Capital Management and KKR Form Strategic Partnership
HOUSTON & NEW YORK– KKR & Co. L.P. (NYSE:KKR), a leading global investment firm, and BlackGold Capital Management (“BlackGold”), a credit-oriented hedge fund specializing in energy and hard asset investments, today announced that KKR is acquiring a 24.9% interest in BlackGold. Financial terms of the transaction were not disclosed.
Established in 2006 by co-founders Erik Dybesland and Adam Flikerski, who have spent their entire careers in the energy sector, BlackGold specializes in energy and hard asset event-driven strategies while investing throughout the capital structure. The nature of BlackGold’s strategy and investments facilitates repeatable low correlation and volatility returns relative to the broader market and commodities, providing meaningful diversification benefits to its investors.
“Through this strategic investment in BlackGold, we are partnering with an outstanding team with an excellent track record of delivering returns to investors. We are thrilled to add BlackGold to our hedge fund platform and we look forward to a long-term partnership with Erik, Adam and the full BlackGold team,” Todd Builione, co-head of Hedge Funds at KKR, said.
Erik Dybesland and Adam Flikerski stated: “KKR has nearly three decades of experience investing in the energy sector and maintains a significant presence and technical expertise in the industry. Having access to KKR’s global network of relationships, institutional infrastructure and management expertise will introduce new areas of opportunity for BlackGold and our investors. We are confident that our partnership will strengthen relationships with our counterparties and within our investment universe, while enhancing the durability and unique capabilities of our franchise.”
Marc Lipschultz, KKR’s Global Head of Energy & Infrastructure, added: “We are always looking for exceptional teams with whom we can partner, and this investment marks the culmination of those efforts. We believe their deep industry knowledge coupled with our energy franchise will benefit both parties and lead to new investment opportunities for our respective investors.”
BlackGold’s management team will continue to manage the business independently, and BlackGold’s investment strategies will not change as a result of KKR’s investment. All of BlackGold founders’ capital will remain invested in the funds and the majority of the proceeds received from this transaction will be re-invested in the funds – maintaining full alignment with their investors. Pro forma this transaction, the BlackGold management team will own 75.1% of BlackGold.
The investment in BlackGold is part of KKR’s efforts to develop the firm’s hedge fund platform, which is co-led by Girish Reddy and Todd Builione, and to expand the firm’s energy business, which is led by Marc Lipschultz. KKR’s hedge fund platform includes its approximately $10 billion multi-manager hedge fund business (KKR Prisma) and a Strategic Stakes & Seeding business that invests the firm’s balance sheet to acquire minority stakes in hedge fund managers. BlackGold represents KKR’s second minority stake in a hedge fund manager, following the 2013 investment in Nephila Capital, an insurance-linked securities manager with approximately $10 billion under management.
The investment by KKR was made by the firm and not through KKR’s investment funds.
About BlackGold
BlackGold Capital Management was founded in 2006 by Erik Dybesland and Adam Flikerski. BlackGold is a leading investment manager specializing in event-driven, energy and hard asset related credit. BlackGold manages assets primarily for family offices, insurance companies, hospitals, pensions, endowments and foundations, and is dedicated to achieving consistent volatility-adjusted performance, coupled with low correlation to commodity prices and the broader markets. BlackGold is based in Houston, TX and manages $1.4 billion in assets. Further information can be requested through BlackGold’s website at www.blackgoldcap.com.
About KKR
KKR is a leading global investment firm that manages investments across multiple asset classes including private equity, energy, infrastructure, real estate, credit and hedge funds. KKR aims to generate attractive investment returns by following a patient and disciplined investment approach, employing world-class people, and driving growth and value creation at the asset level. KKR invests its own capital alongside its partners’ capital and brings opportunities to others through its capital markets business. References to KKR’s investments may include the activities of its sponsored funds. For additional information about KKR & Co. L.P. (NYSE:KKR), please visit KKR’s website at www.kkr.com.
BMW Group Financial Services Announces Six Startups Selected to Join First U.S. Collaboration Lab.
Hilliard, OH – September 7, 2018… BMW Group Financial Services in the U.S. announced today the selection of six startups for the first-ever BMW Financial Services Collaboration Lab. The start-ups will now undertake a 10-week lab at BMW Financial Services’ offices in Hilliard, Ohio, to further develop their ideas alongside leading subject matter experts in the automotive and financial sectors.
The Collaboration Lab accelerator program provides entrepreneurs, start-ups, and small businesses in fintech and other fields with the opportunity to partner with BMW Group Financial Services to develop, and then realize, innovative solutions and game-changing new technologies that can ultimately benefit consumers, dealers, and partners.
From a total 212 applications, selected domestic and international start-ups were invited to pitch their ideas live to a panel of judges from BMW Financial Services, BMW of North America, and L Marks. The panel selected these six startups to join the 10-week Collaboration Lab program:
Category: Digitizing the Customer Journey
Startup: carLABS – carLABS has created a cognitive, conversational AI-powered platform for automating and enhancing sales and marketing in the automotive vertical. Its solution offers car buyers a dramatically simplified shopping experience that significantly increases conversions and return on marketing spend for car sellers.
Category: Building a Blockchain Strategy
Startup selected: Supermoney – Supermoney is developing a unique digital wallet. In-store and online, customers can pay with a simple QR scan. The product runs on a system of smart contracts that effectively and efficiently manage counterparty risk, protecting both buyer and seller.
Category: Building a Blockchain Strategy
Startup selected: Bloom – Bloom uses public-private key encryption underpinning blockchain technology to verify customer identity and to attest to the accuracy of credit history without storing customer raw data on the servers.
Category: Data Analytics and Insights
Startup selected: Omniscience – Omniscience Corp. are building underwriting and capital modeling solutions on top of their innovative analytics platform. They work with finserv and insurance firms to scale their analytics efforts on real world data.
Category: Data Analytics and Insights
Motion Auto Insurance – Motion Auto Insurance is modern insurance for the modern world. Fully programmatic, embeddable, insurance-as-a-service delivered from directly inside your mobile app for gig/sharing economy, new modes of vehicle ownership, and autonomous driving tech.
Category: Wildcard
Startup selected: Wrisk USA – Wrisk is giving personal insurance a long overdue digital upgrade. It allows its customers to manage different types of insurance seamlessly through a single app and helps them understand how they are priced and what they can do to reduce their risk.
“We welcome these talented entrepreneurial companies into the BMW Financial Services Collaboration Lab program, said Ian Smith, CEO of BMW Group Financial Services USA and Region Americas. “As we work together over the next 10 weeks, we will explore new technologies and solutions for our business and our customers.”
During the intensive 10-week program, the selected companies will be situated in a collaborative environment, and will benefit from access to the company’s leadership team, industry experts, investment professionals, and business education programs. L Marks will also provide fundraising support. “The next 10 weeks will see these impressive startups embark on an exciting journey to bring their ideas to life, and see them benefit enormously from their time in the Lab,” said Stuart Marks, Chairman of L Marks.
For more information about BMW Collaboration Lab 2018 and its participants, visit www.bmwcollaborationlab.com.
# # #
BMW Group Financial Services
BMW Group Financial Services was established in the U.S. in 1992 to support the sales and marketing of BMW products. Since then, the Group has expanded to provide service to markets in multiple countries and continues to evolve beyond its role as a captive finance unit. BMW Group Financial Services offers a wide range of leasing, retail and commercial financing and banking products tailored to meet the needs of the BMW customer. The Group also provides financing to BMW dealers for expanding dealership capabilities and enhancing overall operations. With more than $45 billion in serviced assets and 1,300,000 automotive lending customers across the U.S., BMW Group Financial Services finances more than three-quarters of the BMWs sold or leased in North America. BMW Group Financial Services employs more than 1,000 people, including consultants and service providers, many of whom are located in the Hilliard, Ohio, which serves the U.S.A., Brazilian, Canadian and Mexican markets through its Regional Service Center.
In 2001, the MINI Financial Services division was established to provide support for the brand’s dealers and its customers by offering financing and leasing options and branded financial services products.
BMW Group Financial Services also offers credit card products through its subsidiary, the BMW Bank of North America. up2drive.com is a division of BMW Bank of North America, a wholly owned subsidiary of BMW Financial Services NA, LLC. BMW Insurance Agency, Inc., a property and casualty producer is also part of BMW Group Financial Services. Information about BMW Group products is available to consumers via the Internet at:
www.bmwgroupna.com
www.bmwusa.com
www.bmwmotorradusa.com
www.miniusa.com
www.rolls-roycemotorcars.com
# # #
BMW Group In America
BMW of North America, LLC has been present in the United States since 1975. Rolls-Royce Motor Cars NA, LLC began distributing vehicles in 2003. The BMW Group in the United States has grown to include marketing, sales, and financial service organizations for the BMW brand of motor vehicles, including motorcycles, the MINI brand, and the Rolls-Royce brand of Motor Cars; Design works, a strategic design consultancy based in California; technology offices in Silicon Valley and Chicago, and various other operations throughout the country. BMW Manufacturing Co., LLC in South Carolina is part of BMW Group’s global manufacturing network and is the manufacturing plant for all X5 and X3 Sports Activity Vehicles and X6 and X4 Sports Activity Coupes. The BMW Group sales organization is represented in the U.S. through networks of 344 BMW passenger car and BMW Sports Activity Vehicle centers, 153 BMW motorcycle retailers, 127 MINI passenger car dealers, and 36 Rolls-Royce Motor Car dealers. BMW (US) Holding Corp., the BMW Group’s sales headquarters for North America, is located in Woodcliff Lake, New Jersey.
Information about BMW products is available to consumers via the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com.
# # #
Journalist note: Information about BMW and its products in the USA is available to journalists on-line at www.bmwusanews.com.
# # #
L Marks
L Marks are specialists in applied corporate innovation and early stage investors. Working with some of the world’s most high-profile brands, including BMW, Arsenal FC, and Lloyd’s of London, they create bespoke partnership and scouting projects to turn business challenges into opportunities for improvement and innovation. Founded in 2012 by serial entrepreneur Stuart Marks, L Marks builds bridges between corporates seeking to innovate and young companies with disruptive technologies.
Building Foundations for Transparency – Designing Tools for Transformation at the State Level
Geneva, Switzerland, – The World Economic Forum, in collaboration with Deloitte, has released a new report on increasing transparency, specifically addressing corruption risks in infrastructure, engineering, construction and real estate through a pilot project in India. Building Foundations for Transparency looks at collective action and hands-on solutions to address corruption using technology to tackle two key areas: greater transparency in permits and licences; and land purchase, land title acquisition and registration processes at the state level in Maharashtra.
The report is part of the second phase of the Forum’s Partnering Against Corruption Initiative (PACI) project to address the needs of the infrastructure and urban development industries. India has garnered strong interest from the PACI community over the years, in particular from the PACI’s community of Vanguard CEOs.
Rather than continuing discussions on key risk areas through various platforms, the report focuses on practical outcomes, as well as key solutions developed by participants in a Mumbai workshop held in December 2015 that focused on collective action and public-private cooperation.
Drawing on a solutions-based framework and the principal agent theory in relation to corruption, the report identifies key messages from the activities in India, including the need for action to make the construction and real estate industries in the country less prone to corruption; and for solutions that enhance the transparency of processes and the importance of technology-based solutions as the optimal channel to address the challenge. Using solutions developed during the regional workshop as well as expert interviews and a survey of industry experts, the report provides guidance on how the framework can be implemented on a local level and replicated in other regions.
The report also contains an online diagnostic tool developed by the project’s steering and advisory committees to advance the agenda for greater transparency within the infrastructure and urban development (IU) industries. This front-end platform seeks to inform stakeholders and interested parties about ongoing efforts and provides a visual aggregation of data from various indices and rankings related to corruption and the ease of doing business.
“Global organizations are increasingly challenged by industry and country-specific corruption risks, which they have difficulties in handling on their own. It is imperative to engage relevant stakeholders in collective action to foster an environment of fair competition. The latest report from the World Economic Forum, Building Foundations for Transparency, succinctly outlines the key outcomes of a deep-dive at the state level in India, and the development of hands-on approaches to collective action that can now be replicated in other regions,” said Ken B. Graversen, Corporate Ethics and Compliance Officer, Danfoss, Denmark.
“The Building Foundations for Transparency project has great value for local urban bodies in India and the report showcases this. Many of these bodies are keen to evolve a new transparent process. With support from PACI in the next phase of the project, we hope that the World Economic Forum will continue to help implement real change at the local level by offering expert and best practices from across the world,” said Pranjal Sharma, Consulting Editor of Businessworld, India, and a Member of the Forum’s Global Agenda Council on Transparency and Anti-Corruption.
“A key outcome of this project is an online diagnostic tool that provides governments and businesses with a real-time look at the progress that has been made in reducing corruption in the infrastructure, engineering, construction and real estate industries in Maharashtra, India. With greater transparency, governments now have a roadmap for developing the standardized procedures required to design corruption out of the system. Most importantly, the output from this project can now be extended geographically, allowing input and feedback to be shared across business, government and citizens in the future,” noted James H. Cottrell, Project Adviser and Partner, Deloitte, USA.
“This project leveraged the potential of digital technology as an enabler for transparency and citizen participation. The results indicate a shared, general belief that technology-based solutions can be quickly adopted and scaled-up beyond city and state levels. The tangible benefits and long-term impact of digital-based solutions rely on eliminating multiple layers of decision-making in public administration while providing a modern, transparent front-end to all stakeholders who are committed to disclosing information and reforming permitting and licensing processes in India,” said Pedro Rodrigues de Almeida, Head of Basic Industries, Member of the Executive Committee, World Economic Forum.
In the next and final phase of the project, the PACI is working with its signatories and Partners of the World Economic Forum to develop new forms of public-private cooperation to tackle corruption-related risks across industries with a focus on rebuilding trust and integrity through high-level dialogues with industry and government. In addition, 2016 will see project workshops and the replication of the diagnostic tool in other regions, including Africa and Latin America. Throughout 2016, the Forum will advance these efforts; begin early-stage project preparation through dialogues aimed at disseminating the best practices collected over the three phases of the Building Foundations trilogy; and work on furthering the anti-corruption agenda in Africa, Latin America and South-East Asia.
Business Communications Expert Mason Harris: Five Tips For Handling Objections From Clients
WASHINGTON, April 19, 2021 — Wowing a client on the first try with an amazing proposal sounds like the dream, but the best thing you can do for a client is let them tell you no, a lot.
That’s the advice of major sales consultant and business development expert Mason Harris, author of the book The Chutzpah Advantage: Go Bigger. Be Bolder. Do Better. (2021, Indie Books International).
The Chutzpah Advantage: Go Bigger. Be Bolder. Do Better.
The Chutzpah Advantage: Go Bigger. Be Bolder. Do Better.
“No one likes hearing objections, but listening is the first rule of communication,” says Harris. “It becomes more difficult to persuade, handle the inevitable complaints, and provide a solution that benefits all parties if you fail at this listening.”
Harris, known as The Chutzpah Guy, turned his decades of experience as an entrepreneur in emerging tech and sales to develop a model for success that he now teaches as a motivational speaker and listener. He advises clients on how to use objections to their advantage, rather than viewing them as a dead end.
“Sometimes we give up too quickly,” Harris explains. “For many of us, someone’s simple act of disagreeing, often without much thought, is enough to prevent our idea from moving forward.”
According to Harris, objections aren’t something to avoid, but rather guiding posts that point towards a client’s fears and needs. They’re also pretty much a guarantee, no matter how well prepared one may be.
“Suppose your idea is genuinely remarkable. Unless it’s presented exclusively to people who work for you and tend to agree with everything you say anyway, you should plan on objections.”
So how can people approach objections from clients in a way that progresses the meeting instead of ending it? Here are five tips from Harris about what to do when a client inevitably says no.
Never take offense at an objection. We should understand the objection. Ask good questions. Be polite with our response. Don’t tell or argue with the other person. No one likes to feel bullied or openly challenged. Instead, ask questions—lots of them.
Do not back down! Do we need a confrontation? Yes. Here’s why. The objection may not be well thought out. Some people just love to disagree. Others are scared of change. Customers may not want to agree too quickly; they’re unsure if your solution is worth overcoming the easy decision to stay with a current product, service, or company.
Be prepared for a lot of objections. Most mediocre ideas benefit from being challenged—by becoming a better idea or being abandoned. If you haven’t heard any objections and there hasn’t been adequate discussion, you’re doing something wrong.
The first objection may not be the real issue. Many of the objections we hear aren’t severe or even the real issue; they’re kind of a warm-up to the real objection, which you may never learn because people tend to give up too quickly. Every good idea has the potential to be accepted after it is challenged, and you have the opportunity to understand the basis of the rejection.
The more objections the better! Keep questioning and listening carefully. You can’t overcome an objection if you don’t truly understand its basis. When you feel you have uncovered most of the objections, you can move forward with a specific resolution or clarification.
Harris adds that even though handling objections one at a time may seem more straightforward, collecting as many as possible illuminates your client’s actual needs.
“By understanding the complete picture, you can adequately address concerns with the most meaningful solutions, not the benefits you assume are important.”
About Indie Books International
Indie Books International (www.indiebooksintl.com) was founded in 2014 in Oceanside, California by two best-selling business authors. Since then the company has released more than 100 titles. Similar to indie film companies and indie music labels, the mission of Indie Books International is to serve as an independent publishing alternative to help business thought leaders create impact and influence.
Contact
Henry DeVries
307759@email4pr.com
619-540-3031
Business Services Industry: Deloitte, Ernst and Young, KPMG, Accenture, Cibunet and others
All are invited to participate in the discussion:
Business Services Industry Entity Features Live Video Blog Schedule: February 25th, 2025 @ 11am
Venue: https://www.cibunet.com/
INDUSTRY PROFILE:
Quick Summary of Participants in this Industry: Management Consultants, Management Services, Accountants, Tax Preparers, Employment Agencies, Payroll Services etc.
The Management of Companies and Enterprises sector comprises establishments that hold the securities of (or other equity interests in) companies and enterprises for the purpose of owning a controlling interest or influencing management decisions or establishments (except government establishments) that administer, oversee, and manage establishments of the company or enterprise and that normally undertake the strategic or organizational planning and decision making role of the company or enterprise. Establishments that administer, oversee, and manage may hold the securities of the company or enterprise.
Establishments in this sector perform essential activities that are often undertaken, in-house, by establishments in many sectors of the economy. By consolidating the performance of these activities of the enterprise at one establishment, economies of scale are achieved.
The Internet is changing the way companies do business and the kind of consulting they need. Many traditional consulting practices are in danger of becoming less relevant in the Internet Age. The consultants of tomorrow will require different skills than the consultants of today. Many consultancies have some sort of e-business push underway, whether it’s a specific e-biz practice, a special initiative, or just funneling a ton of cash into figuring out all the ways they can use the Internet to help their clients.
A slew of e-business boutique firms have arisen in recent years, including Razorfish, Scient, USWeb/CKS, Viant and Agency.com. Look for these firms to increasingly butt heads with the more traditional consulting firms for Internet-related and eventually, perhaps, general-consulting projects.
To help you understand the consulting landscape, we’ve divided the industry into six different categories: the industry elite, the Big Five, boutiques, information technology (IT) consultancies, human resources specialists and the independents. Most players in the industry can be put into one or more of these different categories.
The rich and famous of the consulting world. These companies focus on providing cutting-edge strategy and operations advice to the top management of large corporations. They generally hire the best candidates from the best undergraduate, MBA and other graduate programs. Slackers need not apply. Players in this group include: Arthur D. Little, A.T. Kearney, Bain & Co., Booz-Allen & Hamilton, the Boston Consulting Group, McKinsey & Co., Mercer Management Consulting and Monitor Co., to name a few.
The consulting operations of the Big Five accounting firms. Although these firms provide some of the same strategy and operations advice as the elite, they tend to put a stronger emphasis on implementation work, particularly in the IT world. The players are Accenture, Deloitte Consulting (part of Deloitte & Touche), Ernst & Young, KPMG and PricewaterhouseCoopers. The Big Five may get out of the consulting business, partly because the SEC is concerned about possible conflicts of interest that could result in overly rosy audits of firms that are consulting clients of the accounting firm performing the audit. The Big Five deny that a conflict of interest problem exists. At any rate, Arthur Andersen is spinning off Accenture, Ernst & Young may sell its consulting business to French consultancy Cap Gemini, and industry observers expect more of the same.
Boutique Firms that specialize along industry or functional lines. Although often smaller, these firms may have top reputations and do the same operations and strategy work the elite firms do, but with more of an industry focus. Representative players include: Advisory Board Company and APM (health care); Corporate Executive Board (cross-company research); CSC Planmetrics (energy and utility industry); Cluster Consulting (telecommunications and the internet); Marakon Associates (strategy), marchFIRST, formerly Mitchell Madison Group (financial and strategy); Oliver Wyman (financial services); MarketBridge, formely Oxford Associates (sales); PRTM (high-tech operations); Strategic Decisions Group (decision analysis), Roland Berger and Partners (strategy and operations); Braun Consulting, formerly Vertex Partners (strategy).
Information technology specialists constitute one of the fastest-growing sectors of the consulting world, although this sector’s growth isn’t quite as meteoric as that of strategy consulting, according to Kennedy Information Group. IT firms provide advice, implementation and programming work on issues related to computer systems, telecommunications and the Internet. Representative players include American Management Systems, Computer Sciences Corp., Diamond Technology Partners, EDS, IBM, Mondial and the Big Five firms.
Human Resource consulting focuses on personnel issues such as employee management and evaluation systems, payroll and compensation programs, pensions and other benefits programs. Representative firms include The Hay Group, Hewitt Associates, William M. Mercer, Sibson & Co., Towers Perrin and Watson Wyatt Worldwide. In addition, several of the Big Five firms have practices devoted to this area.
Independent one-man or one-woman shops. By sheer numbers, independent consultants far outnumber the larger firms. Fully 45 percent of all consultants are reported to be independents. They typically have some sort of industry or functional specialty and get hired on a project basis. If you have an MBA and several years of useful and topical business experience, there’s no reason not to hang out a shingle yourself.
Companies in the sector provide support services to businesses, such as office administration, hiring and placing of personnel, security services, travel arrangement, cleaning, and waste disposal. Major companies include ADP, Allegis Group, ManpowerGroup, and Waste Management (all based in the US), along with Adecco (Switzerland), Randstad (the Netherlands), and TUI Group (Germany).
Europe and North America are the primary markets for business services. Worldwide demand in the sector is driven by technology, digitalization, and new communication technologies and infrastructure. As a result, startups have emerged across the world, with business solutions that are innovative, flexible, and sustainable, according to Statista. While large companies may operate globally or within a specific region, many business services firms serve smaller geographic areas near their headquarters.
The US business services sector consists of about 420,000 establishments (single-location companies and units of multi-location companies) with combined annual sales of about $950 billion.
For more on this profile, please click here: https://www.cibunet.com/industries/business-services/
Profile Is Courtesy of www.bls.gov , www2.deloitte.com , www.doingbusiness.org, www.dnb.com and WetFeet.com
Discussion Questions:
1. What are some of the obvious ethics/practices of the industry or entity in the industry that violate scriptures?
2. What are the notable complaints of those who patronize this industry or entity in this industry?
3. What services or products of this industry or entity of this industry ultimately hurt people?
4. Does the industry or entity in the industry violate Environmental Social and Governance ESG sustainability goals in any way?
5. How does this industry or entity in this industry compete that is flawed in your opinion?
6. What are some of the tactics of this industry or entity in this industry that does not augur well for other industries and the overall economy?
Cecilia Malmström, Commissioner for Trade Strasbourg, European Parliament Plenary Debate on TTIP EU-US Trade Disputes
Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen,
TTIP is a broad negotiation. It covers traditional trade issues but also many others, like medical devices regulation, financial services or sustainable development. To get it right, we need the engagement of the whole of this Parliament.
This resolution is providing that engagement. The fact that 14 committees in addition to the International Trade Committee were active in drafting it proves that you are deeply engaged in the detail of this negotiation.
When President Juncker came here to present his agenda for this Commission last July, he made clear that TTIP was one of his core priorities. This House at that time voted strongly in favour of his agenda.
Why?
First, because TTIP is an essential part of the Commission’s strategy to open markets around the world. We are doing that not to benefit a small few but in order to create opportunities for the whole of Europe: the people of Europe the consumers of Europe, the entrepreneurs of Europe.
One in seven people in Europe have a job thanks to exports around the world. Those jobs are highly skilled and better paid than average. 4.7 million of them are linked to exports to the US. TTIP would help increase that number.
It would also make goods cheaper and more varied for consumers.
And it would help make our small and medium-sized companies more competitive. They would find it easier to export and get their imported components and raw materials more
cheaply.
Those are solid economic advantages. We cannot afford to turn our backs on them, now or in the future.
Second, TTIP is also a strategic alliance with the country that most shares Europe’s commitment to our core values and a high level of protection of people and of the
environment in regulation.
We need an ally like that to shape the globalization we see deepening before our eyes every day. We are more affected by economic and political decisions made in other countries than ever before.
And we particularly need an ally because we know that the strength of our voice in the world is, in relative terms, decreasing.
TTIP guarantees that partnership with America for the future. We cannot afford to turn our backs on that either.
There is, Honourable Members, as you know, an unprecedented debate about this agreement. That’s a good thing. I respect people who have doubts and questions, across the
continent and within this House. I take those concerns seriously and have engaged closely with national parliaments, with this Parliament, with NGOs, with civil society and other stakeholders to listen and to try to understand their concerns.
And I hope that all these people see the changes that we have made to take account of their views.
Since last November:
I have opened up these negotiations to unprecedented public scrutiny. I have put EU negotiating proposals on the internet and increased the access of Members of this Parliament and representatives of the Member States to the process. I have visited national parliaments to exchange and open channels. And I am happy to say that TTIP is the world’s most transparent bilateral free trade negotiation.
We have also made clear where we stand on public services such as public health or water concessions. This is a concern I have heard very frequently. I have together with
Ambassador Froman, the US Trade Representative, made a joint statement: The EU and the US are now fully united around a crystal clear vision that nothing in TTIP will change the fact that only Member States choose how their public services should be organised.
We have also made clear where we stand on regulation: I’ve put our proposal on cooperating with the US online. And it says there will be no limitations on the power of this Parliament, of any national parliament or of Europe’s governments. We want the benefits of shared expertise and we want opportunities for our people. That’s all.
And I have made proposals for a deep reform of investment protection. The result is a completely new approach. We still want to foster job-creating investment. But we are
proposing a new system that sets down the right to regulate in black and white. A new system that takes us away from the private arbitration tribunals of the past. Instead we want a future in which disputes are decided in an international investment court, by judges and with a right of appeal. TTIP will be a step towards that goal, not the final result. But it is an essential step, given the role of the US as a global investor. And your resolution is a vital step in these negotiations. But it is certainly not the end of our conversation. The Commission will continue to be flexible to take account of your views.
Beyond investment, we also have important proposals to discuss on how best to protect labour and environmental rights and on digital commerce. And there will be many more issues to debate over the course of these talks. They are far from over. These negotiations are far reaching and a lot of work is still needed.
I will continue to push the US on our offensive interests: including on public procurement, where we expect an ambitious proposal, but also on services, energy, and geographical indications just to mention a few examples. And your resolution will provide a vital basis for that negotiation. Having your priorities so clearly established helps the Commission explain why we need to tackle them in the final agreement.
So allow me to thank you for work…
… to look forward to the debate we are about to have.
… and to pledge my full cooperation with you as we jointly push for the result Europeans
need:
A TTIP that leads to jobs, growth and investment while protecting our values and our democracies.
Thank you.
Celonis, IBM and Red Hat Form Strategic Partnership to Help Transform Business Execution
NEW YORK, MUNICH, ARMONK, N.Y. and RALEIGH, N.C, April 1, 2021 /PRNewswire/ — Celonis, IBM (NYSE: IBM) and Red Hat today announced a global strategic partnership to help accelerate the adoption of the Celonis Execution Management System (EMS) and help deliver more flexibility and choice in how customers deploy the technology. The collaboration seeks to accelerate how customers apply process mining, intelligence and automation to the core enterprise system functions and processes that drive business execution.
The strategic partnership aims to help address many challenges business leaders face as they seek to digitally transform their operations. Despite trillions of dollars[1] invested in technologies, solutions, and transformation initiatives, businesses often execute below their full capacity because of system and technology complexity, broken or inefficient processes, and fragmented data that sits across various IT and cloud environments. Celonis EMS sits on top of core enterprise systems such as Enterprise Resource Planning and Customer Relationship Management, pulls real-time data from them, and applies process intelligence in order to help identify and unlock execution capacity across a business.
IBM Global Business Services (GBS) is bolstering its consulting approach by implementing Celonis software as part of its methodology, alongside the application of IBM data and AI solutions. GBS is also helping clients build new solutions using Celonis EMS. Clients across all industries and domains can benefit by accelerating their transformation and re-envisioning work with intelligent workflows. Additionally, Celonis is embracing an open hybrid cloud strategy by re-platforming on Red Hat OpenShift to deliver more flexibility and choice in how customers deploy their technologies.
“Through the strategic partnership with IBM and Red Hat, we plan to help power the shift from analog to intelligent business execution, helping many of the world’s largest companies with their transactional systems, boosting their business performance,” said Miguel Milano, Chief Revenue Officer and co-owner of Celonis. “It’s incredibly powerful for our customers to be able to combine the Celonis Execution Management System with Red Hat OpenShift’s hybrid cloud approach and IBM Global Business Services’ expertise.”
“This strategic partnership accelerates IBM’s billion-dollar partner ecosystem commitment and reflects our bold approach to expanding into high growth, emerging categories to help meet the evolving hybrid cloud and AI needs of our clients,” said Mark Foster, Senior Vice President, IBM Services. “The bottom line is our clients are looking to accelerate the transformation of their workflows and make them more intelligent. Through this powerful new global strategic partnership with Celonis, we’re adding to IBM’s suite of technology capabilities to unlock value and help propel our clients’ growth and innovation.”
Harnessing value through digital transformation
GBS is bringing deep consulting experience to complement Celonis’ execution management and process mining capabilities to help create intelligent workflows that are more responsive, accurate and predictive. GBS is embedding Celonis software into its services methodologies and is broadly deploying Celonis’ capabilities via 10,000 practitioners throughout its industry and domain practice areas, from consulting and business process outsourcing, to enterprise applications like customer care, to finance and supply chain.
“Working with IBM Global Business Services, we have analyzed our procure to pay processes across several countries in Europe and Africa by applying Celonis process mining tools to uncover and fix inefficiencies. Our finance business processes have benefitted from greater transparency and the identification of tangible improvement areas,” said Jens Knoblauch, Executive Director, Digital Business Services at Linde. “We will need to further develop our operational excellence and can benchmark best practices across all our countries to help each perform their best.”
The strategic partnership between Celonis and IBM GBS will initially focus on:
Advanced end-to-end consulting expertise: IBM GBS can deliver skills, capabilities and experience through a center of excellence that can accelerate customer enablement. IBM is integrating Celonis into its consulting work for clients across service line areas like supply chain, finance, procurement, HR, and customer experience including its application modernization work with leading independent software vendors.
Embed in IBM Garage: IBM is embedding Celonis intelligent execution management software into its IBM Garage methodology to help deepen workflow analysis and accelerate intelligent workflows for critical processes like production, customer service, distribution, manufacturing and logistics. IBM Garage is a methodology to help collaborate with clients, generate innovative ideas, and turn those ideas into business value, leveraging both IBM and ecosystem technology.
Business process outsourcing: IBM GBS is adopting Celonis across many of its business process outsourcing engagements to help them run more efficiently to drive better outcomes for clients.
Industry-specific intelligent workflows: IBM GBS is building applications and assets on Celonis EMS for key industries and domains, particularly focused on regulated industries, to help bring actionable data and more intelligent workflows to large enterprises.
A flexible, hybrid cloud platform for deployment
Additionally, Celonis is embracing an open hybrid cloud strategy using Red Hat OpenShift to deliver more flexibility for customers in where they deploy Celonis’ software – across any public or private cloud environment they choose. This flexibility is especially useful in highly regulated industries and enhances Celonis’ interoperability across customers’ existing systems, bringing another level of agility in how critical data can be moved and analyzed to drive new value.
Red Hat OpenShift technology and experience can also enable agility, speed, security and scalability. Celonis is in the process of adopting Red Hat OpenShift across its entire software portfolio.
“The collaboration between our three companies gets at the heart of what we often talk to customers about: how can they transform to enable new innovation and choice while maintaining consistency and the ability to scale,” said Dave Farrell, general manager, Global Strategic Alliances, Red Hat. “Just as Red Hat Enterprise Linux did at the operating system level, Red Hat OpenShift provides a consistent foundation to enable Celonis to deliver its powerful platform across multiple clouds. And by using Managed OpenShift, Celonis can take advantage of the power of the industry’s leading enterprise Kubernetes platform without the complexity of building and managing a Kubernetes environment, enabling them to keep their focus on serving customers and innovating its EMS offerings.”
“With our move to Red Hat OpenShift, we’re offering our customers a new level of flexibility and agility for how they deploy Celonis to help meet their requirements,” said Martin Klenk, co-founder and Chief Technology Officer at Celonis. “Giving them more choice fits with our belief as a company in living for customer value.”
About Celonis
Celonis believes that every company can unlock its full execution capacity. Powered by its market-leading process mining core, the Celonis Execution Management System provides a set of instruments, applications, and developer studio and platform capabilities for business executives and users. The Celonis EMS offerings help companies manage every facet of execution management from analytics to strategy and planning, management, actions and automation. Celonis has thousands of customers, including ABB, AstraZeneca, Bosch, Coca-Cola, Citibank, Danaher Corporation, Dell, GSK, John Deere, L’Oréal, Siemens, Uber, Vodafone and Whirlpool. Celonis is headquartered in Munich, Germany and New York City, USA and has 15 offices worldwide.
About IBM
To learn more about how IBM is working with Celonis to help enterprises transform with hybrid cloud technologies and services, visit https://www.ibm.com/services/business or engage with us on Twitter @ibm. For more information on IBM’s AI-powered Automation solutions, visit: https://www.ibm.com/cloud/automation
About Red Hat, Inc.
Red Hat is the world’s leading provider of enterprise open source software solutions, using a community-powered approach to deliver high-performing Linux, hybrid cloud, container, and Kubernetes technologies. Red Hat helps customers integrate new and existing IT applications, develop cloud-native applications, standardize on our industry-leading operating system, and automate, secure, and manage complex environments. Award-winning support, training, and consulting services make Red Hat a trusted advisor to the Fortune 500. As a strategic partner to cloud providers, system integrators, application vendors, customers, and open source communities, Red Hat can help organizations prepare for the digital future.
For more information contact:
Gabrielle Gugliocciello
IBM Media Relations
gguglio@ibm.com
CGTN: China stresses the need to advance economic globalization amid global crisis
BEIJING, – As the world deals with major changes and a pandemic unseen in a century, China has highlighted the importance of advancing globalization even as the economic integration process faces headwinds.
To forge greater synergy for development and close the development gap, the international community needs to pool cooperation resources, platforms and networks of development partnerships, Chinese President Xi Jinping said on Friday in a virtual address to the plenary session of the 25th St. Petersburg International Economic Forum.
“We have full confidence in China’s economic development,” Xi said. “China will continue to promote high-quality development, expand high-standard opening-up with firm resolve, and pursue high-quality Belt and Road cooperation.”
More equitable, sustainable global development
Noting that the international community is keen to achieve more equitable, sustainable and secure development, Xi said it is important to seize opportunities, meet challenges head-on, and work on the implementation of the Global Development Initiative to build a shared future of peace and prosperity.
The Chinese president proposed the Global Development Initiative in his speech to the 76th Session of the United Nations General Assembly via video link in September last year. The plan charts a course for international development.
It is important that all countries strengthen the “soft connectivity” of development policies and international rules and standards, Xi told the attendees at the forum.
Attempts at decoupling, supply disruption, unilateral sanctions and maximum pressure should be rejected, and trade barriers removed so as to keep global industrial and supply chains stable, tackle the worsening food and energy crises, and revive the world economy, he said.
It is important to follow true multilateralism, and respect and support all countries’ pursuit of development paths suited to their national conditions, he said, adding that it is also important to build an open world economy and increase the representation and voice of emerging markets and developing countries in global economic governance.
He also called on countries to pursue innovation-driven development, stressing the importance of unlocking the potential of innovation-driven growth, improving the rules and institutional environment for innovation, and breaking down barriers to the flow of innovation factors.
Xi urged efforts to deepen exchanges and cooperation in innovation, facilitate deeper integration of science and technology into the economy, and make sure the fruits of innovation are shared by all.
China to continue promoting high-quality development
The Chinese president pointed out that the fundamentals of the Chinese economy – strong resiliency, enormous potential and long-term sustainability – remain unchanged.
As one of the first countries to resume work and production, the country became the only major economy to register positive growth in 2020, with its GDP surpassing 114.4 trillion yuan (about $18.1 trillion) in 2021.
A recent report released by the American Chamber of Commerce in South China has indicated that over 70 percent of the assessed companies have reinvestment plans in China for 2022, and 58 percent consider their overall return on investment in China to be higher than in other places.
China stands ready to work with Russia and all other countries to explore development prospects, share growth opportunities, and make new contributions to deepening global development cooperation and building a community with a shared future for mankind, Xi said.
https://news.cgtn.com/news/2022-06-17/Xi-addresses-25th-St-Petersburg-International-Economic-Forum-1aWGtfC4wN2/index.html
SOURCE CGTN
CONTACT: Simin Jiang, +86-18826553286, jiang.simin@cgtn.com
CGTN: China To Build Zhejiang Into Demonstration Zone For Common Prosperity
BEIJING, June 13, 2021 /PRNewswire/ — China’s eastern Zhejiang province is expected to make substantial progress in building a demonstration zone for common prosperity through high-quality development, according to a guideline released by the Communist Party of China Central Committee and the State Council on Thursday.
The guideline rolled out multiple measures to guide the province in setting an example for promoting common prosperity.
CGTN: China to build Zhejiang into demonstration zone for common prosperity
CGTN: China to build Zhejiang into demonstration zone for common prosperity
By 2025, Zhejiang should achieve solid progress in building the demonstration zone, with its per capita gross domestic product (GDP) reaching the level of moderately developed economies, while a social structure with a middle-income population as the majority should be generally developed by then, the guideline said.
And 10 years after that, the province will achieve greater success in high-quality development, achieving common prosperity on the whole, according to the guideline.
Promoting the common prosperity of all Chinese people is an arduous and long-term task that cannot be fully implemented in a short time. Thus, the urgent need is to select some areas with relatively sufficient conditions as a pilot, the National Development and Reform Commission (NDRC) said in response to reporters’ question on China’s plans in Zhejiang.
Zhejiang’s pioneering role
Building the demonstration zone in Zhejiang is conducive to promoting more coordination between urban and rural income distribution, boosting industrial development and optimizing public services, according to a research from Bank of China Research Institute.
As China is now the second-largest economy in the world, more attention should be paid to the coordination between urban and rural income growth and economic growth to narrow the income gap and strengthen middle-income groups. Zhejiang demonstration zone will broaden the income channels of urban and rural residents, and explore ways to increase the income of low-and middle-income groups, as well as improve the salary distribution policy for skilled talents, the research said.
Zhejiang has a developed economy, a strong sense of reform and innovation, and enjoys the foundation and advantages for the building of demonstration zones. The guideline said Zhejiang should build a coordinated advancement of industrial and consumption upgrading, to better meet people’s diversified needs, which requires high-end, intelligent, and market-oriented development in the industry, and promote the vitality of labor, technology, state-owned and private capital and other factors, according to the research.
Why was Zhejiang selected?
Zhejiang Province has achieved obvious results in exploring and solving the problem of unbalanced and insufficient development; the fruits achieved through reforms there will provide experience for other parts of the country, China’s state planner said.
Zhejiang is a comparatively wealthy province. Its residents’ per capita disposable income stood at 52,400 yuan (about $8,199) in 2020, second only to Shanghai and Beijing.
The development there is also well-balanced as rural residents account for half of its total population, but the income differential between urban and rural residents is 1.96, much lower than the national 2.56.
All parts of Zhejiang generally show a relatively strong sense of reform and innovation, offering various advanced reform experiences such as quick and easy one-stop services. Despite all these services, the potential for further growth and prosperity remains strong in the province, for instance, in anti-monopoly management and preventing disorderly expansion of capital.
According to the NDRC, the problem-oriented guideline focuses on the weakest link hindering common prosperity and puts forward key measures to narrow the gap between urban and rural regional development and income distribution among different groups.
https://news.cgtn.com/news/2021-06-10/China-issues-measures-on-building-common-prosperity-demonstration-zone-10Z2gdPHHCE/index.html
SOURCE CGTN
CONTACT: cgtn@cgtn.com
Related Links
www.cgtn.com
CGTN: China-Africa friendship continues to flourish on vaccine, trade, renewable energy
BEIJING, Nov. 30, 2021 /PRNewswire/ — China-Africa friendship is expected to continue to flourish as cooperation is further deepened in various areas after the ongoing 8th Ministerial Conference of the Forum on China-Africa Cooperation (FOCAC) held in Dakar, Senegal.
China will provide an additional one billion doses of COVID-19 vaccines to Africa, carry out 10 projects on poverty alleviation and agriculture, and conduct more programs with Africa in various areas, announced President Xi Jinping on Monday when addressing the opening ceremony of the meeting via video link.
Elaborating on the secret of China-Africa friendship and looking to the future development of their relations, he highlighted unity against the pandemic, deepening practical cooperation, promoting green development, and safeguarding fairness and justice.
Cooperation against COVID-19
“To reach the target set by the African Union of vaccinating 60 percent of the African population against COVID-19 by 2022, China will provide another one billion doses of vaccines to Africa, of which 600 million doses will be provided free,” Xi said.
During the toughest times in China’s fight against the COVID-19 epidemic, African countries and regional organizations such as the African Union (AU) provided strong support to China. After COVID-19 struck Africa, China supplied 50 African countries and the AU Commission with COVID-19 vaccines.
“China will never forget African countries’ profound friendship,” Xi said, adding that China will also carry out 10 medical and health projects for African countries and send 1,500 medical team members and public health experts to Africa.
Earlier this week, the main building of the Chinese-funded headquarters for the Africa Centers for Disease Control and Prevention was structurally completed.
Practical cooperation in various areas
China will work with Africa to expand trade and investment, share experience in poverty alleviation, and strengthen cooperation on digital economy and renewable energy, Xi said.
China will send 500 agricultural experts to Africa, work closely with African countries to implement nine major projects on healthcare, poverty alleviation, trade, investment, digital innovation, green development, capacity building, cultural exchanges and security, he added.
Since the founding of FOCAC, Chinese companies have utilized various funds to help African countries build and upgrade more than 10,000 km of railways, nearly 100,000 km of highways, nearly 1,000 bridges and 100 ports, and 66,000 km of power transmission and distribution network, according to a white paper titled “China and Africa in the New Era: A Partnership of Equals” released on Friday.
Building China-Africa community with a shared future
This year marks the 65th anniversary of the start of diplomatic relations between China and African countries.
Hailing the spirit of China-Africa friendship and cooperation, Xi said it reflects the two sides’ experience of sharing weal and woe and serves as the source of strength for furthering China-Africa ties.
Over the past 65 years, China and Africa have forged unbreakable fraternity in the struggle against imperialism and colonialism, and embarked on a distinct path of cooperation in the journey toward development and revitalization, he said.
“Together, we have written a splendid chapter of mutual assistance amidst complex changes, and set a shining example for building a new type of international relations,” he said.
Xi put forward the principles of China’s Africa policy: sincerity, real results, amity and good faith, and pursuing the greater good and shared interests.
At the initiative of both China and African countries, FOCAC was inaugurated at its first Ministerial Conference in Beijing in October 2000, with the goals of responding to the challenges emerging from economic globalization and seeking common development.
FOCAC now has 55 members, comprising China, the 53 African countries that have diplomatic relations with China, and the AU Commission.
https://news.cgtn.com/news/2021-11-29/Xi-addresses-opening-ceremony-of-8th-FOCAC-ministerial-conference-15At0m8AIOk/index.html
SOURCE CGTN
CONTACT: Jiang Simin, +86-188-2655-3286, cgtn@cgtn.com
Related Links
www.cgtn.com
CGTN:China, EU aim to strengthen ties in the face of global challenges
BEIJING, Dec. 2, 2022 — China and the European Union (EU) on Thursday called for further developing their comprehensive strategic partnership as the world faces various challenges.
“The more unstable the international situation becomes and the more acute challenges the world faces, the greater global significance China-EU relations take on,” Chinese President Xi Jinping said to visiting President of the European Council Charles Michel.
“The EU is ready to become a reliable and predictable cooperation partner for China,” said Michel, who is the first leader of the EU institution to visit the country after the 20th National Congress of the Communist Party of China (CPC).
Keeping the right perception, properly managing differences
On promoting the development of China-EU relations, the Chinese president first stressed the importance of keeping the right perception.
There are no strategic differences or conflicts of fundamental significance between China and the EU, Xi said, adding that China does not seek dominance or hegemony, and the country has never tried to export its system and will never do it in future.
China supports the EU’s strategic autonomy and supports a united and prosperous Europe, he said.
Noting that it is only natural that the two sides have different views on some issues, Xi called on the EU to maintain communication and coordination in a constructive way.
Before Michel’s visit, Xi had in-person meetings with several leaders from EU countries, including French President Emmanuel Macron, on the sidelines of the 17th Group of 20 Summit in mid-November. German Chancellor Olaf Scholz also visited China in November.
During his talk with Scholz, Xi had underscored that China always regards Europe as a comprehensive strategic partner, supports the strategic autonomy of the EU and wishes Europe stability and prosperity.
Michel told Xi that the EU stands ready for an in-depth discussion with China on important issues concerning various aspects of EU-China relations “in the spirit of mutual respect and candor.”
The EU pursues strategic autonomy and stays committed to building its own capacity and pressing ahead with European integration, he stressed.
The EU upholds the one-China policy and respects China’s sovereignty and territorial integrity and will not interfere in China’s internal affairs, he said.
Promoting cooperation, strengthening coordination
The Chinese president called for joint efforts with the EU in strengthening macroeconomic policy coordination, seeking greater complementarity in market, capital and technology, and working together to nurture new growth drivers in digital economy, green development and environment protection, new energies, and artificial intelligence.
China welcomes the EU’s participation in the Belt and Road cooperation and the Global Development Initiative for greater synergy with the EU’s Global Gateway strategy, Xi said.
When meeting Michel and Ursula von der Leyen, president of the European Commission, via video in April, Xi had called for seeking greater synergy between their development strategies and exploring more complementarity between China’s new development philosophy and paradigm and the EU’s trade policy for open strategic autonomy.
Michel stressed strengthening communication to address energy crisis, climate change, public health and other global challenges, saying that the EU will work with China to take forward the process toward an EU-China investment agreement.
Despite the negative impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic, China and the EU have maintained vigorous economic cooperation — China overtook the U.S. to become the EU’s largest trading partner last year, with bilateral trade volume hitting a record high of $828.1 billion.
China and the EU are the second and the third largest economies in the world, with their share of global GDP standing at 18.5 percent and 17.8 percent, respectively, in 2021, according to the World Bank data.
The two sides also exchanged views on the Ukraine crisis.
Xi said a political settlement of the crisis best serves Europe’s interests and the common interests of all countries in Eurasia, stressing that China supports the EU in stepping up mediation efforts and playing a leading role in building a balanced, effective and sustainable security architecture in Europe.
China will remain on the side of peace and continue to play a constructive role in its own way, he said.
https://news.cgtn.com/news/2022-12-01/Xi-holds-talks-with-European-Council-President-Michel-1fpcvVrf30s/index.html
SOURCE CGTN
CONTACT: Jiang Simin, +86-188-2655-3286, cgtn@cgtn.com
Chase Joins UP Global in Celebrating Entrepreneurs by powering Startup Weeks
NEW YORK, – Chase today announced a partnership with Seattle non-profit UP Global to present Startup Week powered by Chase, a community-led celebration of entrepreneurs.
The national sponsorship grew out of Chase’s title role in Denver Startup Week, the largest free entrepreneur event in North America. Startup Week features a platform of locally-organized events, as well as Basecamp, launched by Chase and conceived by Denver organizers as the epicenter of Startup Week activities.
“Startup Week celebrates the entrepreneur and connects them to essential local support systems,” said Scott Geller, CEO of Chase Business Banking, which serves 2.3 million small businesses across the country. “We are thrilled to help expand this innovative, community-led program that informs and inspires everyone in the entrepreneurial ecosystem.”
Starting September 15 in Denver and continuing into spring 2015, the following cities will host a Startup Week, created by local community leaders with support from UP Global and Chase:
Columbus, Ohio – Spring 2015 Phoenix – Winter 2015
Dallas / Ft Worth – Spring 2015 Seattle – Fall 2014
Denver – Fall 2014 Tampa – Winter 2015
“There are very few organizations with the footprint and forward thinking Chase has,” said Marc Nager, Chief Executive Officer of UP Global, which hosts entrepreneur events in more than 500 cities around the world. “We believe entrepreneurs and the communities they live in are going to drive the growth in this country for future generations, and UP Global is proud to be working at the grassroots level with Chase to roll up our sleeves and support the hard-working entrepreneurs across America.”
About Chase:
Chase is the U.S. consumer and commercial banking business of JPMorgan Chase & Co. (NYSE: JPM), a leading global financial services firm with assets of $2.5 trillion and operations worldwide. Chase serves nearly half of America’s households with a broad range of financial services, including personal banking, small business lending, mortgages, credit cards, auto financing and investment advice. Customers can choose how and where they want to bank: 5,600 branches, 20,000 ATMs, online, mobile and by phone. Chase Commerce Solutions is the #1 credit and debit card payment processor in the United States. More information about Chase is available at www.chase.com, @Chase and @ChaseSmallBiz and on Chase Facebook. During Startup Weeks, follow #chasebasecamp for news and event information.
About UP Global:
UP Global, the umbrella organization for Startup Weekend, Startup Next, Startup Education, Startup Digest and now Startup Week, currently fosters entrepreneurship in 500 cities across the world, serving over 150,000 innovators. By 2016, the organization will support 1,000 communities through partnerships with local grassroots leaders and partnerships with organizations including Google for Entrepreneurs, the Case Foundation and Kauffman Foundation among others. For more information, visit www.up.co and follow @upglobal and @startupweek.
China strives to balance dynamic COVID-19 control and economic growth
BEIJING, June 13, 2022 — Under a people-centered development philosophy, China prioritizes people’s lives and health as the country is still pursuing a dynamic approach to ensure both epidemic control and social, economic development.
Beijing has continued to fine-tune its anti-COVID-19 approach, making it even more scientifically sound, precise and effective, so as to minimize the impact of the pandemic on economic and social development.
During President Xi Jinping’s latest inspection in southwest China’s Sichuan Province, he called for efforts in overcoming difficulties in economic development while stressing that the dynamic zero-COVID-19 approach must be unswervingly upheld.
President Xi, also general secretary of the Communist Party of China (CPC) Central Committee, started his inspection on Wednesday, and visited the cities of Meishan and Yibin.
Promoting green agricultural development
Promoting agricultural modernization was highlighted when Xi visited the village of Yongfeng. Relying on the advantages of the rice industry and technology, the village has built the largest pilot test base of new rice varieties in the province.
After learning about local efforts to advance high-standard farmland development, boost grain production and promote rural revitalization, Xi said efforts are needed to strengthen the application and training of modern agricultural science and technology and actively develop green, ecological and efficient agriculture.
“Chinese people have the confidence to keep the rice bowl firmly in our own hands,” he said, adding that it is important to ensure food security, particularly grain production.
Protecting ecological environment in Yangtze River basin
Protecting the ecological environment was another focus during Xi’s inspection tour.
Protecting the ecological environment of the Yangtze River basin is the prerequisite for promoting high-quality development of the Yangtze River Economic Belt, said Xi when he visited Sanjiangkou, where the Jinsha and Minjiang rivers converge into the Yangtze River.
The Yangtze River Economic Belt covers nine provinces and two municipalities, accounting for over 40 percent of the country’s population and economic aggregate.
China’s top leadership has called for efforts to turn the economic belt into the country’s focus for green development, the major artery for a smooth “dual circulation” of domestic and international markets, and the main force spearheading high-quality economic development.
Ensuring people’s normal life and production
During the inspection, Xi also called for measures to facilitate employment of college graduates, promote scientific and technological innovation in enterprises, and enhance the country’s capacity for independent innovation.
The president was deeply concerned about the rescue and treatment of the people injured in the magnitude-6.1 earthquake in Ya’an of Sichuan on June 1.
He urged local authorities to make appropriate arrangements for residents affected by the quake, ensure the supply of daily necessities and make plans for recovery and reconstruction.
Speaking of recent floods and geological disasters in some parts of China, he called for early contingency preparations to safeguard people’s lives and property. He also demanded swift rescue efforts after disasters to minimize casualties and loss of property.
https://news.cgtn.com/news/2022-06-09/Xi-Jinping-inspects-southwestern-Chinese-city-of-Yibin-1aIZLohONTG/index.html
SOURCE CGTN
CONTACT: Jiang Simin, +86-188-2655-3286, cgtn@cgtn.com
Christine Lagarde On G20: Step Up to Boost Inclusive Growth
As G20 leaders gather in Argentina, the global economy faces a critical juncture. We have had a good stretch of solid growth by historical standards, but now we are facing a period where significant risks are materializing and darker clouds are looming.
As the most recent economic data have been disappointing, we must not allow ourselves to be held back. Rather, we must be ambitious, including by implementing a multilayered set of reforms which could potentially add an additional 4 percent boost to the GDP of the G20 countries.
Success here depends on us acting swiftly—and acting together.
Signs of moderating growth
The IMF’s World Economic Outlook, published in October, forecast global growth of 3.7 percent for 2018 and 2019. These estimates were 0.2 percentage points below our July estimates—a downgrade due largely to rising external and financial pressures on emerging markets and a tangible increase in trade tensions.
Implementing a multilayered set of reforms could potentially add a 4 percent boost to the GDP of the G20 countries.
Recent data suggest that these headwinds could have slowed momentum even more than we had expected. For example, third-quarter growth has been surprisingly low in emerging market economies such as China, and in the euro area. A no-deal Brexit could further dent confidence.
Over the medium term, particularly in advanced economies, we see growth moderating because of adverse demographics and slow productivity. This includes the United States, once the recent fiscal stimulus ends.
In addition, in too many countries, excessive inequality is hurting many people—and it also risks undermining public support for reforms that would enhance productivity.
What can be done to address these challenges? Let me highlight three priorities.
First, strengthen our defenses
Policymakers can start by creating more fiscal room for maneuver, so that they have the resources needed to increase support to the economy should growth weaken significantly. This implies undertaking meaningful fiscal consolidation now—especially in high-debt countries such as Italy and in several emerging economies.
In terms of monetary policy, the ongoing process of normalization of interest rates in many advanced economies should continue to follow a gradual, well-communicated, and data-dependent path. This is not only in their own interest, but also helps to avoid unnecessary turbulence for others.
The good news is that monetary policy normalization indicates relatively strong growth in the advanced economies. In recent months, however, monetary tightening—combined with rising trade tensions—has heightened external pressures for some emerging economies. How can they respond?
Those with well-anchored inflation targets should rely on exchange rate flexibility to mitigate external pressures. Where these pressures threaten to be disruptive, capital flow management measures could also play a role as part of a broader policy package.
Second, teamwork is the winning tactic
We know that rising trade barriers are ultimately self-defeating for all involved. Thus, it is imperative that all countries steer clear of new trade barriers, while reversing recent tariffs.
We have a unique opportunity to improve the global trade system. IMF research suggests that liberalizing trade in services could add about ½ percent, or $350 billion, to G20 GDP in the long run.
At the same time, concerted actions by individual countries can strengthen their own economies, reduce global imbalances, and boost the global economy. Some examples: Germany could use its fiscal space to strengthen its growth potential, by increasing investment and incentivizing labor force participation; the US could help by lowering its fiscal deficit; and China could help by pressing ahead with its economic rebalancing.
After a decade of relatively easy financial conditions, many countries also need to address record levels of debt—altogether $182 trillion globally by IMF estimates. In addition, increasing the transparency of the scale and terms of borrowing, especially in low-income countries, is an imperative.
More broadly, financial sector risks require action, including by avoiding a rollback of post-crisis advances in financial sector regulation.
Third, pick up the pace
The theme of Argentina’s G20 presidency—Building Consensus for Fair and Sustainable Development—is a critical priority. Yet at present, progress is too slow. How can it be accelerated?
Most G20 advanced economies could benefit from relaxing product market restrictions to spur innovation and lower prices. Easing access to professional services would be especially important, for example in Japan and many euro area countries. Increasing support for research would be vital in Canada, Germany, and the United Kingdom, among others.
Most G20 emerging market countries, too, would benefit from product and labor market reforms. Economies such as Brazil, China, India, and Russia would gain by moving away from distortionary taxes.
And virtually everywhere, raising women’s participation in the workforce would not only boost growth, but also help to make societies fairer and more inclusive.
These are just some of the measures which, if jointly implemented, could by our calculations increase G20 GDP by 4 percent.
Conclusion
During the ten years since the first G20 Leaders’ Summit, the G20’s efforts have been crucial in helping the global economy recover.
Yet darker clouds are now returning to the horizon.
Tackling this challenge means implementing policies that make sense both nationally and internationally. It also means strengthening the global financial safety net, with a well-equipped and well-resourced IMF at its center, to ensure that we can play our role in helping countries prevent and deal with future crises.
As the G20 meets in Buenos Aires, let us act swiftly and act together
Christine Lagarde: Doing It All—Women Boost the Bottom Line for Home, Firm, and Country
International Women’s Day—March 8—is one of my favorite days. It is a time to celebrate the impressive progress women at all levels of the career ladder have made in recent decades. More women in the labor force, and in more senior positions is good news for women, for their companies, and for their countries’ economies.
A new IMF staff study finds that in Europe, national policies, even taking account of personal preferences, can boost women’s participation in the workforce and enhance their chances for advancement.
The research, which looked at 2 million firms in 34 countries in Europe, also finds that the more women in senior managerial positions and in corporate boards, the more profitable firms are. One more woman in senior management or on a corporate board is associated with 8–13 basis points higher return on assets. High corporate profitability could support investment and productivity—another channel through which more women in the workforce can help mitigate Europe’s potential growth slowdown.
The results are clear: increasing female participation improves the bottom line.
More working women
In regions like Europe, where populations are aging, the working-age population is being squeezed, and productivity growth is declining, there is more incentive than ever to level the playing field for women to work full-time and climb higher up the ladder.
Over the past three decades, millions of women in Europe have joined the labor force. Countries such as Spain and Ireland have seen the share of women who work outside the household double since the 1980s—from under 40 percent to more than 80 percent in the case of Spain. In several Nordic and Eastern European countries, women today are almost as likely to work for pay as men are. At the same time, legal requirements for gender diversity in corporate boardrooms have helped boost women’s representation in top decision-making positions—women now hold almost a quarter of senior management or board positions in the corporate sector.
Still, there is scope to bring more women into the labor force. In almost all European countries, women are significantly less active in the labor market than men. Even those women who are employed often work less than full-time. Although women today make up almost half the European labor force aged 25-54, their representation on the top rungs of the corporate ladder is significantly below that of men.
Policies matter
Clearly, women’s personal preferences and attitudes toward working are important determinants of their decision to join the labor force, as our staff’s research confirms. This is especially true in Europe, where women today face no legal restrictions to employment, are just as educated as men, and have fewer children—and social norms have changed.
But the study finds that policies also have an important influence on women’s employment decisions, even after accounting for individual characteristics, choices, and preferences about working. Removing tax disincentives for the second earner in a family, providing sufficient childcare services, and allowing parental leave can broaden the opportunity for women to work as much as they want.
The whole economy benefits
It is not only women who may benefit economically from working. Bringing more women into the labor force benefits a country’s economy in two important ways:
First, more women in the labor force will expand labor supply. If women choose to participate in the labor market as much as men do, Europe’s workforce could increase by 6 percent. If they also choose to work as many hours as men, the workforce could grow by as much as 15 percent.
Second, the prevalence of full-time female employment is a strong predictor of the share of senior corporate positions held by women. And more women in senior managerial positions and in corporate boardrooms, the IMF staff study confirms, is associated with stronger firm financial performance, which would help support corporate investment and productivity, further mitigating the slowdown in potential growth in Europe.
The positive relationship between more women high on the corporate ladder and firms’ profitability is more pronounced, the study finds, in sectors where women form a larger share of the labor force—highlighting the importance of bridging gender gaps between senior executives and the general workforce. This positive association is also more evident in knowledge-intensive services and high-tech manufacturing sectors—where diversity, including gender diversity, can help meet the high demand for creativity and innovative capacity.
As we celebrate women’s achievements in Europe’s labor force, we must also acknowledge that the journey is still in train. The potential benefits can be large. We must not miss this opportunity.
Rate this:
Christine Lagarde: Maintaining the Positive Momentum of the Global Economy
Baden-Baden, the German spa town built on ancient thermal springs, is a fitting venue to discuss the health of the global economy during this week’s meeting of the Group of Twenty finance ministers and central bank governors.
Policymakers will likely share a sense of growing optimism, because the recent strengthening of activity suggests that the world economy may finally snap out of its multi-year convalescence.
Economic prescriptions have played an important part in the recovery, and will continue to do so for some time. Maintaining the positive growth momentum continues to require supportive macroeconomic policies. And the participants at the meetings will need to take action, individually and collectively, to make growth more inclusive and resilient.
Have we reached a turning point? The short answer is yes—at least for now. Growth outturns in the second half of last year were generally solid. Manufacturing and confidence indicators are picking up, and there are signs that global trade volumes are rising along with them.
That is why the International Monetary Fund in January projected a pickup in global growth this year and next—to 3.4 and 3.6 percent—compared to 3.1 percent in 2016.
The improved outlook partly reflects a projected pickup in advanced economy activity—helped by expectations of more expansionary US fiscal policy.
We are especially encouraged by stronger-than-expected economic activity in the euro area, the United Kingdom, and Japan.
Emerging and developing economies, led by China and India, continue to contribute more than three-quarters of total global GDP growth in 2017. Adding to this is a projected normalization of conditions in Brazil and Russia, which have been facing deep recessions.
So, yes, the global economy is moving into a better position. But it would be a mistake to assume that it will automatically return to rude health.
In fact, there has rarely been a period when policy choices have mattered more for what comes next, especially since there are still considerable risks to the outlook.
Maintaining the momentum
In a number of advanced economies, for example, demand is still weak and inflation is not durably back to target. This calls for continued monetary support and a greater emphasis on fiscal policy in countries that have room in their budgets. These steps should be combined with structural reforms to lift productivity and boost long-term growth.
Lack of demand is less of a problem in the United States, where growth would benefit more from efforts to expand supply, such as investment to revamp infrastructure, efficiency-enhancing corporate tax reform, and improvements in education.
Stronger US growth would certainly be good for the global economy, but a changing US policy mix may also create knock-on effects, or spillovers. For example, depending on the nature of the US policy mix, a stronger dollar and rising US interest rates could lead to a sharper-than-expected tightening in global financial conditions. This could potentially put stress on some emerging economies and low-income countries.
Sustaining the current growth momentum would also be helped by a successful transition toward slower but more balanced growth in China, and by further policy actions on the part of commodity exporters as they continue to adjust to lower commodity prices.
Above all, we should collectively avoid self-inflicted injuries. This requires steering clear of policies that would seriously undermine trade, migration, capital flows, and the sharing of technologies across borders. Such measures would hurt the productivity, incomes, and living standards of all citizens.
Global economic integration
Trade and technological innovation have allowed countries to grow the economic pie and improve living standards, while lifting hundreds of millions of people out of poverty. Yet more could be done to mitigate the unwelcome side-effects seen in some places—including a rise in income inequality, job losses in shrinking sectors, and protracted economic and social problems across structurally weaker regions.
How can this be done? This is not an easy task, but it can start with boosting growth, and sharing the benefits more widely.
A critical first step is to get serious about inclusive growth. We have yet to fully understand the complex web of economic challenges faced by different cultures, regions, and demographic groups. We do know, however, that higher-skilled workers are much more likely to benefit from innovation and economic openness.
This calls for greater efforts to equip lower-skilled workers with the tools they need to seek and find better-paying jobs, such as targeted education programs, skills training, and employment incentives.
These active labor market policies can help ease workers’ transitions to new employment. Their funding varies significantly across countries. Denmark, for instance, spends 1.9 percent of GDP on such policies, compared with 0.1 percent in the United States.
Of course, spending more money is not enough; it must be spent more efficiently. Some initiatives have proven to be cost-effective—such as well-designed assistance for job search and job matching.
More broadly, all countries need to actively promote life-long learning to prepare citizens for technological changes. Singapore, for example, offers unconditional grants to all adults for training throughout their working lives.
Another priority for inclusive growth is the retooling of income policies and tax systems.
In-work tax incentives and higher minimum wages can be helpful in some countries. So, too, can changes to tax and benefit systems, including more progressive income taxation.
IMF research shows that avoiding excessive inequality will help, not hinder, growth. We also know that policy tradeoffs can be minimized: for example, most countries would benefit from reforms that make their tax systems more equitable and more efficient.
In short, we have the capacity—and responsibility—to grow the economic pie, which will facilitate sharing it more equitably.
Effective international cooperation will maximize the benefits of national policies if we:
step up efforts to address global external imbalances and complete reforms to strengthen financial systems;
protect and reinforce trade as an engine of broadly shared growth; and
work together to resolve some of the most pressing issues of our time, from global security and health issues to coping with natural disasters and climate change.
G20 policymakers can move the needle on all these issues. After years of being stuck in a weak recovery, the world economy needs to move on, shape up, and generate greater prosperity for all. What better place than Baden-Baden for leaders to recommit themselves to achieving robust global economic health?
Christine Lagarde: The Role of Business in Supporting a More Inclusive Global Economy
Good afternoon. Thank you, John Micklethwait, for your kind introduction. I am pleased to be at the Inclusive Capitalism Conference once again—and in such illustrious company.
Henry Ford once said: “Coming together is the beginning. Keeping together is progress. Working together is success.” Likewise, the efforts of Lady Lynn de Rothschild and the coalition—in coming together, keeping together, and working together—are driving forward the critically important agenda of inclusive capitalism. I pay tribute to your vision and resilience.
This past weekend the IMF had its Annual Meetings, with our 189 member countries, and the state of the global economy took center stage. While the outlook remains subdued, the mood was resolute.
We are stuck in a protracted period of low growth: 2016 marks the fifth consecutive year with global GDP growth below its long-term average. Too many people feel left behind, questioning whether the economy is working for them. In some of the advanced economies in particular, a populist sentiment is growing that threatens to shift the needle against economic openness.
The fact is that growth has been too low, for too long, and is reaching too few. So we face a defining moment—and we must take decisive action to make globalization work—for everyone.
This will require pulling on all policy levers—monetary, fiscal, structural—to support demand, boost productivity, and reinvigorate trade. Investing in social safety nets, education, and retraining those affected by technological change are also key. Policymakers face a major challenge—and they cannot do it alone.
We need every creator of jobs and growth to step up. I am talking, of course, about business.
Business, after all, benefits from a more inclusive society because inclusion supports more durable growth and broader prosperity. I also believe that business is uniquely placed to support inclusion.
Some people are skeptical of the term “inclusive capitalism”—some see it as an oxymoron, others as PR to help companies seduce their consumers into buying their products and boosting their profits. Others call it a dangerous detour from free-market principles.
To respond, we must make the case that inclusion and durable growth are two sides of the same coin—we cannot have one without the other.
In that context, I will address three key roles of business: as leaders, as employers, and as innovators.
1. Leaders
First, how can business leaders support inclusion?
Undoubtedly, business has a long history of leadership on inclusion. Think, for example, of the philanthropic giving of pioneers like Andrew Carnegie and John D. Rockefeller. Think also of the architecture of the industrial towns developed in 19st century Europe, they demonstrated the spirit of inclusion.
In more recent years, however, we have seen a growing sense of public anger against “elites,” with the so-called “one percent” seen as prospering at the expense of the “99 percent.” Particularly since the global financial crisis, many corporate heads have faced accusations of taking unnecessary risks, behaving unethically, and failing to share the fruits of enterprise.
The combined effect has been an erosion of public trust in big business. A recent Gallup poll finds that trust in large U.S. companies has been stuck at a lowly 18 percent for a decade. [1] Trust in banks has fallen from 49 percent ten years ago to 27 percent today. [2]
It is often said that trust “arrives on foot, but leaves on horseback.” And yet, trust is set to become even more critical in the years ahead. A recent Deloitte survey revealed that over half of millennials will not work for an organization if they are concerned about its standard of conduct. [3]
When I addressed the inaugural conference on inclusive capitalism two years ago in London, I spoke—among other things—about the need to improve corporate behavior and culture. One of my main points was that leaders must be as serious about values as they are about valuation, and just as passionate about culture as they are about capital.
Indeed, while strong regulation is essential, leaders themselves must also step up in the effort to tackle unethical behavior. Partly it is a matter of responsibility—after all, the buck stops at the top. It is also about effectiveness. Research shows, for example, that a bank is more likely to have an ethical culture if its executive team sets a good example with their own behavior. [4]
Responsible corporate compensation is an essential element. An IMF study shows that while the level of executive compensation is not consistently related to banks’ risk-taking, the structure of compensation is. [5] By linking pay with long-term rather than short-term performance, risk can be reduced.
Beside reducing risk-taking through more responsible compensation, another key building-block in rebuilding trust is to stamp out tax evasion. Even a casual observer of the Panama and Bahamas Papers revelation can see that efforts to avoid tax not only erode trust, but also short-change society.
There are no reliable estimates of the amount of tax revenue foregone through accounts detailed in the Panama Papers—both legally through sophisticated planning and illegally through tax evasion. These revelations, however, clearly show that there is a great deal of both. The resulting revenue losses represent a missed opportunity for society—and for pro-growth investments like education, health, and the environment. An efficient and fair tax system is an essential part of the circle of reinvestment.
More broadly, in many countries the private sector can play an integral role in tackling corruption in the public sector. After all, for every bribe received by a public official, there is a bribe paid by the private sector. By taking themselves out of this equation, businesses can help to stem corrupt behavior by public officials—both at home and abroad. And tackling corruption is critical in the ongoing fight against poverty and excessive inequality that is being fought in so many parts of the world.
At the other end of the spectrum, those who wish to not only avoid wrongdoing but contribute to positive social change are attracted to the philanthropy that I mentioned earlier. Inevitably, this is partly about PR. Undoubtedly, it is also about responsibility—to give back and share the prosperity with those who have not been as fortunate.
At the leadership level, the Gates Foundation’s Giving Pledge is an excellent example of this—since 2010 more than $365 billion has been pledged by 139 high net-worth individuals in areas from information technology to education to healthcare. Many companies also quite rightly support their employees in making charitable donations—thereby helping those in need, restoring trust, and investing in their staff.
This brings me to a second key role for business in promoting inclusion—as employers.
2. Employers
The potential for enterprise to create—and sustain—employment is especially critical at a time when so many people find themselves out of work. Despite the improving jobs situation in some advanced economies, the ILO estimates total global unemployment at 199.4 million this year—rising to above 200 million next year.[6]
The hardship is widespread—cutting across regions, sectors, genders, and ages. Let me highlight two specific groups: women and young people.
The sad truth is that, compared to their male counterparts, women are both underemployed and underpaid. And yet, research by the IMF and others has uncovered multiple macroeconomic benefits of empowering women.
Narrowing the gender gap supports economic growth and diversification. It is associated with lower income inequality. And it enhances the bottom line: an IMF staff study found that adding one more woman on a corporate board is associated with between 8 and 13 basis points higher return on assets. [7]
At the IMF, we are incorporating policy advice on gender issues into discussions with many country authorities—and in some of our recent programs, such as with Egypt. What would I say to you, as advocates and employers?
As advocates, I would like your support for smart public policies. In emerging and developing countries, these include investing in girls’ education, promoting broader access to finance, and strengthening infrastructure. In advanced economies, they include removing secondary earner tax disincentives, providing affordable high-quality childcare, and funding paid parental leave. Removing legal obstacles to women’s economic participation—which exist in an astonishing 90 percent of countries—is also key.
The good news is that, as employers, you have significant scope to empower women. A supportive attitude to flexible working and parental leave can help more women combine job and family. So can efforts to facilitate childcare arrangements. Mentoring and coaching by female role models can help women perform and rise up.
In addition to women, we should also focus on youth. Tragically, the number of unemployed young people is projected to rise by 500,000 worldwide this year—to a total of 71 million. [8]
As you know, addressing the scourge of high youth unemployment requires a range of efforts. I would like to highlight just one: skills development.
An essential component of helping young people to prosper is ensuring they have the right skills for our globalized and rapidly changing world economy. Too often, however, there seems to be a disconnect between the skills young people have and what they need.
The World Economic Forum, for instance, has found that, on average, just two-thirds of young people’s human capital potential is utilized. [9] Another report, by McKinsey, suggests that young people and employers are on the same page about this: a majority of both groups doubt that new graduates are ready for entry-level jobs.[10] By collaborating more with education providers, the report suggests, employers can make a big difference.
As part of the IMF’s ongoing surveillance and analytical work with our members, the IMF touches on these kinds of issues. Here in the U.S., for example, the Fund has been calling for more vocational education—including by expanding partnerships between industry and higher education institutions. [11] We have also called for an increase in the federal minimum wage—another key element in supporting inclusion.
In unleashing the potential of all those who feel excluded, one of the keys is to better equip people to thrive in the digital age, helping them adapt to a changing world of work. To use an ancient Chinese proverb, “When the winds of change blow, some people build walls and others build windmills.”
3. Innovators
Which leads to my third key role for business: in promoting inclusion through technological innovation.
The relationship between technology and inclusion is a matter of vigorous debate. Some studies suggest that technological innovation can exacerbate inequality—with robots reducing people’s pay, or even taking their jobs.
These concerns are not new—as the 19th Century Revolt of the Canuts in France and the Luddite resistance in Britain to the Industrial Revolution — attest. Nowadays, people who worry about new technologies are often dismissed as living in the past. That would not be fair; such concerns must be addressed seriously—for example, by investing in skills and social safety nets.
We must also, however, appreciate the positive side of technological innovation. If harnessed, it has the potential to support inclusion, creating opportunities for people to participate more in the economy and reap more of the rewards. Think, for example, of the so-called “app development” or “gig-economy.” While by no means perfect, it is removing many people’s reliance on traditional business structures, creating new opportunities for millions of individuals to realize their potential.
For me—and the IMF—one form of technological change that holds great promise relates to financial inclusion. Expanding access to financial services can undoubtedly support economic development. This is no platitude. It is based on empirical evidence—including the IMF’s unique global database on financial inclusion, the Financial Access Survey. [12]
More than 60 countries—from India to Peru—have adopted strategic plans to expand financial inclusion. But while governments can create an enabling environment—including consumer protection laws and financial education—it is the private sector that ultimately must harness the technology.
One innovation with dramatic potential is digital finance. Across much of sub-Saharan Africa, for example, it is much easier to bank on a phone than in the nearest town. In 15 countries of the region, the number of mobile money accounts exceeds the number of depositors in commercial banks. Kenya’s mobile payment service, M-PESA, is a well-known standard-bearer for mobile banking. Operated through a private telecommunications provider, it offers nationwide coverage independent of traditional banks. And one added bonus: it helps expand women’s access to finance.
Expanding financial services also requires tailoring products to consumers’ circumstances. In Mexico, for instance, a large consumer retailer opened a bank in 2012—specifically aimed at serving the unbanked. By analyzing the parent company’s data, they were able to require less documentation to open an account than banks typically needed. Thousands of people opened bank accounts; research indicates that employment and income levels also increased.
In Chile, too, supermarket chains are gradually building credit histories for their unbanked customers. They start with small amounts of store credit, then expand it based on repayments—incrementally widening access to credit.
These are just a few examples of financial empowerment in action. In this way, and others, innovation and inclusion can go hand-in-hand.
Conclusion
To conclude, as we seek to pull the world economy out of what I have called “the new mediocre,” efforts to lift growth and support inclusion are critical, complementary priorities. Alongside stronger policies, the role of business is key. Enterprise not only benefits from greater inclusion, but is uniquely placed to support it—leading, employing, innovating.
Taking the next step on inclusive capitalism calls for decisive measures: not just promises but action. The ball is in your court.
Let me conclude with the words of President Woodrow Wilson:
“Y ou are not here merely to make a living. You are here in order to enable the world to live more amply, with greater vision, with a finer spirit of hope and achievement. You are here to enrich the world, and you impoverish yourself if you forget the errand.”
Thank you.
CKGSB and UNESCO Partner on Cultivating Economic Disruption in Africa
PARIS, — Cheung Kong Graduate School of Business (CKGSB) and the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO)—represented by CKGSB Founding Dean and Professor of China Business and Globalization Xiang Bing and the Assistant Director-General of the UNESCO Africa Bureau Firmin Edouard Matoko—signed a memorandum of understanding on 3 December 2021. The partnership includes a program and forum aimed at empowering African government officials, young entrepreneurs and women leaders to foster economic disruption, social mobility and gender equality, and generate more unicorn companies with a focus on social innovation in Africa.
This partnership comes at the 65th anniversary of the opening of diplomatic relations between China and major African nations, with which trade reached $185.2 billion in 2021. As the second largest continent with a similar population size to China and rich ecological and mineral resources, Africa offers immense market potential.
China is noted for its substantive and continued economic disruption, defined by newly emerged large-scale companies and newly minted billionaires in the past four decades. Among the 217 Chinese unicorn companies generated between 2017 and 2021, according to CB Insights, 39 (18%) are founded or run by CKGSB alumni. “The idea of economic disruption is central to economic development and social harmony,” said Xiang, “as it is indispensable in generating upward social mobility.”
CKGSB has been working with key players since 2015 – Tencent, Baidu, JD.com, Microsoft, Softbank, Bytedance and Alibaba – to establish an ecosystem in China that focuses on developing unicorn companies. “Building on our success in China, we have extended this initiative to European and Middle Eastern markets (in partnership with Churchill College, Cambridge University),” explained Xiang, “and we are keen to expand to African markets.”
CKGSB and UNESCO’s program, tailored to the needs of African businesses, aims to “foster upward market disruptions through STEM for African entrepreneurs.” It seeks to cultivate leaders who promote social innovation, advance upward social mobility, and bring sustainable long-term benefits to Africa. The parties will share resources to help generate STEM talents, provide career development for the youth, and bring more opportunities.
The program also emphasizes the advancement of women leaders in Africa. It will launch the Women in Leadership Forum (African Edition) as a platform for establishing connections, empowerment and capacity building among African women leaders.
SOURCE Cheung Kong Graduate School of Business (CKGSB)
CONTACT: Jessica Wang, +44-7878770856
Collaboration between the City of Chicago and Neighbouring Counties Leads to Metro Chicago Exports Launch
Cook County Board President Toni Preckwinkle, Chicago Mayor Rahm Emanuel, DuPage County Chairman Dan Cronin and the Chief Executives of Kane, Kendall, Lake, McHenry and Will Counties joined together with JPMorgan Chase, the Brookings Institution, founders of the Global Cities Initiative, and World Business Chicago today to launch Metro Chicago Exports. Metro Chicago Exports is an unprecedented regional collaboration that will help small and medium enterprises throughout the region capture export opportunities and strengthen the Chicagoland area’s network of regional service providers.
“Metropolitan areas like northeastern Illinois are the engines for economic growth in this country. And regions that work together perform better. Last year, I convened the economic development leadership from seven counties and the City of Chicago to explore opportunities for collaboration to further the region’s economic growth. I’m pleased to see that one of the first results of this group is the creation of Metro Chicago Exports,” Cook County Board President Toni Preckwinkle said. “By increasing the export capacity of small and medium-sized businesses, we will enhance global competitiveness, foster innovative activity within firms, and positively impact the economy of our region.”
“Small businesses continue to be drivers of growth for Chicago’s economy. By helping businesses on the threshold of exporting to cross that divide further increases economic opportunity and job growth,” said Chicago Mayor Rahm Emanuel. “Only one in twenty Chicago small businesses currently export their goods overseas, but by bringing together assets that exist throughout the Chicagoland area – access to ports, promotion services, transportation and more — Metro Chicago Exports can help these businesses to increase their global competitiveness, support local job growth and make Chicago a national leader in exports.”
According to data from a forthcoming Brookings Metropolitan Policy Program report, in 2013, the Chicago region was the nation’s fourth largest exporter at $65 billion, but ranked only 28th in the share of its economy that comes from exports. Despite high exporting volume, only six percent of the region’s small and mid-size firms currently export and, on average less than half of those firms export to more than one market.
Metro Chicago Exports will assist manufacturers and business service companies to reach new international markets. The pilot program will focus on three initial strategies:
Build the pipeline of export ready firms: use a data-driven approach to proactively target firms in high demand industries with specific opportunities in international markets; create clear export roadmaps for groups of firms and scale the reach of existing services
Strengthen the export ecosystem: serve as a concierge for firms and assist navigation through the network of regional services; develop opportunities for peer learning and mentorship to leverage the expertise of current exporters
Reduce the initial business costs to reach new markets: expand resources for firms to become market ready and reduce the hurdles to exporting faced by small firms, such as specialized market research, translation, sales missions, etc.
According to one estimate, there are up to 2,500 manufacturers in the Chicago region on the threshold of exporting that would be eligible to utilize the services of Metro Chicago Exports.
Metro Chicago Exports builds on the Global Cities Initiative, a joint project of the Brookings Institution and JPMorgan Chase, that aims to catalyze a shift in economic development priorities and practices resulting in more globally connected metropolitan areas and more sustainable economic growth. JPMorgan Chase has pledged an additional $500,000 to launch Metro Chicago Exports.
“The global marketplace is more complex, more challenging, and more receptive than ever,” said Melissa Bean, Chairman of the Midwest, JPMorgan Chase. “It’s critical that local governments and businesses work in partnership to build capacity to compete and succeed in today’s global environment.”
“This exports program is a powerful demonstration of Chicago’s leadership in a new form of economic development. Rather than shift jobs around a region, this multi-jurisdictional collaboration is growing jobs and opportunities by helping existing businesses expand through tapping demand abroad,” said Amy Liu, co-director of the Brookings Metropolitan Policy Program and co-director of the Global Cities Initiative. “With the global marketplace more dynamic than ever, Chicago is right to act regionally and globally to ensure businesses and workers continue to prosper.”
Metro Chicago Exports is the product of a working group convened by Cook County Board President Toni Preckwinkle in December 2013 and comprised of leadership from Cook, DuPage, Kane, Kendall, Lake, McHenry and Will Counties, and the City of Chicago. The group agreed to pursue outcome-based initiatives to grow the regional economy and build trust between regional partners while targeting specific industries.
“We welcome this initiative as a truly regional enterprise. As leaders in the collar counties, we know our small business owners wear many hats. They are Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, they manage employees, and market their goods and services. While they may want to move into international exporting, they may not know where to begin,” said Dan Cronin, DuPage County Board Chairman. “Metro Chicago Exports provides the expertise and opens that door for our collar county businesses. We believe the resulting market opportunities will grow jobs in our communities and create a more vibrant regional economy benefitting us all.”
Over the next six months, Metro Chicago Exports will focus its efforts on building organizational infrastructure, including hiring a managing director and forming an advisory council, as well as identifying firms to participate in the pilot program. Offices will be located in the City of Chicago and DuPage County.
For more information on Metro Chicago Exports, visit metrochicagoexports.com
Additional Comments on Metro Chicago Exports
“The regional export initiative clearly shows that the seven metro-area counties and the city of Chicago are serious about helping local entrepreneurs tap into growing international markets. Our local businesses create jobs, and expanding exports regionally accelerates local job creation and career opportunities for existing workers and for young people entering the workforce.”
– Chris Lauzen, Chairman, Kane County Board
“The creation of Metro Chicago Exports was an unparalleled regional collaboration to lend support to small and midsized businesses in the region. By working with existing exporting and international trade service providers, a tremendous amount of opportunity will be opened up for small and midsized companies to access foreign markets and grow their business.”
– John Shaw, Chairman, Kendall County Board
“Through this partnership, we can work together to encourage industry growth, as opposed to competing against each other for existing jobs, which is a zero sum game for the region. With 11 Fortune 500 corporate headquarters located in Lake County, we’ve benefited from the expanded global economy, and this pilot program offers the opportunity to assist more midsize companies expand their market place resulting in more jobs throughout the region.”
– Aaron Lawlor, Chairman, Lake County Board
“McHenry County is excited to collaborate on this unprecedented program to increase exports from the region. As all counties and Chicago look toward the future, working together to strengthen the region is in all our best interests. Our success should not be measured individually, but by the economic impact generated in our region and countries around the world.”
– Tina R. Hill, Chairwoman, McHenry County Board
“Helping our existing businesses export their products and services through the Metro Chicago Exports initiative is well timed. New global markets continue to open and the successful business of tomorrow is beginning to export today.”
– Larry Walsh, Executive, Will County Board
“We must recognize that the global economy has changed the formula for success. Cities and regions need to think and act in new ways to help our businesses succeed and grow jobs. Metro Chicago Exports is a great example of the way a region can collaborate to support businesses and help win in the global economy.”
– Richard M. Daley, Former Mayor, City of Chicago & Chairman, Global Cities Initiative
“A key component of Mayor Emanuel’s Plan for Economic Growth and Jobs, which WBC is currently implementing, is to expand the region’s strong export base to meet the demands of opportunities that cut across economic sectors. Companies that export effectively experience higher revenue growth and are more resilient to economic downturns. Through Metro Chicago Exports, we are coming together as a region to assist these companies, while enhancing Chicago’s global position.”
– Jeff Malehorn, President & CEO, World Business Chicago
Commerce Department Launches the New Center for Faith-Based and Neighborhood Partnerships
The U.S. Department of Commerce announced today the re-launch of its Center for Faith-based and Neighborhood Partnerships, one of 13 federal agency offices under the White House Office of Faith-Based and Neighborhood Partnerships. Housed within the Office of the Secretary, the Center serves to connect community- and faith-based organizations to Commerce resources and programs, engage a diverse array of stakeholders in the work of the agency, and promote economic development and job creation through local partnerships.
“I am excited to announce the new strategic direction of Commerce’s Center for Faith-based and Neighborhood Partnerships. The Center plays an important role in connecting Commerce to local communities and ensuring the Department’s ‘Open for Business Agenda’ expands opportunity for all Americans,” said U.S. Commerce Secretary Penny Pritzker. “By linking community leaders and organizations with critical economic development programs, technical assistance and other resources, the Department of Commerce is working to achieve its mission of promoting job creation, economic growth, sustainable development and improved standards of living for all Americans by working in partnership with businesses, universities, communities and our nation’s workers.”
In direct alignment with the Department’s “Open for Business Agenda,” the Center has created Commerce’s first-ever “Community Development Resource Toolkit,” which highlights how community-based organizations can utilize Commerce Department programs to promote local-level economic development. The Center has also revamped its website and will begin a “Commerce in the Community” blog series highlighting the many ways in which local business, nonprofit and religious leaders are partnering with Commerce to make a positive impact at the local level. Additionally, the Center will begin a series of place-based convenings this summer, focused on connecting communities with Commerce Department programs and resources, while also promoting local partnerships around skills and workforce development.
“Commerce’s Center for Faith-based and Neighborhood Partnerships plays an important role in our community development efforts by helping businesses and nonprofits work together to grow the economy and create jobs,” said Melissa Rogers, Executive Director of the White House Office of Faith-based and Neighborhood Partnerships. “We are looking forward to collaborating with our colleagues at Commerce to build ladders of opportunity for all Americans.”
On March 30, 2014, the Center co-hosted Business Sunday – its first event under Secretary Pritkzer – at 19th Street Baptist Church in Washington, DC. A collaboration between the Minority Business Development Agency and the Small Business Administration, Business Sunday is focused on providing current and aspiring business leaders from congregations and communities around the country with the federal resources they need to start and grow their companies. As a reflection of the President’s commitment to job creation and economic opportunity for all Americans, Business Sunday connects people to valuable technical assistance, grant information and other resources from the Minority Business Development Agency, BusinessUSA and the Small Business Administration.
The Center for Faith-based and Neighborhood Partnerships is led by Director Josh Dickson. Originally from Upstate New York, Josh is a graduate of the Harvard Kennedy School and a long-time community organizer who’s been involved in numerous initiatives focused on engaging faith-based and neighborhood organizations in community development. In his role as Director, Josh will oversee faith-based and community partnership projects across all Commerce bureaus as well as within the Office of the Secretary.
This news is courtesy of www.doc.gov
Commerce Department Seeks Candidates for Digital Economy Board of Advisors
U.S. Commerce Deputy Secretary Bruce Andrews today announced the Department is seeking candidates to serve on a new Digital Economy Board of Advisors, which Commerce is establishing to give government a mechanism to obtain advice from leaders in industry and civil society. The board will provide recommendations on ways to ensure that the Internet continues to thrive as an engine of growth, innovation, and free expression.
“Promoting the digital economy is a top priority for the Department of Commerce,” Deputy Secretary Andrews said. “We highly value the input of the private sector as we develop policies to promote digital innovation and remove barriers to global competitiveness. Our new Digital Economy Board of Advisors will provide the Department with an important tool to discuss with and learn from these leaders about ways to promote this vital sector of our economy.”
Commerce is seeking candidates representing a broad cross-section of commercial, civil society, and academic sectors that make up the digital economy. The board will consist of 15-20 members and will be appointed by Secretary of Commerce Penny Pritzker to serve two-year terms.
The new advisory board will help the Secretary to develop the Department’s Digital Economy Agenda, which aims to promote a free and open Internet, trust online, innovation, and Internet access for all Americans. The board’s responsibilities will include analyzing challenges to the free flow of information on the Internet, promoting the development of promising new digital technologies, and examining policies that impact the digital economy on topics such as broadband, cybersecurity and privacy.
Those who are interested in serving on the board can nominate themselves or can be nominated by others. Applicants should submit nominations electronically by Wednesday, December 23, 2015, using the online nomination form located at https://www.ntia.doc.gov/digital-economy-board-advisors-nomination-form.
Commission Takes Steps To Modernise EU’s Standardisation Policy
Brussels, The European Commission presents its vision on how European standard setting should evolve in the light of technological developments, political priorities and global trends.
It also announces next steps on the Joint Initiative on Standardisation (JIS), which aims to reinforce the partnership between the European institutions and the standardisation community.
From the A4 paper size to GSM technology, standards reduce costs, promote innovation, ensure interoperability between different devices and services, and help companies to access markets. Largely voluntary and industry-driven, European standards need to keep pace with the changing economy, the increasing importance of services, and the digital revolution. Today the European Commission has adopted a Communication, announced in the Single Market Strategy, to ensure that Europe remains a global hub for standardisation.
Jyrki Katainen, Vice-President for Jobs, Growth, Investment and Competitiveness, said: “If we want the European market to have the first-mover advantage, we need to speed up and better prioritise standard setting across the board. With today’s standardisation package, we are helping raise competitiveness, power innovation and create a predictable and stable investment framework in the EU.”
Elżbieta Bieńkowska, Commissioner for Internal Market, Industry, Entrepreneurship and SMEs, added: “The Joint Initiative on Standardisation brings together public and private organisations in a collaborative, transparent and agile dialogue process to ensure the timely development of state-of-the-art standards in support of fast changing market needs and public policies.”
Often seen as merely technical issue, standards are important economic drivers. Today’s Communication presents a vision for a single and coherent EU standardisation policy which features higher on the political agenda and where the priorities are regularly discussed with the European Parliament and the Member States.
Today’s package includes a Commission decision providing the framework for the Joint Initiative on Standardisation (JIS), which will be formally launched by all partners on 13 June in Amsterdam under the Dutch Presidency of the EU. The JIS will bring together European and national standardisation organisations and bodies, industry, SMEs, consumer associations, trade unions, environmental organisations, Member States and the Commission. These partners will commit to modernising, prioritising, and speeding up the timely delivery of standards by the end of 2019. The JIS will better align standard setting priorities with research and innovation impetus, with support from the EU research and innovation programme Horizon 2020. The JIS will also promote the use of European standards at international level.
The proposal for a 2017 work programme for European standardisation identifies the services and ICT sectors as priority areas for future standard-setting, given their cross-cutting role in the economy. In April 2016, the Commission already proposed concrete measures to speed up the ICT standard setting process by focusing on five priority areas: 5G, cloud computing, internet of things, data technologies and cybersecurity. Now, the Commission recommends a renewed focus on the services sector.
While services account for 70% of the EU economy, service standards only account for around 2% of all European standards. The fragmentation of standards acts as a barrier to the cross-border provision of services. Complementing other initiatives under the Single Market Strategy to facilitate the cross-border provision of services, the Commission propose to prioritise and promote the targeted development of voluntary European service standards. Examples of services standards include terminology on hotels and other tourism accommodation.
Background
Standards are technical specifications for products, production processes, services or test-methods. Standards facilitate the interoperability of economic operators in the value chain. For example, the standards on paper sizes (A3, A4, A5) facilitate the interaction between consumers, paper and envelope manufacturers, printing houses and photocopier makers. A standard provides technical certainty, a pre-condition for economic operators to invest. For some products, such as airbags or surgical masks, standards also guarantee high quality and safety.
Standard setting in Europe is largely industry driven. While standards are developed by a standards organisation, the market may also simply adopt the technical specifications developed by one company or by professional organisations.
The modernisation of the standardisation system was announced in the Single Market Strategy and complements the Communication on ICT standardisation Priorities for the Digital Single Market adopted in April 2016.
Competition for Skilled Talent Set to Grow as U.S. Employers Continue to Report Upbeat Hiring in the Second Quarter
MILWAUKEE — Demand for skilled talent continues to grow as employers across the U.S. are reporting positive hiring intentions nationwide (+19%) across all 50 states, according to the Q2 2019 ManpowerGroup (NYSE: MAN) Employment Outlook Survey. This is the seventh consecutive year of double-digit hiring Outlooks in the U.S., according to the survey of more than 11,500 U.S. employers. The Q2 2019 employment Outlook comes after the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ January jobs report marked 100 months of consecutive job growth in America with approximately 19M gains since October 2010.
Employers in all 13 industry sectors report optimistic hiring plans with the strongest Outlooks reported in Leisure & Hospitality, Transportation & Utilities (both +25%) and Wholesale & Retail Trade (+24%) as consumers dine out and demand immediate delivery from groceries to fast fashion. Employers in Professional & Business Services have a +23% employment Outlook fueled by growing demand for knowledge workers with the right balance of human strengths including communication and collaboration and technical capabilities from coding to data analytics.
“As U.S. employers continue to report double-digit hiring Outlooks, demand for talent is growing across the board from cyber security experts and data analysts to delivery drivers needed to keep up with 24/7 online retail,” said Becky Frankiewicz, President of ManpowerGroup North America. “It’s a skilled worker’s market. The best employers are reviewing the difference between what is desired in a role and what is required for a job. In the tech sector, we see a higher number of Java openings requiring computer science degrees than there are graduates. The most successful employers are re-evaluating the precise experience and education truly required to get the job done and as a result they’re attracting the best, and often more diverse, talent to the organization.”
View complete Q2 2019 survey results for the U.S: ManpowerGroup.US/MEOS.
Region
Q2 2019
Quarter-over-Quarter Variation
Year-over-Year Variation
West
20%
0%
+1%
Midwest
19%
+1%
-1%
South
20%
-1%
+2%
Northeast
18%
-2%
+1%
U.S. Hiring Plans by Industry Sectors, Regions and Metro Areas/States
Nationwide, employers in all 13 industry sectors expect to add staff in Q2 2019. The strongest Outlooks are reported in Transportation & Utilities (+25%), Leisure & Hospitality (+25%), Wholesale & Retail Trade (+24%) and Professional & Business Services (+23%) followed by Mining (+19%), Construction (+19%), Durable Goods Manufacturing (+19%) and Non-Durable Goods Manufacturing (+17%).
Both the South and the West have the highest regional Outlooks (+20%) in the country. Hiring prospects in the Midwest (+19%) are a close second with employers in the Northeast (+18%) not far behind. In the Midwest (+20%), Northeast (+18%) and West, the Outlook is up a percentage point (+20%) year-over-year and up two percentage points in the South.
Employers in Indiana (+33%), Maine (+33%), Alaska (+28%), Colorado (+27%), Kansas (+26%), North Carolina (+26%) and Oregon (+26%) report the strongest Outlooks nationwide. Of the 100 largest metropolitan statistical areas, the strongest job gains are expected in Greensboro, N.C. (+35%), Denver, Col. (+34%), Indianapolis, Ind. (+33%), Sacramento, Cal. (+32%), Albany, N.Y. (+31%), Deltona, Fla. (+31%) and Madison, Wis. (31%).
Complete results for the ManpowerGroup Employment Outlook Survey are available for download at ManpowerGroup.US/MEOS. The Q3 2019 survey will be released June 11, 2019.
*The Net Employment Outlook is derived by taking the percentage of employers anticipating an increase in hiring activity and subtracting from this the percentage of employers expecting a decrease in hiring activity.
About ManpowerGroup
ManpowerGroup® (NYSE: MAN), the leading global workforce solutions company, helps organizations transform in a fast-changing world of work by sourcing, assessing, developing and managing the talent that enables them to win. We develop innovative solutions for hundreds of thousands of organizations every year, providing them with skilled talent while finding meaningful, sustainable employment for millions of people across a wide range of industries and skills. Our expert family of brands – Manpower®, Experis®, Right Management® and ManpowerGroup® Solutions – creates substantially more value for candidates and clients across 80 countries and territories and has done so for 70 years. In 2019, ManpowerGroup was named one of Fortune’s Most Admired Companies for the seventeenth year and one of the World’s Most Ethical Companies for the tenth year, confirming our position as the most trusted brand in the industry. See how ManpowerGroup is powering the future of work: www.manpowergroup.com.
Corporate Capital Trust and KKR to Ring NYSE Opening Bell
NEW YORK– Representatives from KKR will ring the opening bell tomorrow morning at the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) to commemorate the listing of Corporate Capital Trust, a business development company (“CCT or the “the Company”). Eric Eversole, President of Hiring our Heroes, a program KKR supports that is dedicated to helping members of the military and their families, will join the Company in ringing tomorrow’s opening bell.
Following the bell, the Company’s common stock will begin trading under the ticker symbol “CCT” and the Company’s new investment advisory agreement with KKR Credit will become effective.
“The listing is a great milestone for CCT shareholders and the product of a very successful partnership between KKR and CNL,” said Todd Builione, the incoming CEO of CCT and President of KKR Credit and Capital Markets. “After the listing, shareholders will see an immediate benefit from reduced fees and the ability to control the liquidity of their holdings – while we expect CCT, as a listed vehicle, will have improved access to capital markets solutions and the ability to now reach institutional investors, among others.”
As of September 30, 2017, CCT had over $4.4 billion in total assets and investments in 105 portfolio companies, with 73% of the portfolio in senior secured investments. CCT’s portfolio companies are diversified across 21 industries. Since CCT’s founding, the Company has lent approximately $8.9 billion to over 450 companies.
Upon listing, CCT will be the largest business development company listed on the NYSE and the third-largest externally-managed listed business development company.
About Corporate Capital Trust
Corporate Capital Trust is a business development company that provides investors an opportunity to access the middle market direct lending opportunity. The Company is externally managed by KKR Credit and its investment objective is to provide shareholders with stable recurring income generation. The Company intends to meet its investment objective by investing primarily in the debt of privately owned companies, with a focus on originated transactions. For additional information, please visit corporatecapitaltrust.com.
About KKR
KKR is a leading global investment firm that manages multiple alternative asset classes, including credit, private equity, energy, infrastructure and real estate, and, through its strategic manager partnerships, hedge funds. KKR aims to generate attractive investment returns by following a patient and disciplined investment approach, employing world-class people, and driving growth and value creation with KKR portfolio companies. KKR invests its own capital alongside its partners’ capital and provides financing solutions and investment opportunities through its capital markets business. References to KKR’s investments may include the activities of its sponsored funds. For additional information about KKR & Co. L.P. (NYSE: KKR), please visit KKR’s website at www.kkr.com and on Twitter @KKR_Co.
Count Me In and Capital One Focus on Helping Women Small Business Owners Grow Their Businesses
MCLEAN, Va.– To help more local small business owners innovate and compete in a rapidly changing marketplace, Capital One and Count Me In for Women’s Economic Independence will hold a “Leadership Institute: Thrive with Massive Change” event for local women-owned small businesses, featuring world-renowned expert design innovator Bruce Mau from April 15-17, 2014 in Arlington, Virginia.
During the “Leadership Institute: Thrive with Massive Change” event, Mau will introduce the Design Thinking methodology, used by Fortune 500 companies, including Capital One, to the small business community. Local small business owners will have the opportunity to learn how they can apply Mau’s Design Thinking methodology — based on a human-centered, prototype-driven process for innovation — to their products, services, or business design.
“At Capital One we’re using Design Thinking and its customer-focused approach to reimagine the way millions of people interact with their money to ensure that we’re building the products and experiences our customers need,” said Evelyn Huang, Director of Design Thinking and Strategy, Capital One. “By partnering with Count Me In to introduce Design Thinking to the small business community, we’re hoping to help more entrepreneurs unlock critical customer insights to accelerate innovation and fuel the growth of their small businesses.”
A recent Capital One survey found that 43 percent of small business owners in the Washington, DC, area are concerned about their ability to compete with larger businesses over the next five years. While local DC-area small businesses identify a lack of customer insights as one of their top hurdles to keeping pace with larger businesses in a rapidly changing marketplace, only 37 percent of DC-area small businesses said they conduct in-person feedback sessions with customers, only 16 percent conduct surveys of customers to get feedback on new products and prototypes, and 9 percent do not involve customers at all in the process of creating new products and prototypes, found the Capital One survey of local small business owners.
“Applying Mau’s innovative design principles and tools will inspire women entrepreneurs and will give them fresh perspective on how to approach problem-solving, expand their vision and build their double bottom line of growing a bigger, better business and a better life,” said Nell Merlino, President, Count Me In. “We’re thrilled to partner with Mau and Capital One, who both share our commitment to empower women small business owners with invaluable insight and knowledge that will help them address their biggest business challenges.”
The Leadership Institute builds on Count Me In and Capital One’s partnership to support the growth of women-owned small business owners. Last year, Count Me In and Capital One launched the Women Veteran Entrepreneur Corps (WVEC), a training and mentorship program designed to help established women small business owners who are veterans, spouses/domestic partners, or daughters of veterans conquer daily business challenges and plan ahead for future growth and success.
“We recognize the critical role that our nation’s small businesses serve in economic recovery, and we’re committed to supporting small businesses at every stage of their journey – whether it’s directly through our products and services, or through innovative partnerships and programs like the Leadership Institute that provide tailored business training, mentoring, and other professional support and resources,” Huang added.
About Count Me In for Women’s Economic Independence
Count Me In is the leading not-for-profit provider of business education and resources for women interested in growing their micro-businesses into million-dollar enterprises. Founded in 1999, the organization inspires and instructs thousands of women business owners online, at live events, and through peers, coaches and experts to significantly increase revenues and create new jobs. CMI has developed a reputation nationally and internationally for accelerating business growth and positioning women in the forefront of global economic recovery. For more information on Count Me In programs and resources visit www.countmein.org.
About Capital One
Capital One Financial Corporation, headquartered in McLean, Virginia, is a Fortune 500 company with more than 900 branch locations primarily in New York, New Jersey, Texas, Louisiana, Maryland, Virginia, and the District of Columbia. Its subsidiaries, which include Capital One, N.A., and Capital One Bank (USA), N. A., offer a broad spectrum of financial products and services to consumers, small businesses and commercial clients. Capital One applies the same principles of innovation, collaboration and empowerment in our commitment to our communities across the country that we do in our business. Capital One recognizes that helping to build strong and healthy communities – good places to work, good places to do business and good places to raise families – benefits us all and Capital One is proud to support this and other community initiatives.
Deadline Approaching in Nevada for SBA Working Capital Loans Due to Hurricane Hilary
SACRAMENTO, Calif. – Francisco Sánchez Jr., associate administrator for the Office of Disaster Recovery and Resilience at the Small Business Administration, today reminded Nevada small businesses of the July 10, 2024, deadline to apply for an SBA federal disaster loan for economic injury caused by Hurricane Hilary in Clark county that occurred Aug. 18 – 24, 2023.
According to Sánchez, small nonfarm businesses, small agricultural cooperatives, small businesses engaged in aquaculture and most private nonprofit organizations of any size may apply for Economic Injury Disaster Loans of up to $2 million to help meet working capital needs caused by the disaster. “Economic Injury Disaster Loans may be used to pay fixed debts, payroll, accounts payable and other bills that cannot be paid because of the disaster’s impact. Economic injury assistance is available regardless of whether the applicant suffered any property damage,” Sánchez said.
These low-interest federal disaster loans are available in Clark, Lincoln and Nye counties in Nevada; Mohave County in Arizona; and Inyo and San Bernardino counties in California.
Interest rates are 4 percent for businesses and 2.375 percent for private nonprofit organizations with terms up to 30 years. Loan amounts and terms are set by SBA and are based on each applicant’s financial condition.
Interest does not begin to accrue until 12 months from the date of the first disaster loan disbursement. SBA disaster loan repayment begins 12 months from the date of the first disbursement.
Applicants may apply online and receive additional disaster assistance information at SBA.gov/disaster. Applicants may also call SBA’s Customer Service Center at (800) 659-2955 or email disastercustomerservice@sba.gov for more information on SBA disaster assistance. For people who are deaf, hard of hearing, or have a speech disability, please dial 7-1-1 to access telecommunications relay services.
###
About the U.S. Small Business Administration
The U.S. Small Business Administration helps power the American dream of business ownership. As the only go-to resource and voice for small businesses backed by the strength of the federal government, the SBA empowers entrepreneurs and small business owners with the resources and support they need to start, grow, expand their businesses, or recover from a declared disaster. It delivers services through an extensive network of SBA field offices and partnerships with public and private organizations. To learn more, visit www.sba.gov.
Deadline Approaching in Nevada for SBA Working Capital Loans Due to Hurricane Hilary
SACRAMENTO, Calif. – Francisco Sánchez Jr., associate administrator for the Office of Disaster Recovery and Resilience at the Small Business Administration, today reminded Nevada small businesses of the July 10, 2024, deadline to apply for an SBA federal disaster loan for economic injury caused by Hurricane Hilary in Clark county that occurred Aug. 18 – 24, 2023.
According to Sánchez, small nonfarm businesses, small agricultural cooperatives, small businesses engaged in aquaculture and most private nonprofit organizations of any size may apply for Economic Injury Disaster Loans of up to $2 million to help meet working capital needs caused by the disaster. “Economic Injury Disaster Loans may be used to pay fixed debts, payroll, accounts payable and other bills that cannot be paid because of the disaster’s impact. Economic injury assistance is available regardless of whether the applicant suffered any property damage,” Sánchez said.
These low-interest federal disaster loans are available in Clark, Lincoln and Nye counties in Nevada; Mohave County in Arizona; and Inyo and San Bernardino counties in California.
Interest rates are 4 percent for businesses and 2.375 percent for private nonprofit organizations with terms up to 30 years. Loan amounts and terms are set by SBA and are based on each applicant’s financial condition.
Interest does not begin to accrue until 12 months from the date of the first disaster loan disbursement. SBA disaster loan repayment begins 12 months from the date of the first disbursement.
Applicants may apply online and receive additional disaster assistance information at SBA.gov/disaster. Applicants may also call SBA’s Customer Service Center at (800) 659-2955 or email disastercustomerservice@sba.gov for more information on SBA disaster assistance. For people who are deaf, hard of hearing, or have a speech disability, please dial 7-1-1 to access telecommunications relay services.
###
About the U.S. Small Business Administration
The U.S. Small Business Administration helps power the American dream of business ownership. As the only go-to resource and voice for small businesses backed by the strength of the federal government, the SBA empowers entrepreneurs and small business owners with the resources and support they need to start, grow, expand their businesses, or recover from a declared disaster. It delivers services through an extensive network of SBA field offices and partnerships with public and private organizations. To learn more, visit www.sba.gov.
Delivering World-Class Customer Service for Citizens and Businesses – 2016 Plan Excerpts – 2016 Budget
Government must be able to keep pace with the innovation and user experiences that the American people and businesses expect. Throughout 2014, the Administration piloted new and innovative approaches to increase the Government’s ability to drive impact for Americans on national priorities, including initiatives that help veterans find employment and help workers invest in safe and affordable retirement accounts. The Budget invests in scaling those pilot programs and processes that have proven successful. Ultimately, a more effective Government will more efficiently use taxpayer dollars to better deliver for citizens.
3.1.1
Ramping Up Smarter Information Technology Delivery
The Administration has embarked on a comprehensive approach to fundamentally improve the way that the Government delivers technology services to the public. Top technologists and entrepreneurs are being recruited to work within agencies on the highest priority projects. The best processes are being leveraged to increase oversight and accountability for IT spending. In addition, several efforts are being piloted to improve IT procurement and ramp up Government contracting with innovative companies.
People. Getting the best talent working inside of Government is a key component of the Administration’s Smarter IT Delivery strategy. In 2014, the Administration piloted the USDS by recruiting a select group of private sector innovators, entrepreneurs, and engineers to Government service. Since standing up, this team of America’s best digital experts has worked in collaboration with Federal agencies to implement cutting-edge digital and technology practices on the Nation’s highest impact programs, including the successful re-launch of HealthCare.gov in its second year, the Veterans Benefits Management System, and an improved process for online visa applications, among others. In addition to their work on these high priority projects, this small team of technical experts has worked to establish best practices and recruit still more highly-skilled digital service experts and engineers into Government.
Every agency in Government has citizen-facing digital projects that are critical to its mission. Too often, these services have been delivered over budget, behind schedule, and in ways that do not meet citizen needs. Unsurprisingly, since the launch of USDS in 2014, there has been significant demand for its expertise, from project design and development to recruiting technical experts. To address this problem, the Budget scales and institutionalizes this new approach to technology by providing funding to 25 agencies for the development of their own agency digital services teams. These small, high-impact teams will drive the quality and effectiveness of the agencies’ most important digital services. USDS will work closely with agencies to stand up these teams by providing support for hiring, training, and procurement.
Process. The Administration has made significant progress encouraging data-driven processes to provide effective oversight of Government IT. By establishing mechanisms such as PortfolioStat, a data-based review of agency IT portfolios, we have not only strengthened Federal IT, but made it significantly more cost effective. PortfolioStat has helped the Government achieve more than $2.2 billion in savings over the past three years while ensuring agencies are efficiently using taxpayer dollars to deliver effective and innovative solutions to the public. PortfolioStat promotes the adoption of new technologies, such as cloud computing and agile development practices. For example, as a result of these continuing efforts, the Federal Government now spends approximately 8.5 percent of its budget on provisioned services such as cloud computing, on par with leading private sector companies.
In addition, agencies involved in PortfolioStat are becoming more effective in rapidly delivering value in IT. For example, agencies have increased their use of agile development practices and are delivering IT capabilities 21 days (11 percent) faster than they were in May 2013. Agile development is an incremental, fast-paced style of software development that better meets evolving user needs. Using agile development ultimately increases the ability to deliver a better product, faster.
In 2016, the Administration will continue to use PortfolioStat to drive efficiencies in these programs, and also will continue to revise and encourage adoption of the TechFAR and Digital Services Playbook, which were released to the public in the fall of 2014. These tools provide clear guidance to agencies on using agile development and innovative contracting practices to deliver IT services that work for 21st Century consumers. Throughout 2016, the Administration will continue to scale up best practices by institutionalizing them within the agency digital service teams.
Companies. The Government must work with private sector innovators to ensure the best use of cutting-edge technologies and practices. Yet, too often, there are barriers to entry that prevent agencies from contracting with these firms. Over the past year, initial steps have been taken to address this challenge. For example, the Administration has piloted FBOpen, a tool that helps small and innovative companies search for opportunities to work with Government, and launched an online national dialogue on procurement reform to solicit ideas for reducing barriers to access. As part of the broader strategy to transform the Federal marketplace, the Administration is piloting new initiatives in IT acquisition. In 2016, these early pilots will be expanded to increase digital acquisition capability within agencies, train agency personnel in digital IT acquisitions, and test innovative contracting models.
3.1.1
Delivering World-Class Customer Service
The Administration is continuing its efforts to improve the quality, timeliness, and effectiveness of Federal services. A customer service Community of Practice has been established to develop standards, practices, and tools for agencies to improve their customer service. The Federal Customer Service Awards program has also been established to recognize individuals and teams who provide outstanding customer service directly to the American people. The awards will begin in the fall of 2015, and will support innovative practices and provide performance incentives to frontline employees.
Agencies are also increasing their focus on improving the most frequently used Government services, and the Budget supports the introduction and scale-up of these programs. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) has launched IRS Direct Pay, which provides taxpayers a no-fee electronic payment option and allows them to establish installment agreements; built an e-Authentication tool that provides taxpayers a user-friendly, low-cost way to securely access IRS online tools and applications; and launched IRS2Go, a downloadable app that allows taxpayer self-service access to IRS information and services on any device. Since its release, it has been downloaded more than 5.4 million times. The Transportation Security Administration (TSA) is continuing to improve passenger experience at airports, including continuing to expand and improve TSA Pre-Check, an expedited passenger screening program. TSA is exploring new and innovative ways of collecting and responding to customer feedback to provide the best possible service while keeping U.S. airports safe. Going forward, the Administration will build and expand on this progress by improving the collection and use of customer feedback data across Government to make tangible improvements in customer interactions.
Deloitte and AuditBoard Announce Strategic Alliance to Drive Greater Risk and Controls Compliance Efficiencies, Reduce Risk, and Extract More Value from SOX and Internal Audit Programs
LOS ANGELES, Oct. 19, 2021 /PRNewswire/ — Deloitte & Touche LLP, a leader in providing audit, assurance and risk, and financial advisory services to public and private companies, and AuditBoard Inc., the innovative cloud-based platform for audit, risk, and compliance management, today announced a strategic alliance in conjunction with “Audit & Beyond 2021,” AuditBoard’s User Conference, taking place Oct. 19-21 at Terranea Resort in Los Angeles, California.
The alliance brings together AuditBoard’s cloud-based, integrated suite of audit, risk, and compliance solutions with Deloitte’s controls advisory and Sarbanes-Oxley (SOX) and internal control over financial reporting professional advisory services to provide streamlined risk management, SOX compliance, internal audit, and controls management to clients.
The rapid and unprecedented pace of change — and lingering impact brought on by the pandemic — has raised concerns of increased regulation and compliance requirements. Emerging technologies, regulatory changes, and talent model shifts introduce new risks that need to be managed.
AuditBoard’s integrated audit, risk, and compliance solutions connect risk, and centralize and streamline SOX and internal audit workflow, testing, and reporting in a single platform, bringing together internal audit teams, IT compliance teams, external auditors, process owners, and executives to help enterprises automate, effectively manage, collaborate, and report on risk and control data in real time.
Deloitte works with organizations to help them modernize, automate, and ingrain financial governance from the executive board level and senior management level to the execution of transactions while still managing the total cost of compliance. Leveraging emerging technologies to help organizations shift the focus of their controls function from hindsight to foresight, Deloitte’s suite of tech-enabled services can help executives gain a better understanding of their current state of controls, spot trends, identify opportunities, and change behavior.
Few, if any, compliance requirements surpass the governance, risk and controls challenges presented to companies than those within the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. Deloitte provides SOX-related services for any SOX program stage, from IPO and SPAC readiness to modernization and optimization of existing end-to-end SOX programs. For private companies planning an IPO or SPAC, Deloitte can assist with building a SOX readiness program that works for most organizations. For existing issuers, Deloitte can help organizations modernize their program through operating model transformation, process enhancement, and technology enablement. An optimized SOX program can deliver critical benefits, including enhanced quality, increased effectiveness and efficiency, deeper insights, and may reduce the total cost of compliance.
“This strategic alliance combines the power of our audit, risk, and compliance platform with Deloitte’s deep audit and advisory domain experience, providing extended value to our shared customers,” AuditBoard President and CEO Scott Arnold said. “We put our customers at the center of everything we do, and this exciting relationship is another example of how we’re working to elevate and empower them, in collaboration with one of the most respected names in the industry.”
“Internal controls compliance is more than just achieving the baseline. It should extract value,” said Lindsay Rosenfeld, managing director and Governance, Risk and Controls service offering leader within Deloitte & Touche LLP’s Accounting Advisory & Transformation Services practice. “Our professional services integrate with AuditBoard’s advanced audit, risk and compliance management technology to provide more effective and efficient solutions for our clients,” said Ashok Parmar, partner within Deloitte & Touche LLP’s Accounting Advisory & Transformation Services practice.
About AuditBoard
AuditBoard transforms how audit, risk, and compliance professionals manage today’s dynamic risk landscape with a modern connected platform that engages the front lines, surfaces the risks that matter, and drives better strategic decision-making. More than 25% of the Fortune 500 leverage AuditBoard to move their businesses forward with greater clarity and agility. AuditBoard is top-rated by customers on G2 and Gartner Peer Insights, and was recently ranked as one of the 100 fastest-growing technology companies in North America by Deloitte. To learn more, visit AuditBoard.com.
About Deloitte
Deloitte provides industry-leading audit, consulting, tax and advisory services to many of the world’s most admired brands, including nearly 90% of the Fortune 500® and more than 7,000 private companies. Our people come together for the greater good and work across the industry sectors that drive and shape today’s marketplace — delivering measurable and lasting results that help reinforce public trust in our capital markets, inspire clients to see challenges as opportunities to transform and thrive, and help lead the way toward a stronger economy and a healthier society. Deloitte is proud to be part of the largest global professional services network serving our clients in the markets that are most important to them. Building on more than 175 years of service, our network of member firms spans more than 150 countries and territories. Learn how Deloitte’s more than 345,000 people worldwide connect for impact at www.deloitte.com.
Deloitte refers to one or more of Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu Limited, a UK private company limited by guarantee (“DTTL”), its network of member firms, and their related entities. DTTL and each of its member firms are legally separate and independent entities. DTTL (also referred to as “Deloitte Global”) does not provide services to clients. In the United States, Deloitte refers to one or more of the US member firms of DTTL, their related entities that operate using the “Deloitte” name in the United States and their respective affiliates. Certain services may not be available to attest clients under the rules and regulations of public accounting. Please see www.deloitte.com/about to learn more about our global network of member firms.
SOURCE Deloitte; AuditBoard Inc.
CONTACT: Daniel Mucisko, Public Relations, Deloitte Services LP, +1 973-602-4126, dmucisko@deloitte.com; Scott Garner, Audit Board, press@auditboard
Related Links
www.deloitte.com
Deloitte: Quantifying the Economic Impact of Closing the Digital Divide
NEW YORK, May 3, 2021–
Additional broadband coverage, adoption, and speed is accretive for incremental growth of U.S. jobs and GDP, making the case for investment.
A 10 percentage-point increase in broadband penetration in 2016 would have resulted in more than 806,000 additional jobs in 2019, or an average annual increase of 269,000 jobs.
More than 875,000 additional U.S. jobs and $186 billion more in economic output would have occurred in 2019 had there been a 10 percentage-point increase in broadband access in 2014.
Adding 10 Mbps to average download speeds in 2016 would have resulted in 139,400 additional jobs in 2019; however, the analysis also indicates diminishing returns with the rate of job growth slowing as speeds continue to increase.
Why this matters
The COVID-19 pandemic forced much of the U.S. population to trade classrooms, offices and conference rooms for at-home screens. Many Americans were left stranded by inadequate or unaffordable access to internet connectivity or mobile devices. This reality has resulted in a pivotal moment for the U.S. economy, with financial prosperity, educational opportunities and personal/professional productivity, depending on reliable, affordable and fast internet connectivity for all. More than $100 billion of infrastructure investment has been allocated by the U.S. government over the past decade to address this issue; however, the digital divide still presents a significant gap.
Deloitte today released a new report titled, “Broadband for all: charting a path to economic growth,” that uses economic models to evaluate the relationship between broadband and economic growth. It proposes a geographic segmentation that distinguishes the specific needs of different under-served geographies, better reflecting their unique challenges. The report also provides insights into the benefits associated with various broadband speeds and adoption rates in order to optimize economic and social benefits, while reducing inefficiencies.
Investment doesn’t always equate to outcomes
Optimism over the past 10 years that billions of private and public investment in underserved geographies for broadband access and adoption would help close the digital divide has waned as outcomes have often disappointed. Previous programs increased the number of people with access to the FCC’s definition of broadband by less than 1% (<1%; 1.6 million people) between 2014 and 2019, partially as a result of the changing definition of broadband. The report notes:
Between 2010 and 2020, federal programs including USAC and Rural Digital Opportunity Fund, among others, spent approximately $107 billion.
In 2014, the last year of the 4 Mbps downlink benchmark, 16 million Americans (approximately 5% of the U.S. population) did not have broadband services that met that standard.
In 2019, after five years and approximately $54 billion, 14.4 million Americans did not have broadband that met the new FCC speed threshold (25 Mbps downlink).
Key quote
"The pandemic hastened the pace of a decades-long trend in which innovative applications are increasingly essential to enhancing educational opportunities, organizing our lives, connecting with colleagues and friends, improving workplace productivity and enriching the quality of lives. If large segments of our population lack the necessary communications infrastructure to participate, progress will be increasingly difficult."
− Dan Littmann, principal, technology, media and
telecommunications, Deloitte Consulting LLP
The digital divide has significant economic impact
For years government, industry and academics have discussed the societal impact produced by closing the digital divide. To better understand the relationship between broadband and the U.S. economy, Deloitte developed economic models using publicly available information. The report's economic models confirmed three hypotheses:
Increased broadband penetration leads to economic growth: Deloitte's analysis indicates that a 10 percentage-point increase of broadband penetration in 2016 would have resulted in more than 806,000 additional jobs in 2019, or an average annual increase of 269,000 jobs. The report notes that broadband can allow for greater access to formal education, as well as expand the types of jobs available in a region, thereby raising the level of skills.
Greater broadband availability leads to economic growth: Deloitte found a strong correlation between broadband availability and jobs, as well as GDP growth. The report notes that a 10 percentage-point increase in broadband access in 2014, would have resulted in more than 875,000 additional U.S. jobs and $186 billion more in economic output in 2019. That is an average of 175,000 jobs and $37.2 billion in output per year.
Greater penetration of higher speed broadband leads to economic growth: Deloitte's analysis also shows that adoption of higher speeds drives noticeable improvements in job growth. Adding 10 Mbps to average download speeds in 2016 would have resulted in 139,400 additional jobs in 2019 or about 46,500 additional jobs per year. While the analysis shows that increasing speeds lead to greater job growth, it also indicates diminishing returns, with the rate of job growth slowing as speeds continue to increase. The report notes that this is a significant consideration. Diminishing returns should be considered when evaluating future speed mandates.
Key quote
"When it comes to the public or private broadband investments to close the digital divide, the economic benefits are clear, but will require stakeholders to navigate potentially competing priorities across emerging technologies that can meet needs in the near-term, the long-term desires for faster speeds, and financial support for devices and in-home equipment."
− Jack Fritz, principal, technology, media and
telecommunications, Deloitte Consulting LLP
Connect with us on Twitter @DeloitteTMT, or on LinkedIn: @DanLittmann @JackFritz.
About Deloitte
Deloitte provides industry-leading audit, consulting, tax and advisory services to many of the world's most admired brands, including nearly 90% of the Fortune 500® and more than 7,000 private companies. Our people come together for the greater good and work across the industry sectors that drive and shape today's marketplace — delivering measurable and lasting results that help reinforce public trust in our capital markets, inspire clients to see challenges as opportunities to transform and thrive, and help lead the way toward a stronger economy and a healthier society. Deloitte is proud to be part of the largest global professional services network serving our clients in the markets that are most important to them. Building on more than 175 years of service, our network of member firms spans more than 150 countries and territories. Learn how Deloitte's more than 330,000 people worldwide connect for impact at www.deloitte.com.
Deloitte refers to one or more of Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu Limited, a UK private company limited by guarantee ("DTTL"), its network of member firms, and their related entities. DTTL and each of its member firms are legally separate and independent entities. DTTL (also referred to as "Deloitte Global") does not provide services to clients. In the United States, Deloitte refers to one or more of the US member firms of DTTL, their related entities that operate using the "Deloitte" name in the United States and their respective affiliates. Certain services may not be available to attest clients under the rules and regulations of public accounting. Please see www.deloitte.com/about to learn more about our global network of member firms.
SOURCE Deloitte
CONTACT: Anisha Sharma, Public Relations, Deloitte Services LP, +1 201 290 9119, anissharma@deloitte.com
Related Links
http://www.deloitte.com
Demand for Green Skills Grows as Companies Strive to Achieve Sustainability Goals
MILWAUKEE — The accelerating pace of the global green transition is intensifying the competition for talent, according to new research from ManpowerGroup (NYSE: MAN). “Building Competitive Advantage with A People-First Green Business Transformation,” reveals demand for green skills significantly outstripping supply as employers work to recruit and retain qualified talent critical to achieving ambitious sustainability targets.
Based on surveys of nearly 39,000 employers and over 5,000 workers worldwide, the findings spotlight an unprecedented convergence of talent scarcity, climate urgency, and technological disruption hindering sustainability progress. With 2023 now the hottest year ever recorded, this report underscores the urgency for organizations to deliver on their environmental goals and commitments.
“As companies accelerate their sustainability efforts, it’s critical we bring people along on the journey,” said Riccardo Barberis, President, ManpowerGroup Northern Europe Region. “Investments in green technology will only get us halfway if employers fail to properly skill and reskill workers to operate in a greener future. Prioritizing workforce development must be a core pillar of net-zero strategies.”
Key findings:
Unprecedented Demand: 70% of employers are urgently recruiting or planning to recruit green talent and people with sustainability skills, with the highest demand in renewable energy, manufacturing, operations, and IT.
Widening Global Skills Gap: Despite demand, only 1 in 8 workers currently have more than one green skill, sparking an exponential shortage as companies compete for limited talent.
High Industry Demand: Energy & Utilities (81%), Information Technology (77%), Financials & Real Estate (75%), Industrials & Materials (74%), and Transport, Logistics & Automotive (73%) top the leaderboard with the highest intentions to hire green talent to meet sustainability targets.
Roadblocks Slowing Progress: Talent leaders cited finding qualified candidates (44%), creating effective reskilling programs (39%), and identifying transferable skills (36%) as the top barriers to execute green transitions.
Workforce Skepticism: While 70% of white-collar workers say they are ready to embrace the green transition, only 57% of their blue-collar peers say the same.
Gen Z Calls for Accountability: Three-quarters (75%) of Gen Z candidates research a prospective employer’s green reputation and nearly half (46%) say it will impact their likelihood of choosing a particular employer.
Generational Divide: 66% of Gen Z and 64% of Millennials believe sustainability efforts will enhance their work, compared to just 44% of Baby Boomers.
Given these results, creating a roadmap for workers to transition into high-demand green roles remains a pressing priority.
For more details on the green jobs landscape, workforce readiness perceptions, and recommendations for planning for the greening world of work, download the complete report here.
ABOUT MANPOWERGROUP
ManpowerGroup® (NYSE: MAN), the leading global workforce solutions company, helps organizations transform in a fast-changing world of work by sourcing, assessing, developing, and managing the talent that enables them to win. We develop innovative solutions for hundreds of thousands of organizations every year, providing them with skilled talent while finding meaningful, sustainable employment for millions of people across a wide range of industries and skills. Our expert family of brands – Manpower, Experis, and Talent Solutions – creates substantially more value for candidates and clients across more than 70 countries and territories and has done so for more than 75 years. We are recognized consistently for our diversity – as a best place to work for Women, Inclusion, Equality, and Disability, and in 2023 ManpowerGroup was named one of the World’s Most Ethical Companies for the 14th time – all confirming our position as the brand of choice for in-demand talent.
For more information, visit www.manpowergroup.com, or follow us on LinkedIn, X (formerly Twitter), Facebook, and Instagram.
Cautionary Statement Regarding Forward-Looking Statements
This press release, and the related report “Building Competitive Advantage with A People-First Green Business Transformation”, contain forward-looking statements, including statements regarding the impact of the green transition, the limited availability of labor that has green skills, and the impact of such shortages. Actual events or results may differ materially from those contained in the forward-looking statements due to risks, uncertainties and assumptions. These factors include those found in the Company’s reports filed with the SEC, including the information under the heading “Risk Factors” in its Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2022, which information is incorporated herein by reference. ManpowerGroup disclaims any obligation to update any forward-looking or other statements in this release, except as required by law.
SOURCE ManpowerGroup
John Julitz, +1 (414) 502-9314, john.julitz@manpowergroup.com
Disney Accelerator Powered By Techstars Showcase 10 Start-Ups At Demo Day
BURBANK, Calif., Today, Disney Accelerator powered by Techstars culminates in a Demo Day where its 10 participating companies will present their businesses to the investment and entrepreneurial communities, industry leaders and Disney executives. The Disney Accelerator participants have just finished a 15-week immersive program that gave them access to mentorship from more than 60 Disney executives as well as 70 entrepreneurs and investors from the business community, up to $120K in investment capital to develop their companies and special access to Disney resources from across the company.
The participating companies have reached many significant milestones during the Disney Accelerator. At Demo Day, Smart Toy, a company that makes toys that teach, talk, and interact with children, announced today that it has been acquired by Cartwheel Kids, a Los Angeles-based manufacturer of children’s products. In addition, SnowShoe announced that it had secured $2.2 million in seed financing and Choremonster and Codarica both launched mobile apps. Sphero also introduced its new Ollie product during the program, and Twigtale named as its editor-in-chief Dr. Harvey Karp, the renowned pediatrician and child development specialist.
“This group of start-ups has made tremendous progress evolving and growing their businesses in the past fifteen weeks,” said Kevin Mayer, Disney’s Executive Vice President, Corporate Strategy and Business Development. “It has been a fantastic learning experience for them and an opportunity for Disney to get in on the ground floor with a new generation of innovators. We look forward to the opportunity to work with all of these companies moving forward and to meeting a new set of participants next year.”
The companies participating in Disney Accelerator are:
ChoreMonster – ChoreMonster unites parents and kids with the most ridiculously fun and motivating family framework, so every home is a joyful place. choremonster.com
Codarica – Codarica creates seriously fun games that teach kids to code. codarica.com
Jogg – Jogg is a mobile video platform that changes the direction of how we engage our audience. joggapp.co
Naritiv – Naritiv is a marketing and analytics platform for micro-content, starting with Snapchat. naritiv.com
Sidelines – Sidelines is a people-powered content marketing platform that drives brand influence through discussions by expert fans. sidelinesapp.com
Smart Toy – Smart Toy is a learning toy that talks and listens to kids. Smart Toy can be customized to know your child’s name, teach lessons, and much more. smarttoylabs.com
SnowShoe – SnowShoe creates magic with a touch of plastic. SnowShoe-powered objects unlock digital content through your smartphone. snowshoestamp.com
Sphero – Sphero is the connected play company, fusing digital and physical play by creating toys and robots that you control with a smart device. gosphero.com
Twigtale – Twigtale builds happier families through personalization and expert-fueled storytelling. twigtale.com
TYFFON – TYFFON makes entertaining apps that put you in the center of the fun — founded by the creators of the ZombieBooth series, with over 30 million downloads. tyffon.com
About The Walt Disney Company
The Walt Disney Company, together with its subsidiaries and affiliates, is a leading diversified international entertainment and media enterprise with five business segments: media networks, parks and resorts, studio entertainment, consumer products and interactive. Disney is a Dow 30 company and had annual revenues of $45 billion in its Fiscal Year 2013.
About Techstars
The massive Techstars interconnected network of over 3,000 successful entrepreneurs, mentors, investors, and corporate partners help the most promising startups do more faster. With 13 programs worldwide, its mentorship-driven accelerators fund the best companies in the most entrepreneurial communities. Since 2006, 80% of the 500 companies from almost 40 Techstars programs have received funding, representing approximately $2 billion in market capitalization.
– See more at: http://thewaltdisneycompany.com/disney-news/press-releases/2014/10/disney-accelerator-showcases-10-start-ups-demo-day#sthash.RkF8iwxn.dpuf
Dodd-Frank: The Law That’s Been Quietly Protecting You and Strengthening Our Economy for the Past 5 Years
“Dodd-Frank” is shorthand for the Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, whose chief co-sponsors on Capitol Hill were Senator Chris Dodd and Representative Barney Frank. These reforms — that the President signed into law exactly five years ago today — and others the Administration has put in place since the crisis represent the most sweeping set of financial reforms since the Great Depression.
Why does it matter and why should you care? Let’s take a walk down memory lane.
(And if you just want a quick breakdown of the numbers behind five years of Wall Street reform, take a look here.)
1. Remember the CFPB? Wall Street reform created it.
“CFPB” stands for the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau: an independent watchdog responsible for writing and enforcing rules to protect you as you borrow and save. And Wall Street reform made it happen.
Here’s why that’s a big deal:
You’d be surprised at exactly what lenders were able to get away with during the housing bubble — including loading up a mortgage with extra costs to jack up their own compensation in the short term before shuffling that loan over to a third party, making it their problem. With these bad incentives, lenders steered borrowers toward bad products they couldn’t afford (even when they qualified for better, lower-cost options), often burying the terms of made-to-explode mortgages in the fine print.
Dodd-Frank fixed that. Today, lenders have to assess borrowers’ ability to pay a mortgage first. They have to take responsibility for the risks of the loans they make, giving them “skin in the game” to encourage responsible lending. And they will have to present them to the borrowers in clearer, easier-to-understand terms. And the CFPB is keeping all kinds of consumer lenders honest — from credit card companies, to mortgage lenders, to debt collectors, to student loan servicers. Since 2011, the CFPB’s enforcement actions have delivered nearly $11 billion in relief to more than 26 million consumers harmed by illegal practices — including a new action announced today.
(Those practices include deceptive marketing, unfair billing, and discriminatory practices by big banks and other financial institutions — and a whole lot more. Learn more about them here.)
2. Remember when you were responsible for picking up the tab for Wall Street’s mistakes? Not anymore.
When large, complex, or interconnected firms (like Lehman Brothers) failed during the crisis, the regulators didn’t have the tools they needed to wind them down safely, without bringing down our entire financial system. That left us with a pretty awful choice: Let our system collapse and risk another Great Depression (which nearly happened after Lehman failed), or have taxpayers step in to clean up the mess?
Wall Street reform fixed that. Today, regulators have something called “orderly liquidation authority,” which is a fancy way of saying that if a big Wall Street firm implodes again, taxpayers aren’t on the hook — investors in the firm and the financial industry pick up the tab. By law, no firm is too big to fail.
3. Remember when huge parts of our financial system were allowed to operate in the shadows? They’re being brought into the light now.
Before the financial crisis, trillions of dollars in complex financial contracts — like derivatives— went almost completely unregulated. Nobody knew who was responsible for what. Sometimes the contracts were only written on paper, stuffed in a drawer, and forgotten. As a result, institutions couldn’t keep track of who owed what to whom. And when a large firm that many other firms relied on to meet their own obligations went down, it had the ability to drag the entire economy down with it.
Here’s how Wall Street reform changed that: Today, most complex transactions have to happen on transparent, centralized platforms with good documentation and better safeguards so that no one firm’s failure can ripple through the entire economy. And regulators now have the power to find and address risks across the financial system, bringing major institutions and major markets that used to escape adequate oversight up to higher standards.
4. Remember when opponents of reform said the sky was going to fall? It didn’t.
Five years ago, opponents of this bill said that its reforms would hurt lending and kill jobs. Five years later, here’s what we know:
Business lending by banks is up 30 percent.
Unemployment is the lowest it’s been in seven years.
And we’ve had the longest streak of private-sector job growth on record — with nearly 13 million jobs created.
5. Remember when we said we were done here? We didn’t. (We’re not.)
The President’s still working to protect American consumers; keep our markets safe, open, and fair; and provide a foundation for strong economic growth. We’re making new rules to make sure your retirement advisor is working in your best interest, we’re protecting our service members and their families from predatory lenders, and we’re making sure our financial institutions can stand up to the toughest conditions the market has to offer through annual stress tests.
We’re finishing the financial reform work that Dodd-Frank started, and we’ll stand up against any efforts to roll it back.
Charlie Anderson is a Senior Advisor for the National Economic Council.
Duke Energy Awards $200,000 In Grants To Support Economic Development In Florida
ST. PETERSBURG, Fla., Dec. 29, 2021 — Duke Energy Florida is investing $200,000 in strategic economic development and recruitment programs across the state.
The Duke Energy Foundation grants will help communities across the state attract, build and grow businesses, as well as tackle emerging recruitment and workforce challenges.
“These community partners are delivering meaningful results for our state, and we’re proud to support their ongoing commitment to growing our economy and enhancing the quality of life for all residents,” said Melissa Seixas, Duke Energy Florida state president.
One of this year’s recipients is Enterprise Florida. The state economic development agency is receiving a $25,000 grant to provide the opportunity to host and further build relationships with site selection consultants and corporate real estate executives in attendance at the Team Florida events. These events will help to improve the perceptions of doing business in Florida and generate awareness of the opportunities in the state.
“Enterprise Florida is grateful for the continued investment and partnership in Team Florida,” said Destin Wells, Enterprise Florida Inc. senior vice president of business development. “This year is a renewal and resurgence of the state’s marketing cooperative, and Duke Energy has always been there with not just the financial support, but strategic thinking and leadership.”
Additional grants were awarded to the following organizations that help create vibrant economies in the communities that Duke Energy serves:
Statewide
Foundation for Chamber Economic Partnership – $5,000. The Foundation for Chamber Economic Partnership will create a website dedicated to marketing an industrial site.
Enterprise Florida – $25,000. Enterprise Florida will host Team Florida events to further build relationships with site selection consultants and corporate real estate executives.
Tampa Bay area
Citrus County Economic Development Council – $15,000. The Citrus County Economic Development Council will create a multi-tiered marketing campaign that will increase global exposure and economic development leads and win projects for the county.
City of Pinellas Park – $5,000. The City of Pinellas Park will update its economic development marketing materials, purchase and install new business retention software and cover costs for conference participation.
Pasco Economic Development Council Inc. – $10,000. The Pasco Economic Development Council will create a workforce development video showcasing its workforceCONNECT program and the talent pipeline in Pasco County.
Hernando County Board of County Commissioners – $10,000. The Hernando County program will target and recruit manufacturing and aviation/aerospace businesses to Hernando County through targeted meetings with projects considering relocation and/or expansion over the next 12 to 24 months.
Greater Orlando area
Foundation for Orlando’s Future – $50,000. The Foundation for Orlando’s Future program will launch the Property and Community Database to assist local governments searching for demographic information, small businesses looking for market research and out-of-region users exploring investment opportunities in the Central Florida market.
Highlands County Board of County Commissioners – $10,000. As part of its multiyear marketing campaign, the Highlands County Economic Development Office will target additional events such as the Commercial Drone and Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) Expo.
Lake County Board of County Commissioners – $10,000. Lake County will create a promotional video to showcase its premier location in Central Florida for business attraction and expansion. Elevate Lake and Lake County’s economic development office will collaborate with Visit Lake, Lake County’s tourism office, to produce the video.
Seminole County – $10,000. Seminole County will develop an integrated social media campaign and marketing collateral to mitigate the negative impacts to local businesses and bring much needed development and expansion resources to its community.
Greater Tallahassee; Gainesville area
Gainesville Area Chamber of Commerce Foundation Inc. – $10,000. The Gainesville Area Chamber of Commerce Foundation program will facilitate a marketing campaign that targets and solicits business and talent attraction to the Greater Gainesville region.
North Florida Economic Development Partnership Foundation Inc. – $20,000. The North Florida Economic Development Partnership Foundation will continue investigating strategic sites for economic development and identify a list of industries to target for recruitment.
Florida’s Great Northwest Foundation – $10,000. Florida’s Great Northwest Foundation will expand its “Go Beyond Our Beaches” campaign by creating additional marketing materials and connecting the messaging through events and places where site selection consultants and company executives will be.
Sumter County – $10,000. Sumter County will update its economic development website with new photos and major revisions, including new content and a refreshed website design.
Duke Energy Foundation
The Duke Energy Foundation provides philanthropic support to meet the needs of communities where Duke Energy customers live and work. The Foundation contributes more than $30 million annually in charitable gifts and is funded by Duke Energy shareholder dollars. More information about the Foundation and its Powerful Communities program can be found at duke-energy.com/foundation.
Duke Energy (NYSE: DUK), a Fortune 150 company headquartered in Charlotte, N.C., is one of America’s largest energy holding companies. Its electric utilities serve 7.9 million customers in North Carolina, South Carolina, Florida, Indiana, Ohio and Kentucky, and collectively own 51,000 megawatts of energy capacity. Its natural gas unit serves 1.6 million customers in North Carolina, South Carolina, Tennessee, Ohio and Kentucky. The company employs 27,500 people.
Duke Energy is executing an aggressive clean energy strategy to create a smarter energy future for its customers and communities – with goals of at least a 50% carbon reduction by 2030 and net-zero carbon emissions by 2050. The company is a top U.S. renewable energy provider, on track to own or purchase 16,000 megawatts of renewable energy capacity by 2025. The company also is investing in major electric grid upgrades and expanded battery storage, and exploring zero-emitting power generation technologies such as hydrogen and advanced nuclear.
Duke Energy was named to Fortune’s 2021 “World’s Most Admired Companies” list and Forbes’ “America’s Best Employers” list. More information is available at duke-energy.com. The Duke Energy News Center contains news releases, fact sheets, photos and videos. Duke Energy’s illumination features stories about people, innovations, community topics and environmental issues. Follow Duke Energy on Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram and Facebook.
Media contact: Audrey Stasko
Cell: 315.877.3031
Media line: 800.559.3853
SOURCE Duke Energy
Related Links
www.duke-energy.com
Duke Energy continues efforts to power South Carolina economy with $500,000 in grants for agribusiness education, diversity initiatives
GREENVILLE, S.C., Feb. 22, 2022 — Duke Energy continues its long history as a critical participant in South Carolina’s economy by announcing $500,000 in support of the state’s top industry: agribusiness. The grants from the Duke Energy Foundation will help fund education and diversity initiatives across the state.
“Agribusiness is South Carolina’s top industry, and Duke Energy is proud to power thousands of family and commercial farms and related businesses across the state,” said Mike Callahan, Duke Energy’s South Carolina state president. “As a company born in South Carolina and critical to its success, we are constantly looking for ways to help power the state’s economy. That’s why it is important for us to support efforts that not only build the diverse 21st century workforce this industry will need to prosper and grow, but also help more minority farmers and landowners protect family land and grow working landscapes.”
Grant recipients
S.C. Governor’s School for Agriculture – ($150,000) – Grant will go toward building curriculum and teaching of sustainable farming practices and equipment needs, plus establishing a scholarship program for students continuing their education in agriculture programs at S.C. State University, Clemson University or the state’s technical colleges. In partnership with the Advocates for Agriculture, a portion of the funding will go toward the establishment of the Martin Eubanks Memorial Gardens at the Governor’s School.
Center for Heirs’ Property Preservation – ($150,000) – The center works to help minority farmers and landowners with the legal aspects of legacy land and timber farming opportunities. These funds will help with the expansion of their services into the Pee Dee region (Florence, Darlington, Marion, Dillon and Marlboro counties).
Future Farmers of America (FFA) – ($200,000) – Funding will provide microgrants to local high school chapters of FFA and will also target all school districts who have agriculture teachers and programs with enrichment grants (130 agriculture teachers through 96 FFA chapters across the state).
“This grant will allow us to expand our sustainable agriculture program here at our school. With the growing world population, we must be proactive in training our future agriculturalists how to sustainably grow our food and fiber,” said Timothy Keown, president of the S.C. Governor’s School for Agriculture. “One of our lofty goals is to grow at least 50% of the food that our students and staff consume in our cafeteria. This will teach our students that self-sustainability is an achievable goal. Without the grant from the Duke Energy Foundation, this goal wouldn’t be possible for years to come.”
“We are so grateful to Duke Energy for including the Center in their generous grant funding,” said Dr. Jennie L. Stephens, CEO for Center for Heirs’ Property Preservation. “We appreciate Duke Energy’s focus on agriculture and their concern for farmers, ranchers and foresters and the issue of Black land loss, particularly in the Pee Dee region of South Carolina. Our mission is to protect heirs’ property and promote the sustainable use of land to provide increased economic benefit to historically underserved landowners. This investment in the Center’s work will make a positive impact on the entire region.”
According to the South Carolina Department of Agriculture, agribusiness is the state’s No. 1 industry, accounting for nearly 250,000 jobs and $46.2 billion in annual economic impact. Farming has historically been a very important player in local economies and continues to have a large impact today in communities across the state.
Much like agribusiness, Duke Energy has played an important role in South Carolina’s economic success for more than a century and continues that impact today. Duke Energy maintains a sizable economic presence in South Carolina as a major employer investing heavily in the region – the company’s current economic impact on the state totals about $7.6 billion annually.
Duke Energy Foundation
The Duke Energy Foundation provides philanthropic support to meet the needs of communities where Duke Energy customers live and work. The foundation contributes more than $30 million annually in charitable gifts, and is funded by Duke Energy shareholder dollars. More information about the foundation and its Powerful Communities program can be found at duke-energy.com/foundation.
Duke Energy (NYSE: DUK), a Fortune 150 company headquartered in Charlotte, N.C., is one of America’s largest energy holding companies. Its electric utilities serve 7.9 million customers in North Carolina, South Carolina, Florida, Indiana, Ohio and Kentucky, and collectively own 51,000 megawatts of energy capacity. Its natural gas unit serves 1.6 million customers in North Carolina, South Carolina, Tennessee, Ohio and Kentucky. The company employs 27,500 people.
Duke Energy is executing an aggressive clean energy strategy to create a smarter energy future for its customers and communities – with goals of at least a 50 percent carbon reduction by 2030 and net-zero carbon emissions by 2050. The company is a top U.S. renewable energy provider, on track to own or purchase 16,000 megawatts of renewable energy capacity by 2025. The company also is investing in major electric grid upgrades and expanded battery storage and exploring zero-emitting power generation technologies such as hydrogen and advanced nuclear.
Duke Energy was named to Fortune’s 2022 “World’s Most Admired Companies” list and Forbes’ “America’s Best Employers” list. More information is available at duke-energy.com. The Duke Energy News Center contains news releases, fact sheets, photos and videos. Duke Energy’s illumination features stories about people, innovations, community topics and environmental issues. Follow Duke Energy on Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram and Facebook.
Media contact: Ryan Mosier
800.559.3853
SOURCE Duke Energy
Economic Benefits of the Bipartisan Budget Agreement in the Short Term and the Long Term
The two-year bipartisan budget agreement announced today is a major step forward for our economy. As our strong domestic economic momentum continues to face headwinds from slowing growth abroad, it is critical to avoid the self-inflicted wounds of past episodes of fiscal brinksmanship. Instead this agreement strengthens both short- and long-run growth, setting the stage for more, higher-paid jobs.
Today’s budget agreement includes $80 billion in sequester cap relief over the next two years, plus $31 billion in additional funding. The agreement is front-loaded, with $50 billion of that sequester cap relief and roughly $16 billion of additional funding coming this fiscal year, constituting nearly 90 percent of the discretionary sequester relief for 2016 proposed in the President’s Budget. The sequester relief is paid for over ten years by a mix of spending reforms, stronger tax compliance measures for large partnerships like hedge funds and private equity firms, and other measures. In addition, the bill would provide up-front premium relief in Medicare Part B paid for over several years, avoiding a roughly 50% increase in Part B premiums.
THREE MAJOR ECONOMIC IMPACTS OF TODAY’S BUDGET AGREEMENT
1. The direct effect of the agreement will result in an estimated 340,000 additional jobs in 2016 and a total of 500,000 job-years added in 2016 and 2017, based on analysis of recent estimates from the Congressional Budget Office (CBO). Under this agreement, federal budget authority will rise by $111 billion over the next two years, directly boosting output and supporting aggregate demand. Although the economic recovery has made substantial progress, there is still some slack, and as a result analysts including CBO estimate that avoiding unnecessary austerity will result in a faster pace of job creation and GDP growth. Analysis based on CBO’s recent estimates released in August suggests that the sequester relief in this agreement will add an expected 340,000 jobs and increase the size of our economy by 0.3 percent in 2016. Over the next two years, these estimates suggest that the sequester relief in this agreement would add 500,000 job-years in total.
These estimates are based on an analysis of CBO’s prior estimates of the economic impact of full relief from the sequester in 2016 and 2017, assuming a constant ratio of economic impact to sequester relief in a given calendar year. They include the effects of the agreement relative to current law, which would raise discretionary outlays by about 0.2 percent of GDP in each of the next two years. The estimates omit any aggregate demand effect of avoiding the Medicare Part B premium hike and potential mandatory and revenue offsets.
2. The indirect effect of increased certainty and confidence could further boost job creation and economic growth above the estimates based only on the direct effect. By raising the debt limit, ensuring that the Social Security Disability Insurance program provides full benefits to workers, and putting Congress in position to complete a budget, this legislation will continue our domestic momentum and reduce the recent policy uncertainty that threatened to weigh on economic growth. Several years ago, when Congress forced fiscal crisis after fiscal crisis, the costs to our economy were clear. Consumer and business confidence fell to record lows, and fiscal policy uncertainty cost 900,000 jobs, according to a Macroeconomic Advisers estimate. Conversely, the turn away from manufactured crises since 2013 helped contribute to accelerating job growth and a stronger recovery, and this agreement will extend that positive trend.
3. The legislation also makes possible greater investment in measures to increase our long-run growth and bolster middle-class incomes. The lower pace of global productivity and investment growth across the developed world is one of the most important challenges economic policymakers face in the post-crisis era. Our private sector is fulfilling its end of the bargain, with private investment in research and development growing at the fastest pace since 2007, while public R&D investment has declined as a share of the economy. This agreement will help bring public investment back to the table, facilitating investments in productivity-enhancing areas like education (including important investments in pre-school, K-12 education, and job training) and public R&D. Productivity is one of the key drivers of middle-class incomes, and it is critical to target public investments that promote persistent growth.
Article is courtesy of www.whitehouse.gov and by Jason Furman is the Chairman of the Council of Economic Advisers.
Economic Growth: Investing in Government Assets to Fuel Innovation, Job Creation, and Economic Prosperity – 2016 Budget
The Budget continues to invest in efforts to open up Government-generated assets, including data and the results of federally funded research and development — such as intellectual property and scientific knowledge — to the public. Through these efforts, the Government can empower citizens and businesses to increase the return on investment with innovation, job creation and economic prosperity gained through their use of open Government data and research results. The use of this data and scientific knowledge has impacted the private sector, including fueling innovative start-up companies and creating American jobs, increasing the transparency of retirement plans, helping consumers uncover fraudulent charges on their credit card bills, assisting potential homebuyers in making informed housing decisions, and creating new life-changing technologies, such as leading-edge vaccines.
3.3.1
Opening Data to Spark Innovation
The Administration places a high priority on opening Government data as fuel for private sector innovation and public use. Since 2009, the Administration has released over 75,000 data sets to the public, while continuing to protect individual privacy, with over 67,000 of these data sets released in the last year alone. These data sets include everything from credit card complaints, to weather and climate measurements, to what different hospitals charge for different procedures. In demonstrating its commitment to open data, the Administration has developed performance metrics to measure agency progress in reaching open data goals, provided tools to make it easier for Federal agencies to publish data, and released guidance to agencies on how to engage with the community to identify priority data sets for release. The Administration continues to invest in and support efforts to unlock Federal data sets with a high potential for economic impact, including in the areas of health care, energy, education, employment, public safety, tourism, and agriculture. In addition, the Administration is committed to fueling the open data ecosystem by taking steps to connect agencies, entrepreneurs, and other innovators. The Budget provides $16 million for E-Government initiatives in GSA’s Federal Citizen Services Fund, supporting important IT investments including open data and digital Government initiatives. While emphasizing the opening of Federal data, safeguarding the privacy, confidentiality, and security of sensitive information is of the utmost importance, and agencies are required to do thorough reviews of their data prior to publication to ensure no sensitive information is released.
3.3.2
Accelerating and Institutionalizing Lab-to-Market Practices
As discussed in the chapter on Investing in America’s Future, the Budget invests $146 billion in research and development (R&D) across Government. The Federal Government’s investment in R&D yields extraordinary long-term economic impact through the creation of new knowledge, new jobs, and ultimately new industries. The Federal R&D enterprise must continue to support fundamental research that is motivated primarily by an interest in expanding the frontiers of human knowledge and diffusing this knowledge through open data and publications. At the same time, economic growth can be accelerated through more effective transition of R&D results from the laboratory to the marketplace, based on close collaboration with industry.
The Budget reflects the Administration’s commitment to accelerating the transfer of the results of federally funded research to the commercial marketplace by proposing increased funding for technology transfer from Federal labs in the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and for the National Science Foundation’s (NSF) public-private Innovation Corps (I-Corps) program. In response to the President’s 2011 Memorandum on Accelerating Technology Transfer and Commercialization, the Budget proposes an additional $4 million for NIST efforts to accelerate and expand technology transfer across the Federal Government, which will enhance the competitiveness of U.S. industry by sharing innovations and knowledge from Federal laboratories. The Budget also proposes $30 million for the public-private I-Corps program at NSF aimed at bringing together the technological, entrepreneurial, and business know-how necessary to bring discoveries ripe for innovation out of the university lab.
Another example of federally funded R&D powering marketplace innovation can be seen in the Department of Energy’s (DOE) Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy (EERE) Lab-Corps program. This program empowers National Laboratory teams to identify market applications and private sector partners to commercialize high-impact new EERE technologies. The initial Lab-Corps pilot will be completed by the end of 2015, and in 2016, depending on the results of the pilot, DOE will expand the Lab-Corps program to other laboratory partners.
EcoVadis Gold rating puts ManpowerGroup U.S. in top 5 percent of companies worldwide for Corporate Social Responsibility
MILWAUKEE, — ManpowerGroup U.S. (NYSE: MAN) has been awarded the EcoVadis Gold Recognition Level – the highest Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) rating available – for ethical and responsible employment and business practices, sustainable procurement and environmental management.
The average score across companies assessed by EcoVadis is 42.4 – ManpowerGroup U.S. scored well above the average at 64. There are now 12 ManpowerGroup countries worldwide to achieve EcoVadis Gold and Silver ratings.
“Doing well by doing good begins with ensuring we are best in class for our own business practices. This award demonstrates we do just that,” said Becky Frankiewicz, president of ManpowerGroup North America.”We believe sustainability starts at home. And it’s our people who make this happen. I am proud of the work our teams do every day to deliver on our purpose – that meaningful and sustainable employment has the power to change the world. This is how we will continue to create value for our clients and candidates.”
In order to certify CSR performance, EcoVadis, the world leader in the evaluation of supplier sustainability, takes an evidence-based approach usings 21 indicators aligned to international standards including the United Nations Global Compact Principles, International Labour Organization (ILO) conventions, Global Reporting Initiative standards, the ISO 26000 standard, the CERES Roadmap, and the UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights.
To find out more about ManpowerGroup’s Sustainability Plan, visit doingwellbydoinggood.manpowergroup.com.
About ManpowerGroupManpowerGroup (NYSE: MAN), the leading global workforce solutions company, helps organizations transform in a fast-changing world of work by sourcing, assessing, developing and managing the talent that enables them to win. We develop innovative solutions for over 400,000 clients and connect 3+ million people to meaningful, sustainable work across a wide range of industries and skills. Our expert family of brands – Manpower®, Experis®, Right Management® and ManpowerGroup® Solutions – creates substantially more value for candidates and clients across 80 countries and territories and has done so for nearly 70 years. In 2017, ManpowerGroup was named one of the World’s Most Ethical Companies for the seventh consecutive year and one of Fortune’s Most Admired Companies, confirming our position as the most trusted and admired brand in the industry. See how ManpowerGroup is powering the future of work: www.manpowergroup.com
Employ ‘Enormous Potential’ of People with Autism, Secretary-General Urges in Message for World Awareness Day
I am hugely encouraged by the growing public awareness of autism spectrum disorders and the increase of public services to many of those affected. World Autism Awareness Day not only fosters greater understanding, it empowers parents into seeking early intervention therapies and calls for the full integration of persons with autism into society. It also invites policymakers to encourage schools to open their doors to students with autism. With adequate support, they can — and should — be educated in the heart of their communities. Now is the time for even greater access and work opportunities for persons with autism.
This year, I am pleased to launch an employment “Call to Action”, inviting businesses to make concrete commitments to employ people on the autism spectrum. We encourage public offices, corporations and small businesses to have a closer look at the way they perceive people with autism, to take the time to learn about the condition and to create life-changing opportunities.
People with autism have enormous potential. Most have remarkable visual, artistic or academic skills. Thanks to the use of assistive technologies, non-verbal persons with autism can communicate and share their hidden capabilities. Recognizing the talents of persons on the autism spectrum, rather than focusing on their weaknesses, is essential to creating a society that is truly inclusive.
Yet, even where autism awareness is most advanced, more than 80 per cent of adults with autism are unemployed. That is why it is so important for employers to understand their unique and often exceptional skills, and to enable work environments where they can excel. This important mission can only be achieved with appropriate vocational training and adequate support alongside a recruitment process that can allow people to successfully integrate into workforces around the world.
The United Nations General Assembly has called for greater access and opportunities for persons with autism. In declaring 2 April as World Autism Awareness Day, the Assembly also called for training for public administrators, service providers, caregivers, families and non-professionals to support the integration of persons with autism into society, so that they can realize their full potential.
On World Autism Awareness Day, let us join forces to create the best possible conditions for those with autism, so that they can make their own contribution to a future that is fair and sustainable for all.
Employee Stock of $4m Recovered By USLD
SAN FRANCISCO — The U.S. Department of Labor today announced that it obtained a consent order requiring the fiduciaries of the Parrot Cellular Employee Stock Ownership Plan to pay $4,181,818 to the plan. The settlement resolves a suit filed in April 2012 after an investigation by the department’s Employee Benefits Security Administration found violations of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act. The department alleged that plan fiduciaries caused or permitted the ESOP to purchase Parrot Cellular stock for more than fair market value.
The suit, filed in the U.S. District Court for the Northern District of California, named as defendants Dennis Webb, the principal owner of California-based Entrepreneurial Ventures Inc.; Matthew Fidiam and J. Robert Gallucci, EVI executives and ESOP trustees; and Consulting Fiduciaries Inc., an Illinois company that served as the independent fiduciary for the ESOP during a November 2002 stock purchase. EVI operates Parrot Cellular telephone retail stores and is the sponsor of the worker retirement plan.
“Employee stock ownership plans can have great benefits for workers, but only if they adhere to the laws that govern them,” said Secretary of Labor Thomas E. Perez. “We are very pleased to have resolved this matter in a way that brings the plan into compliance with the law and benefits the plan’s participants.”
“Officials responsible for employee stock ownership plans are legally required to act prudently and solely in the interests of plan participants when purchasing or selling employer stock,” said Assistant Secretary of Labor for Employee Benefits Security Phyllis C. Borzi. “This is true for all fiduciaries of all employee benefit plans covered by ERISA.”
Under the terms of the settlement agreement, Consulting Fiduciaries agreed to pay $2 million to the ESOP to settle the allegations. Webb, Fidiam and Gallucci agreed to collectively pay $1.5 million to the ESOP, and Webb agreed to pay an additional $681,818 to the ESOP.
COURTESY: US LABOR DEPARTMENT
Employers Report Strong Hiring across Many Markets, Driven by Uptick in Asia Pacific, U.S. and Eastern Europe
MILWAUKEE, — Employers globally are reporting positive hiring intentions as those in 41 of 43 countries forecast an increase in staffing levels in Q1 2018, according to the latest ManpowerGroup Employment Outlook Survey.
ManpowerGroup. (PRNewsFoto/ManpowerGroup) (PRNewsFoto/)
The strongest Outlooks globally are reported in the U.S., Japan, Taiwan and India. Employers in Australia, Japan, Norway, Romania and the U.S. are reporting the healthiest hiring plans in five years or more.
Outlooks among employers in Eastern Europe, and Greece outpace those in Western Europe. Employers in Austria and Italy report the weakest Outlooks across Europe and the globe while job prospects remain upbeat in Romania, Hungary and Poland. In Spain and Portugal, employers report more optimistic Outlooks year-over-year while in the UK, Germany and Belgium they report weaker (yet still positive) hiring intentions. In the UK, concerns over Brexit may be impacting employer confidence as the overall forecast dips to its weakest level since 2012.
View complete Q1 2018 survey results: www.manpowergroup.com/meos
“The first quarter of 2018 is looking bright for jobseekers with employment Outlooks improving in many markets,” said Jonas Prising, ManpowerGroup Chairman & CEO. “Employers across the globe and especially in the U.S, Asia Pacific and parts of Europe are positive across a number of sectors, and people with in-demand skills will find themselves in high demand. Employers will need to work hard to attract and develop people with the skills they need to remain competitive. As globalization and digital transformation impact different countries and industries at different times, upskilling and reskilling tomorrow’s workforce for available jobs will be critical for long-term employability. The future looks positive, providing we help people develop the skills they need to capture these opportunities.”
Of the nearly 59,000 employers surveyed across 43 countries and territories confidence levels have strengthened year-on-year in 25 countries and territories.
Global Hiring Plans by Region
EMEA: Staffing levels are expected to grow in 23 of 25 countries surveyed with flat labor markets in the remaining two.
Employers in Romania and Slovenia report the strongest hiring plans in the EMEA region.
German employers report strong hiring intentions in Finance and Business Services with employers in Frankfurt and Munich reporting the most optimistic Outlooks.
The Outlook in France remains modest, with employers in Finance and Construction reporting the biggest year-over-year headcount growth.
Asia Pacific: Employers expect staffing levels to increase in all eight countries and territories with hiring sentiment strongest in Taiwan. The most cautious Outlook in the region is reported in China.
Australia is forecasting the strongest labor market in more than six years with an Outlook of +14%.
Hiring confidence in Japan remains solid with employers reporting the most optimistic forecast since 2007. Hiring activity is strongest in Transportation and Utilities, and Mining and Construction sectors.
Hiring intentions in India improve for the second consecutive quarter following the country’s weakest historical Outlook from Q3 2017. Increased opportunities for job seekers are expected in all seven industry sectors and across each of the four regions.
Americas: Positive Outlooks are reported in all 10 countries surveyed. U.S. employers report the region’s most upbeat forecast, with more than one in every five surveyed saying they intend to hire in the January-March time frame.
U.S. employers report the strongest Outlook in ten years, driven by optimism in Construction, Manufacturing and Transportation and Utilities sectors.
Canada’s Outlook improves for the third consecutive quarter. Hiring intentions are the most optimistic reported since Quarter 4 2013.
Hiring in Mexico remains favorable despite uncertainties associated with ongoing NAFTA negotiations. Forecasts are positive in all industry sectors and regions with the strongest Outlooks reported by employers in the Manufacturing and Transport & Communications sectors.
To view complete results for the ManpowerGroup Employment Outlook Survey, visit www.manpowergroup.com/meos. The next survey will be released 13 March 2018 and will report hiring expectations for Q2 2018.
*The Net Employment Outlook is derived by taking the percentage of employers anticipating an increase in hiring activity and subtracting from this the percentage of employers expecting a decrease in hiring activity.
About ManpowerGroup
ManpowerGroup (NYSE: MAN), the leading global workforce solutions company, helps organizations transform in a fast-changing world of work by sourcing, assessing, developing and managing the talent that enables them to win. We develop innovative solutions for over 400,000 clients and connect 3+ million people to meaningful, sustainable work across a wide range of industries and skills. Our expert family of brands – Manpower, Experis, Right Management and ManpowerGroup Solutions – creates substantially more value for candidates and clients across 80 countries and territories and has done so for nearly 70 years. In 2017, ManpowerGroup was named one of the World’s Most Ethical Companies for the seventh consecutive year and one of Fortune’s Most Admired Companies, confirming our position as the most trusted and admired brand in the industry. See how ManpowerGroup is powering the future of work: www.manpowergroup.com
Encouraging Signs in Latest Jobs Numbers – US economy adds 295,000 jobs in February
The latest Employment Situation report shows that the economic winds remained at our back in February, with the addition of 295,000 new jobs. Here’s what else you should know:
We’ve now seen 12 months in a row of at least 200,000 new jobs, the longest such streak in nearly 20 years.
For five years now – 60 uninterrupted months – private sector employment growth has continued unabated to the tune of more than 12 million jobs overall.
The labor market continues to strengthen, as the economy has increasingly added middle- and high-wage jobs over the last two years.
The unemployment rate of 5.5 percent is the lowest it’s been since the spring of 2008.
And in 2014, unemployment fell in all 50 states for the first time in 30 years.
But this isn’t a moment to take a victory lap or spike the football. We’re doing very well, but we can do even better, especially with so many working families still not being lifted by the rising tide. That’s why the president is resolute in his belief and pursuit of middle-class economics. That’s why he wants to eliminate barriers to education and prepare more people for 21st-century jobs. That’s why he believes we should fix our broken immigration system and fix our crumbling roads and bridges, which are stifling economic growth.
We must help more people reap the benefits of a growing economy, ensuring that no one gets left on the sidelines as this recovery continues to gather steam. That’s the idea behind the president’s My Brother’s Keeper initiative, launched a year ago to close opportunity gaps facing boys and young men of color. This week, the White House released a one-year report demonstrating progress toward MBK goals, with nearly 200 local leaders answering the call to mobilize their communities toward concrete action on these pressing challenges.
Middle-class economics also means the security of a dignified retirement after years of hard work. So last month at the president’s direction, the Labor Department took an important step toward updating the rules governing retirement advice, to ensure that financial advisers are putting their clients’ interests above their own.
There is every reason to be bullish about the direction of our economy. But there’s every reason also to believe we can work together on common-sense, bipartisan solutions that will lead to even greater job growth and shared prosperity in the months and years to come.
Energy Institute Report Finds That Potential New EPA Carbon Regulations Will Damage U.S. Economy
WASHINGTON, D.C.—The Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) plans to regulate carbon dioxide emissions from power plants will cost America’s economy over $50 billion a year between now and 2030, according to a new report issued by the U.S. Chamber of Commerce’s Institute for 21st Century Energy.
The report, Assessing the Impact of Potential New Carbon Regulations in the United States, estimates the economic impacts associated with an EPA regulatory regime imposed under Section 111 of the Clean Air Act and based on the Obama Administration’s emissions reduction goals.
“Americans deserve to have an accurate picture of the costs and benefits associated with the administration’s plans to reduce carbon dioxide emissions through unprecedented and aggressive EPA regulations,” said Karen Harbert, president and CEO of the Energy Institute. “Our analysis shows that Americans will pay significantly more for electricity, see slower economic growth and fewer jobs, and have less disposable income, while a slight reduction in carbon emissions will be overwhelmed by global increases.”
The analysis found that EPA’s potential new carbon regulations would:
-Lower U.S. Gross Domestic Product (GDP) by $51 billion on average every year through 2030
-Lead to 224,000 fewer U.S. jobs on average every year through 2030
-Force U.S. consumers to pay $289 billion more for electricity through 2030
-Lower total disposable income for U.S. households by $586 billion through 2030
With global carbon emissions expected to rise by 31% between 2011 and 2030, the Energy Institute’s analysis found that EPA regulations would reduce this overall emissions level by just 1.8 percentage points.
The Energy Institute commissioned the respected research and analytics firm IHS to conduct the modeling and analysis. As a basis for the study, the Energy Institute utilized a proposal from the Natural Resources Defense Council (NRDC) that many expect will be similar to EPA’s anticipated proposal. Using the NRDC policy framework, along with the proprietary outlook from IHS Inc. on energy efficiency and power demand, the Energy Institute report then assesses the costs and market impacts of meeting the Obama Administration’s emissions target of 42% reductions below 2005 levels by 2030. The conclusions are those of the Energy Institute.
The Energy Institute’s analysis includes only the costs for the new and existing power plant carbon dioxide regulations. All other EPA regulations, such as the Mercury and Air Toxic Standards and the Cross-State Air Pollution Rule, are built into the reference case.
Different regions of the country will see profoundly different impacts from these rules. Generally, the largest impacts on jobs and the economy will be in the South Atlantic, West South Central, and East North Central census divisions. The South power region will see the biggest increases in electricity costs by far.
To read the entire report, visit www.energyxxi.org/epa-regs
The mission of the U.S. Chamber’s Institute for 21st Century Energy is to unify policymakers, regulators, business leaders, and the American public behind a common sense energy strategy to help keep America secure, prosperous, and clean. Through policy development, education, and advocacy, the Institute is building support for meaningful action at the local, state, national, and international levels.
The U.S. Chamber is the world’s largest business federation representing the interests of more than 3 million businesses and organizations of every size, sector, and region.
This news is courtesy of www.uschamber.com
Ernst & Young LLP launches first-of-its-kind EY Career Path Accelerator to help eliminate barriers to entry and increase the accounting profession’s talent diversity
NEW YORK, Aug. 19, 2021 /PRNewswire/ — Ernst & Young LLP (EY US) has launched the EY Career Path Accelerator, a first-of-its-kind program, providing an alternative path to meeting the 150-credit hour requirement for certified public accountant (CPA) licensure. The accessible and affordable program provides students with job-related learning and skills development to apply to their future careers in the accounting profession. The program is supporting nearly 60 EY US interns in its inaugural cohort.
In order to be eligible for CPA licensure, individuals must complete a total of 150-credit hours of education to sit for the CPA exam. The challenge is that many undergraduate programs typically include only 120-credit hours, leaving students to figure out how to complete the remaining requirements. Some choose to pursue master’s degrees and extend their education for up to a year, but others may have monetary constraints, lack of financial aid or need to enter the workforce as soon as possible.
The EY Career Path Accelerator is designed for students on track to become eligible for CPA licensure who are not pursuing a master’s degree. It provides a series of virtual courses administered by Hult International Business School and hands-on learning through the EY internship program, enabling participants to receive the guidance they need to be successful and equipping them with the future-focused skills and subject matter knowledge that they’ll need upon entering the workforce.
“While there are several different pathways for students to meet the requirements to be eligible for CPA licensure, time and financial resources can limit the choices or feasibility for a significant number of students, particularly those from marginalized or socioeconomically disadvantaged backgrounds,” said Ginnie Carlier, EY Americas Vice Chair – Talent. “With this program we’re not only helping students jump-start their accounting careers earlier, but we also hope to attract the next generation of transformative leaders, while equipping them with relevant, future-focused skills and the mentorship necessary to succeed.”
The EY Career Path Accelerator provides students with accredited business and elective courses that can be applied to the 150-credit hour CPA licensure requirement. These additional credits such as data visualization, digital learning and others made available through the EY Career Path Accelerator can be earned on a schedule that is compatible with students’ work or family obligations.
As a leader in the accounting profession, EY US takes a strong interest in maintaining a vibrant and growing pool of transformative leaders. But even as demand for CPAs continues to grow, data from the most recent AICPA Trends Report 20191 shows the number of CPA exam candidates decreased by 7% between 2017 and 2018.
“We believe that addressing barriers to equity and inclusion enhances our ability – as a firm and as a profession – to attract and to grow the next generation of CPAs. This program is one step toward improving diverse representation across the EY organization and within the field of accounting,” added John King, EY Americas Vice Chair – Assurance.
The Ernst & Young Foundation has provided more than $100,000 in need-based financial aid to 75% of the inaugural EY Career Path Accelerator cohort.
Additional program benefits and resources include EY academic counselors to support students throughout the program, opportunities for students to engage in a learning pod community with an EY professional, portable credentials with no obligations or commitments to EY US and integrated learning incorporating targeted skills in business, technology and leadership.
About EY
EY exists to build a better working world, helping create long-term value for clients, people and society and build trust in the capital markets.
Enabled by data and technology, diverse EY teams in over 150 countries provide trust through assurance and help clients grow, transform and operate.
Working across assurance, consulting, law, strategy, tax and transactions, EY teams ask better questions to find new answers for the complex issues facing our world today.
EY refers to the global organization, and may refer to one or more, of the member firms of Ernst & Young Global Limited, each of which is a separate legal entity. Ernst & Young Global Limited, a UK company limited by guarantee, does not provide services to clients. Information about how EY collects and uses personal data and a description of the rights individuals have under data protection legislation are available via ey.com/privacy. EY member firms do not practice law where prohibited by local laws. For more information about our organization, please visit ey.com.
1 “Trends in the Supply of Accounting Graduates and the Demand for Public Accounting Recruits,” AICPA website, https://www.aicpa.org/content/dam/aicpa/interestareas/accountingeducation/newsandpublications/downloadabledocuments/2019-trends-report.pdf, 13 August 2019
SOURCE EY
CONTACT: Katarina Wenk-Bodenmiller, Katarina.E.Wenk-Bodenmiller@ey.com, +1 321 749 9942
Related Links
http://www.ey.com
Essential Administrative Tasks to Keep Your Business Running Smoothly – James Hall
Every entrepreneur hates spending valuable time plugging away at administrative tasks. While you didn’t start a business for the tedious day-to-day work, those frustrating tasks are necessary for keeping your company afloat. The good news is that you can delegate, outsource, and automate nearly every administrative task that’s stealing your time away from the projects you’re passionate about. As a bonus, you’ll gain access to expertise and efficiency upgrades that can help your business run even better!
Many small business owners struggle with financial planning. In fact, cash flow issues are the number one reason small businesses fail!
Cibunet shares some other actionable tips to help you streamline those administrative burdens.
Employee Payroll
Paying employees can eat up a lot of your time, especially if your team members work different hours. A solid payroll process will ensure your employees always get paid the correct amount on time, and can also help you avoid violating labor laws. Take advantage of efficient payroll tools like the QuickBooks timesheet calculator so you can start time card tracking like a BOSS. Just remember to include overtime and breaks to ensure employee wages comply with labor laws. Failure to pay overtime can result in a costly labor lawsuit!
Cash Flow Considerations
Good cash flow management will ensure you always have cash on hand to pay your employees—and all those other expenses. Monitoring cash flow is vital to the success of your business. Even if you’re making sales and reporting revenue, your business can go under if you don’t have the cash to pay your bills. If business financials aren’t your strong suit, consider outsourcing your cash flow management to a professional accountant. A great accountant will help you with cash flow reporting, financial risk management, budgeting, and cash flow forecasting so you can stay on top of your business’s financial position.
Managing Invoices
Staying on top of client invoices is essential for maintaining positive cash flow. Without an efficient invoicing process, it can take a very long time for your business to receive money from customers. Implement invoicing strategies to ensure you get paid as fast as possible! For example, you can use automated invoicing tools to schedule payment reminders for customers and enable automatic payments for recurring invoices.
If you have a lot of cash tied up in unpaid invoices, invoice factoring can help you access working capital to pay your bills. Invoice factoring involves selling your accounts receivable to a factoring company that will assume the role of collecting unpaid invoices from your customers.
Inventory Management
Good inventory management is another important element in maintaining positive cash flow. While inventory has the power to generate cash flow, overstocking inventory that exceeds customer demand will tie up your cash in unsellable stock. On the other hand, understocking will leave your business short on sellable items, also hurting your potential cash flow. This is another area that can benefit from automation. Take advantage of inventory management software that will offer accurate inventory tracking and forecasting so you can avoid creating cash flow issues.
Customer Support
Handling customer inquiries and support tickets is an incredibly important administrative task and one that has the potential to become a huge time sink. To streamline customer support, Talkroute suggests using support ticket software to organize inquiries and delegate tasks to team members. Encourage your customers to find solutions on their own before reaching out for support. A library of user-friendly resources and FAQs can help cut down on customer inquiries and free up your time for more complex customer issues.
As an entrepreneur, it’s easy to get lost in your long-term goals. Dreaming about the future of your business is a great way to stay motivated! But don’t neglect the small day-to-day details that keep your business running smoothly. While no one likes administrative tasks, these tedious responsibilities are vital to your long-term success!
Article is by James Hall
Ethiopian Airlines Wins the Prestigious ‘African Champion of the Year’ Award
Ethiopian Airlines, the largest Aviation Group in Africa and SKYTRAX certified Four Star Global Airline, wins the prestigious African Champion of the Year Award on March 26,2019 at the ongoing Africa CEO Forum in Kigali which is being attended by more than 1,800 delegates.
The AFRICA CEO FORUM is the leading international conference dedicated to the private sector in Africa and hosts the continent’s top CEOs, international investors, experts and high-level policy makers every year.
Every year, the AFRICA CEO FORUM AWARDS recognize the companies and investors that have shaped the year in Africa, during the AFRICA CEO FORUM Gala Dinner.
While receiving the awards, Group Chief Executive Officer of Ethiopian Airlines, Mr. Tewolde GebreMariam said, “We are honored to be awarded as African champion. Thank you very much for the strong vote of confidence that Africa has given us even at the most challenging time in our history. We are still mourning for the loss of the lives of our esteemed passengers and colleagues at the tragic accident on ET 302 on 10 March 2019. My sincere sympathy and heartfelt condolences for the families of the victims, the country and the continent of Africa.
But we are very grateful to the traveling public which have stood with us in such difficult time. The vote of confidence is unbelievable. We have never seen such kind of large number of vote of confidence for one of the strongest brands in Africa. Thank you all for all the support you have given us and continue to give us. Together, we will make Africa great and we will put our continent in its right place in the global stage.”
Ethiopian is a multi-award winning airline. On November 8, 2017, SKYTRAX, the most prestigious international air transport standards and quality rating organization, has certified Ethiopian as Four Star Airline. SKYTRAX has also awarded Ethiopian as SKYTRAX World Airline Award for Best Airline Staff in Africa, two times, and earlier in 2017 Ethiopian has received SKYTRAX World Airline Award for Best Airline in Africa.
About Ethiopian
Ethiopian Airlines (Ethiopian) is the fastest growing Airline in Africa. In its seventy plus years of operation, Ethiopian has become one of the continent’s leading carriers, unrivalled in efficiency and operational success.
Ethiopian commands the lion’s share of the Pan-African passenger and cargo network operating the youngest and most modern fleet to more than 119 international passenger and cargo destinations across five continents. Ethiopian fleet includes ultra-modern and environmentally friendly aircraft such as Airbus A350, Boeing 787-8, Boeing 787-9, Boeing 777-300ER, Boeing 777-200LR, Boeing 777-200 Freighter, Bombardier Q-400 double cabin with an average fleet age of five years. In fact, Ethiopian is the first airline in Africa to own and operate these aircraft. Ethiopian is currently implementing a 15-year strategic plan called Vision 2025 that will see it become the leading aviation group in Africa with Six business centers: Ethiopian International Services; Ethiopian Cargo & Logistics Services; Ethiopian MRO Services; Ethiopian Aviation Academy; Ethiopian ADD Hub Ground Services and Ethiopian Airports Services. Ethiopian is a multi-award winning airline registering an average growth of 25% in the past seven years.
EU Requests WTO Panel Over Colombia’s Discrimination Against Imported Spirits
Brussels, 22 August 2016 – The EU today requested the establishment of a WTO panel to rule on a dispute concerning Colombia’s discriminatory treatment of imported spirits.
The EU and Colombia held consultations earlier in the year (8-9 March 2016), however consultations failed to reach a solution to the dispute. While the EU recognizes Colombia’s efforts to bring about reform in the spirits’ regime since the initiation of the dispute, EU spirits continue to be discriminated in the Colombian market.
The EU’s concerns about discrimination of EU spirits in the Colombian market are longstanding. EU spirits are subject to higher taxes and local charges than those applied to local brands. In addition, market restrictions apply in the departments or local subdivisions of Colombia. The departments impose market-access restrictions that distort the competitive conditions in the market to the detriment of EU spirits. This is in contravention of Colombia’s non-discrimination obligations under WTO rules.
Under the bilateral Trade Agreement with the European Union, Colombia committed itself to ending the discrimination by 1 August last year. The EU has raised the issue with Colombia on numerous occasions, including in bilateral meetings, WTO meetings and OECD membership discussions. The European Union continues to support Colombia’s efforts to bring about reform in this sector.
Trade facts and figures
The EU is the number one exporter of spirits to the Colombian market and, as a result, the trading partner most affected by these measures (followed by Mexico, Costa Rica and the United States). In 2014, EU exports of spirits to Colombia – valued at €43 million – represented approximately 14% of total agricultural exports to Colombia and 77% of total Colombian imports of spirits. Within the different spirits exported by the EU to Colombia, whiskies represent the highest shared (€36 million) followed by liqueurs and cordials (€4 million). Colombia produces mainly rums and aguardientes, which account for 83% of spirits consumption in Colombia in 2013 figures (10.8 million 9LC[1], in comparison with 2.3 million cases of imported spirits).
The national consumption tax on spirits was split in two tax brackets in 1995 and has been ‘specific’ since 2002 (Law no 788 of 27 December 2002), meaning that the tax is calculated by percentage point of alcohol content per unit of 0.75 litres. An artificial breakup point is established at 35% of alcoholic content, with the result that most imported products fall into the higher taxation bracket, whereas most locally produced spirits fall into the lower taxation bracket. The situation is similar in the departments (departamentos) – administrative sub-divisions of Colombia – where a local charge is levied instead of the national consumption tax.
Moreover, in Colombia a number of departments exercise the so-called fiscal monopoly over the introduction and commercialisation of spirits. As a result, the entry of imported spirits is subject to the conclusion of ‘introduction contracts’ with the department that contain trade restrictive clauses, impose maximum values and minimum selling prices, and requiring traders to secure the payment of the amount of a future fiscal debt, etc. In addition, the departments enjoy great discretion to arbitrarily deny access to imported brands.
The European Union requested consultations with Colombia under the WTO on 13 January 2016 in DS 502, Colombia- Measures Concerning Imported Spirits; consultations were held on 8-9 March 2016 but failed to find a positive solution to the dispute.
Next steps in WTO dispute settlement procedures
The EU’s request for the establishment of a WTO panel will be discussed at the meeting of the WTO Dispute Settlement Body (DSB) of 2 September. If Colombia does not agree to the establishment of a panel at that meeting, the EU may table a second request at the following DSB meeting which, according to WTO rules, Colombia cannot block.
At any stage of dispute settlement procedures, Colombia can reform the spirits’ regime in Colombia and eliminate the discrimination of imported spirits, thereby prompting that a solution is found without necessarily waiting for adjudication by a WTO panel.
Further information
WTO dispute settlement in a nutshell:
http://ec.europa.eu/trade/policy/accessing-markets/dispute-settlement/
EU-Canada Trade Agreement: Council Adopts Decision To Sign CETA
On 28 October 2016, the Council adopted by written procedure a package of decisions on the comprehensive economic and trade agreement with Canada (CETA), including:
a decision on signature of the agreement
a decision on the provisional application of the agreement
a decision to request the consent of the European Parliament for theconclusion of the agreement
The representatives of the member states also adopted a joint interpretative instrument. This instrument, which is a joint text with Canada, will provide a binding interpretation of CETA´s terms on specific issues.
“I am delighted to confirm that the EU is ready to sign the comprehensive economic and trade agreement with Canada. It represents a milestone in the EU’s trade policy and our commitment to it” said Robert Fico, Prime Minister of Slovakia, currently holding the EU Council presidency. “The CETA represents a modern and progressive deal, opening the door to new opportunities, while protecting important interests. Moreover, it has the potential to set the way forward for future trade deals.”
CETA will remove more than 99% of tariffs that are currently imposed on trade between the EU and Canada. It sets high standards for consumer, environmental and labour protection.
The agreement includes provisions on market access for goods, services, investment and government procurement, as well as on intellectual property rights, sanitary and phytosanitary measures, sustainable development, regulatory cooperation, mutual recognition, trade facilitation, cooperation on raw materials, dispute settlement and technical barriers to trade.
The negotiations with Canada were conducted on the basis of a mandate agreed by the Council in 2009. Following a Council decision in September 2011, talks on investment protection were also started within the CETA framework.
On 5 July 2016, the Commission proposed that the deal be signed and concluded as a “mixed” agreement. This means that on the EU side, it must be signed by both the EU and the member states, and ratified by all relevant national and regional parliaments.
The agreement will be applied on a provisional basis once the European Parliament has consented to its conclusion, pending ratification by all of the member states. Provisional application will concern essentially the provisions of EU exclusive competence.
Strategic partnership agreement
The Council has also adopted a decision on the signing and provisional application of a strategic partnership agreement between the EU and Canada. This agreement seeks to deepen political dialogue and cooperation between the EU and Canada and will strengthen relations in fields such as human rights, international peace and security, economic and sustainable development, justice, freedom and security.
EU-US trade – Seventh Round of Talks on Transatlantic Trade Pact Ends in the US
EU and US officials today ended a 7th round of week-long negotiations in Washington, D.C. (US) on the Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership (TTIP), a new EU-US trade and investment deal. The EU’s Chief TTIP Negotiator, Ignacio Garcia Bercero, made a statement at the end of the round.
We have again had a week of productive discussions. Negotiations are now moving smoothly into the textual phase, where discussions are based on specific textual proposals.
1. Negotiators’ discussions
1.1. Regulatory pillar
During this round, much of the focus has been on the regulatory pillar of the future agreement. This week all the regulatory elements of TTIP were discussed, both in terms of horizontal disciplines (regulatory coherence, TBT, SPS) as well as on specific sectors identified in previous rounds such as pharmaceuticals, cars, chemicals or engineering.
As regards horizontal disciplines, we are now fully engaged in discussions based on textual proposals. An important challenge is going to be to establish a strong framework for cooperation that allows EU and US regulators to tackle new regulatory challenges based on high levels of protection.
On sectors, technical work is making steady progress in identifying concrete outcomes that save unnecessary duplications while fully respecting the mandates of our regulators. This work is very much guided by the regulators, who have again participated actively.
As you know, we consider the regulatory part of TTIP to have the potential to deliver the most benefits. It is also the most challenging part of these negotiations, because it is highly technical and requires the most innovative thinking. Despite this, I believe we are making good progress.
Let me recall three key considerations for our negotiations discussions on the regulatory pillar. These concern standards, the strategic dimension, and compatibility:
1. Standards
We have made an unequivocal and firm commitment: nothing will be done which could lower or endanger the protection of the environment, health, safety, consumers or any other public policy goals pursued by EU or US regulators.
Commissioner-designate Malmström reaffirmed in her European Parliament hearing this Monday that decision-making on new regulations will remain subject to existing democratic controls.
2. Strategic dimension
Enhanced regulatory cooperation is essential if the EU and US wish to play a leading role in developing international regulations and standards based on the highest levels of protection. The regulatory agenda therefore has a clear strategic dimension.
3. Compatibility
TTIP should deliver concrete results in terms of enhanced regulatory compatibility.
1.2. Rules pillar
We also discussed some elements of the rules pillar of the agreement.
We decided to focus our discussions and exchanges on four areas this week:
• energy and raw materials
• customs and trade facilitation
• intellectual property rights (IPR), and
• small- and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs).
1.3. Services
Finally, we also discussed services.
As you know, both the US and the EU put on the negotiating table before summer this year their respective market access offers.
Services offers are highly complex and technical. Our negotiators devoted most of the week to explaining to each other, in great detail, all the elements of those offers.
This is a key step in every negotiation, as we can only make further progress once each side has understood the scope of what the other has put on the table.
I would stress that our approach to services negotiations excludes any commitments on public services: governments remain free to decide at any time that certain services should be provided by the public sector.
2. Stakeholder events
In addition to negotiators’ discussions, a day of stakeholder events took place on Wednesday. I welcome the chance this gave negotiators to spend a full day engaging and exchanging views with representatives of civil society.
We have organised these sessions with stakeholders during each negotiating round. This time again, there were around 330 representatives of various interests and 64 presentations on all the areas covered by the negotiations.
Our engagement with stakeholders sends a clear message on both sides of the Atlantic. We all work on behalf of and for our citizens. So we need to listen to their ideas and respond to their concerns.
We also have the duty to explain the facts and the approach we are taking. Our dialogue must be open to all, continuous and in two directions throughout the negotiating process.
This is the only way we can ensure the final agreement responds to the high ambitions our leaders have set for us and reflects the expectations of our citizens.
I can assure you that Commissioner-Designate Malmström is fully committed to engaging in dialogue with civil society.
3. Political context
Finally, I understand that you will also have questions on how the broader political context is impacting the TTIP negotiations.
On the EU side, President-Elect Juncker highlighted TTIP as one of his 10 priorities for the new Commission. TTIP will therefore continue to have strong political support in the new Commission.
We will also continue working towards an ambitious agreement, and will not compromise on the protection of the environment, health, safety, consumers, data privacy, or any other public policy goals, nor on the right of governments to regulate.
We continue to be fully committed to these negotiations. It is in this spirit that we engaged with our counterparts this week in Washington, to progress as far as possible towards our goal of a comprehensive and innovative trade agreement.
Euro Area Unemployment Rate at 10.9% – Lowest Level for Three Years
The euro area (EA19) seasonally-adjusted unemployment rate was 10.9% in July 2015, down from 11.1% in June 2015, and from 11.6% in July 2014. This is the lowest rate recorded in the euro area since February 2012. The EU28 unemployment rate was 9.5% in July 2015, down from 9.6% in June 2015, and from 10.2% in July 2014.
This is the lowest rate recorded in the EU28 since June 2011. These figures are published by Eurostat, the statistical office of the European Union.
Eurostat estimates that 23.067 million men and women in the EU28, of whom 17.532 million in the euro area, were unemployed in July 2015. Compared with June 2015, the number of persons unemployed decreased by 232 000 in the EU28 and by 213 000 in the euro area. Compared with July 2014, unemployment fell by 1.648 million in the EU28 and by 1.116 million in the euro area.
Member States
Among the Member States, the lowest unemployment rates in July 2015 were recorded in Germany (4.7%), the Czech Republic and Malta (both 5.1%), and the highest in Greece (25.0% in May 2015) and Spain (22.2%). Compared with a year ago, the unemployment rate in July 2015 fell in twenty-three Member States, increased in three and remained stable in Belgium and Romania. The largest decreases were registered in Bulgaria (11.5% to
9.4%), Spain (24.3% to 22.2%), Greece (27.0% to 25.0% between May 2014 and May 2015), Portugal (14.1% to 12.1%), Ireland (11.3% to 9.5%) and Croatia (16.9% to 15.1%). The increases were registered in Finland (8.7% to 9.7%), France (10.3% to 10.4%) and Austria (5.7% to 5.8%).
In July 2015, the unemployment rate in the United States was 5.3%, stable compared to June 2015 and down from 6.2% in July 2014.
Youth unemployment
In July 2015, 4.634 million young persons (under 25) were unemployed in the EU28, of whom 3.093 million were in the euro area. Compared with July 2014, youth unemployment decreased by 465 000 in the EU28 and by 336 000 in the euro area. In July 2015, the youth unemployment rate was 20.4% in the EU28 and 21.9% in the euro area, compared with 22.0% and 23.8% respectively in July 2014. In July 2015, the lowest rates were
observed in Germany (7.0%), Malta (8.7%) and Estonia (9.5% in June 2015), and the highest in Greece (51.8% in May 2015), Spain (48.6%), Croatia (43.1% in the second quarter 2015) and Italy (40.5%).
Geographical coverage
The euro area (EA19) includes Belgium, Germany, Estonia, Ireland, Greece, Spain, France, Italy, Cyprus, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, the Netherlands, Austria, Portugal, Slovenia, Slovakia and Finland.
The European Union (EU28) includes Belgium, Bulgaria, the Czech Republic, Denmark, Germany, Estonia, Ireland, Greece, Spain, France, Croatia, Italy, Cyprus, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Hungary, Malta, the Netherlands, Austria, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovenia, Slovakia, Finland, Sweden and the United Kingdom.
Methods and definition
Eurostat produces harmonised unemployment rates for individual EU Member States, the euro area and the EU. These unemployment rates are based on the definition recommended by the International Labour Organisation (ILO). The measurement is based on a harmonised source, the European Union Labour Force Survey (LFS).
Based on the ILO definition, Eurostat defines unemployed persons as persons aged 15 to 74 who:
– are without work;
– are available to start work within the next two weeks;
– and have actively sought employment at some time during the previous four weeks.
The unemployment rate is the number of people unemployed as a percentage of the labour force.
The labour force is the total number of people employed plus unemployed. In this news release unemployment rates are based on employment and unemployment data covering persons aged 15 to 74.
The youth unemployment rate is the number of people aged 15 to 24 unemployed as a percentage of the labour force of the same age. Therefore, the youth unemployment rate should not be interpreted as the share of jobless people in the overall youth population.
Germany, the Netherlands, Austria, Finland, Sweden and Iceland: the trend component is used instead of the more volatile seasonally adjusted data.
Denmark, Estonia, Hungary, Portugal, the United Kingdom and Norway: 3-month moving averages of LFS data are used instead of pure monthly indicators.
Europe-wide Campaign Launched To Promote Sustainable Work And Healthy Ageing For All
Today in Brussels, the European Commission and the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work (EU-OSHA) in cooperation with the Netherlands EU Presidency launched a two-year Europe-wide campaign:Healthy Workplaces for All Ages, which is the world’s biggest campaign in this area. Focusing on sustainable work and workplace safety and health in the context of the ageing workforce, the campaign provides a timely reminder that the younger workers of today are the older workers of tomorrow.
The campaign focuses on Europe’s enterprises (both private and public) and the need to promote sustainable work and healthy ageing from the beginning of working life. By doing so, they will be protecting their workers’ health up to and beyond retirement age and their organisations’ productivity.
Commissioner Thyssen highlighted the timeliness of this campaign topic: ‘At a time when there are important discussions going on about the future landscape of occupational safety and health in the EU, this campaign is extremely relevant. We need to start now to cater for the needs of Europe’s future workplaces and workers. Workplaces that address the health challenges of an ageing workforce gain in productivity. This is good for workers and good for business.’
The Netherlands’ Presidency representative, Lodewijk Asscher, emphasized the need to make our labour market sustainable for the future. ‘This campaign contributes to it. We need to stimulate employers and workers to invest in employability. After all, using the power of people will always get the best result. It energises people no matter what age. Here, the cradle to the grave concept certainly applies. The sooner you start, the longer you stay healthy and vital, and the better you can cope with change. Because the jobs of today might not exist in the future or might look a lot different to now. Therefore, it is important not to wait until that happens, but to prepare properly in good time.’
Christa Sedlatschek, Director of EU-OSHA, underlined the business case for this campaign topic: ‘By focusing on sustainable working throughout working life, not only can all workers better protect their health, but companies are likely to see major benefits too. Healthy workers are productive workers, and productive workers are essential to any effective organisation: it’s a win–win situation. We therefore highly value the cooperation between EU-OSHA and our focal points, official campaign partners and media partners and thank them for all their efforts in previous campaigns. We look forward to working with them again over the next two years.’
This campaign’s objectives are four-fold:
to promote sustainable work and healthy ageing from the beginning of working life;
to highlight the importance of risk prevention throughout working life;
to assist employers and workers (including in small and medium-sized enterprises) by providing information and tools for managing occupational safety and health in the context of an ageing workforce;
to facilitate information and good practice exchange.
This campaign topic is based on a European Parliament project conducted by EU-OSHA, ‘Safer and healthier work at any age’, along with various other EU-OSHA reports on safety and health in the context of the ageing workforce. As part of this new campaign, EU-OSHA is also releasing an e-guide on managing safety and health for an ageing workforce.
Background
The Healthy Workplaces for All Ages 2016-17 campaign raises awareness of the importance of good occupational safety and health management and risk prevention throughout the working life and of tailoring work to individual abilities — whether at the start of a worker’s career or at its close. Like previous Healthy Workplaces Campaigns, it is coordinated at national level by EU-OSHA’s focal points and supported by official campaign and media partners.
The campaign has been launched on 15 April 2016. Key dates in the campaign calendar include the European Weeks for Safety and Health at Work (October 2016 and 2017) and the Healthy Workplaces Good Practice Awards ceremony (April 2017). The campaign will end with the Healthy Workplaces Summit (November 2017), when all those who have contributed to the campaign will come together with EU-OSHA to take stock of the campaign’s achievements and the lessons learnt.
The European Agency for Safety and Health at Work (EU-OSHA) contributes to making Europe a safer, healthier and more productive place to work. The Agency researches, develops, and distributes reliable, balanced, and impartial safety and health information and organises pan-European awareness raising campaigns. Set up by the European Union in 1994 and based in Bilbao, Spain, the Agency brings together representatives from the European Commission, Member State governments, employers’ and workers’ organisations, as well as leading experts in each of the EU Member States and beyond.
You can follow the agency on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, YouTube or subscribe to its monthly newsletter OSHmail. You can also register for regular news and information from EU-OSHA via RSS feeds.
European Commission and World Bank Sign Agreement to Boost Development Cooperation
WASHINGTON, – The European Commission and the World Bank Group signed a Framework Agreement on Friday, 15 April 2016, to further their cooperation on the implementation of development projects across the globe. This agreement sets the terms under which the World Bank will disburse EU budget money on development projects on the ground.
World Bank Vice President Axel van Trotsenburg said, “The challenges faced by our clients are increasingly complex and require innovative thinking and partnerships. This agreement with the European Commission reinforces the EC’s role as a key partner in our strategic, policy and operational efforts to reach the goal of ending extreme poverty and increasing shared prosperity.”
“With this agreement, we’re upgrading the strategic partnership between the European Commission and the World Bank to fight poverty around the world. We can accelerate delivery of our funds and increase the transparency of our joint projects for the benefit of people in the developing countries,” said European Commission Vice-President, Kristalina Georgieva, at the signing ceremony.
The European Commission and the World Bank first signed a cooperation agreement in 2001. The current document is a revision of an agreement dating from 2014. The revision of the agreement adjusts to the revised funding model of the World Bank, with clarified remuneration, accountability, simplification and increased transparency.
For the period 2010–2015, the European Commission has contributed over two billion euro to the World Bank Trust Funds, thus becoming the third biggest contributor.
The money has mainly gone to Africa (48%) and South Asia (26%), and has enabled the implementation of projects including in the areas of public administration and law (31%), health and social services (19%), and education (17%).
European Space Agency Business Incubator For Space Technology Opens in Portugal
Incubation Centre has opened in Portugal, ready to help entrepreneurs and start-up companies take space technology and services into non-space areas such as health, transport and energy.
Over the coming five years, the centre will help 30 Portuguese start-up companies to get their businesses going, creating at least 120 local high-tech jobs.
The companies will receive €1.5 million as seed incentive and be able to tap into an additional €7 million.
ESA incubator in Coimbra
The new incubator is managed by the University of Coimbra’s Instituto Pedro Nunes, or IPN, in collaboration with Science and Technology Park at University of Porto and DNA Cascais, a non-profit organisation that fosters entrepreneurship in Cascais and the greater Lisbon region.
With 18 years’ experience in business incubation, the institute has supported more than 200 technology and innovation projects.
At the inauguration on 5 November during the fifth Portuguese Space Forum, the management agreements were signed by Franco Ongaro, ESA Director of Technical and Quality Management, and Prof. Teresa Mendes, IPN President of the Board of Directors.
Incubator launch
Carlos Cerqueira, IPN’s Head of Innovation, noted that the new centre “has unique characteristics since it promotes the creation of start-ups based on state-of-the-art technologies tested in space applications, providing these new companies with the potential to create ‘disruptive’ innovations tailored for the global markets.”
The event was also attended by Portugal’s Minister of Economy, António Pires de Lima, Minister of Education and Science, Nuno Crato, Rector of the University of Coimbra, João Gabriel, and Vice President of Fundação para a Ciência e a Tecnologia (the national funding agency for science, technology and innovation), Pedro Carneiro.
Prof. Mendes added that the incubator helps “to accomplish IPN’s mission to support the technology transfer process and to stimulate the creation of new economic activity and skilled jobs in Portugal.”
Portuguese industry steps up in space
The Forum also saw a contract signed with Portugual’s Tekeve for the intersatellite communications link on ESA’s Proba-3 formation-flying mission.
The two satellites will accurately hold position at a distance of 150 m or more.
This contract highlights a key technology contributionby Portuguese companies in a very advanced mission.
Fairfield Inn & Suites Launches “Everyday Connect” to Mentor Next Generation Business Travelers
Bethesda, Md., Everyday is an opportunity to connect, to be inspired by others and to use the power of professional networks to realize a dream. Fairfield Inn & Suites by Marriott is helping future business travelers with the launch of “Everyday Connect,” a multimedia resource offering college graduates career insights from young entrepreneurs who were featured on this year’s Forbes 30 Under 30 list.
The campaign, housed on Tumblr at http://everyday-connect.com, starts a conversation with young professionals and reinforces the idea that the next generation of business leaders needs to invest in real, meaningful relationships to help propel their careers. It reminds college graduates, entering a challenging job market, to take the time now at the start of their professional journey to build long-lasting relationships that will inspire them to succeed in whatever they choose to do.
“Everyday Connect” features short films, infographics, tips and survey data to help graduates identify opportunities and build their own professional network. Fairfield enlisted four entrepreneurs from various industries to share their thoughts on the power of mentorship and personal connections. “Everyday Connect” program ambassadors include Mark Arnoldy, Executive Director at Possible Health; Eden Full, Founder, SunSaluter; Meg Gill, President/Co-Founder, Golden Road Brewing; and Kane Sarhan, Co-Founder of [E]nstitute.
“At Fairfield, we see ourselves as a partner for business travelers on the road, helping them keep their momentum strong and stay connected with people who matter to them,” said Shruti Buckley, vice president and global brand manager, Fairfield Inn & Suites. “Everyday Connect is an engaging way for us to share some wisdom from our exceptional group of mentors and offer the next generation some tips and advice that will help them achieve their goals.”
A survey conducted by Fairfield Inn & Suites among 1,000 employed adults over the age of 21 nationwide revealed:
Seventy-seven percent of people are willing to help college graduates find work.
Forty-nine percent of respondents claim to have a mentor in their profession.
Recognition is not of significant importance to people who help others in their professional network – only 51 percent of respondents said that this mattered to them.
A phone call is the generally preferred method of acknowledgment, with 91 percent of respondents saying this is an appropriate way to express appreciation, followed by a thank-you card (88 percent), or an e-mail (81 percent). A post on a social media network will sooner suffice (27 percent) than flowers (26 percent).
Sixty-six percent of respondents acknowledged the power of personal relationships in helping them maintain momentum in their careers.
The survey data reveals that there is a strong inclination among working adults to help young people at the start of their careers find work. A large majority of respondents cite personal connections as helping them in their careers, and almost half say they have a mentor in their profession, demonstrating there is a willingness to pay forward the support and guidance they have received. In a digital world, survey respondents revealed a great interest in maintaining the lines of communication open.
Cosumers Get Chance to Reconnect and Reunite Through “Everyday Connect”
Fairfield is not only providing practical advice and information with the “Everyday Connect” campaign, but it is also extending the opportunity to consumers to reconnect and reunite with the people who have helped them succeed in their careers. Starting June 2, a series of questions will be posted via the brand’s Twitter handle – over a four-week period around the power of personal connections. Based on the responses, five winners will be chosen and given a trip to reunite with the mentor of their choice in New York City as well as meet with the campaign’s influencers. Click here for full contest details:
Fairfield Inn & Suites by Marriott
Fairfield Inn & Suites by Marriott is designed for today’s traveler who is looking to be productive on the road, whether for business or leisure. In addition to complimentary Wi-Fi and hot breakfast, Fairfield Inn & Suites offers thoughtfully designed rooms and suites that provide separate living, working and sleeping areas. With more than 700 properties throughout the United States, Canada, Mexico, and India, Fairfield Inn & Suites hotels participate in the award-winning Marriott Rewards® frequent travel program that allows members to earn hotel points or airline miles for every dollar spent during each stay. For more information or reservations, visit www.fairfieldinn.com, become a fan at www.facebook.com/fairfieldinnandsuites or follow Fairfield at www.twitter.com/fairfieldhotels.
Visit Marriott International, Inc. (NASDAQ: MAR) for company information. For more information or reservations, please visit our website at www.marriott.com, and for the latest company news, visit www.marriottnewscenter.com.
Famous Amos Announces Second Cycle of $150,000 Grants and Mentorship to Businesses Through the ‘Ingredients for Success Entrepreneurs Initiative’
CHICAGO, – Today, Famous Amos, in partnership with the National Black Chamber of Commerce (NBCC), announces the second cycle of the Famous Amos Ingredients for Success Entrepreneurs Initiative, a grant and mentorship program that aims to provide the necessary tools and resources to help Black business owners thrive.
The program features a pitch contest, in which prospective recipients submit an application that includes a videotaped elevator pitch and a written statement sharing the nature of their business, why it has the makings of a successful enterprise, and how they plan on using the funds to build a lasting operation. In sum, three business owners will receive $50,000 in unrestricted capital from Famous Amos, totaling $150,000 in cash awards. In addition, a full suite of mentoring and coaching resources will be provided by the National Black Chamber of Commerce.
Three business owners will receive $50,000 each in unrestricted capital from Famous Amos, and coaching from the NBCC.
“We established the Famous Amos Ingredients for Success Entrepreneurs Initiative to support Black businesses and to honor the legacy of the brand’s founder, Mr. Wally Amos,” said Rachna Patel, Senior Director of Marketing for Famous Amos. “In addition to the grants Famous Amos awards, we feel it is equally important to offer resources such as mentorship, coaching, and networking, which are provided by our community partner, the National Black Chamber of Commerce.”
The challenges Black businesses face on the road to sustainability are steep and plenty. According to a report from the Brookings Institution, Black people comprise approximately 14% of the U.S. population, but only 2.3% of owners of employer firms. Findings from the Federal Reserve System’s 2021 Small Business Credit Survey showed that most small business owners reported experiencing financial hardship during the early stages of the pandemic, but the highest rate was reported by Black business owners: 92%. The same survey also pointed to challenges for Black businesses getting capital they needed to survive the pandemic, with only 43% of Black firms receiving the Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) loans they applied for, compared to a 79% of White-owned firms.
Lower personal wealth among Black entrepreneurs also inhibits business creation, the report noted, underscoring the need for programs like the Famous Amos Ingredients for Success Entrepreneurs Initiative to provide business capital that Black businesses need to invigorate their operations.
In addition, according to a recent story by CNBC, nearly 8 out of 10 Black-owned companies usually do not survive the first 18 months. Famous Amos strongly believes that pairing these entrepreneurs early on with financial resources and mentorship is a key ingredient to contribute to a more positive direction.
“We are energized by our mission to economically empower Black businesses and communities,” said Charles H. DeBow, III, CEO, National Black Chamber of Commerce. “We look forward to the continued partnership with Famous Amos, and to providing coaching and mentorship that will help propel grant recipients to further success in their endeavors.”
Ten national finalists will be selected, judged, and narrowed down to three recipients by some of the nation’s foremost Black business leaders including Mandy Bowman, Founder of Official Black Wall Street; Steve Canal, CEO of Flourysh; Roby Mercharles, VP of Partnerships at The American Dream Fund & Marketplace; and Nancey Harris and Tracy Green, Co-Founders of Vontelle, LLC, one of three businesses selected from the first cycle of the Famous Amos Ingredients for Success Entrepreneurs Initiative.
To qualify, businesses must be Black-owned and have been in operation for five years or less. For official rules and eligibility requirements, and to apply now, please visit https://famousamosingredientsforsuccess.info. All entries must be submitted by June 26, 2022 at 11:59 p.m. Eastern Daylight Time.
About Famous Amos
The Famous Amos story began in 1975 at a bakery on Sunset Boulevard in Hollywood, California. Inspired by a family recipe, the founder Wally Amos perfected the ultimate chocolate chip cookie. He used only the best ingredients to make his bite-size cookies. This delicious homemade signature helped them gain fame just by word of mouth. From there, the Famous Amos story becomes a Hollywood success story. Iconic musicians and other Hollywood celebrities began singing the praises of delicious tiny cookies from the small bakery on Sunset.
This was just the beginning of the Famous Amos story. It was always a core belief of Wally Amos that you make a tastier cookie if you use high-quality ingredients. While this has never changed, what customers looked for in a cookie did. They want simpler ingredients and internationally inspired recipes. So, we set out to find the ingredients from the most renowned places in the world and bring the bite-size cookies back to once again being Famous. That brings us to today, and we hope you enjoy our new Famous Amos Wonders From The World™.
About the National Black Chamber of Commerce (NBCC):
The NBCC is a nonprofit, nonpartisan, nonsectarian organization dedicated to the economic empowerment of African American communities. 140 affiliated chapters are locally based throughout the nation as well as international affiliate chapters based in North, Central, and South America, the Caribbean, Africa and businesses as well as individuals who may have chosen to be direct members with the national office. In essence, the NBCC is on the leading edge of educating and training Black communities on the need to participate vigorously in this great capitalistic society known as America.
The NBCC reaches well over 100,000 Black-owned businesses. As of the latest census data release, there were 3.12 million Black-owned businesses in the United States, generating $206 billion in annual revenue and supporting 3.56 million U.S. jobs.The National Black Chamber of Commerce® is dedicated to economically empowering and sustaining African American communities through entrepreneurship and capitalistic activity within the United States.
SOURCE Famous Amos
CONTACT: MEDIA CONTACTS: Derrick Clifton, dclifton@explorefcg.com
Fedcap Awarded £233 Million (US $330 Million) To Deliver UK Government’s Back To Work Scheme
NEW YORK, June 7, 2021 /PRNewswire/ — Fedcap Employment UK, a subsidiary of The Fedcap Group, has been awarded two major contracts by the UK Department for Work and Pensions to deliver the country’s Restart Scheme in the South Central and North West areas of England. Fedcap Employment was the only non-profit to be awarded these contracts, which have a 4.5-year term.
Announced last year under the Commercial Agreement for the Provision of Employment and Health Related Services (CAEHRS) framework, the service provides support for people who have been directly impacted by the COVID-19 pandemic and have been unemployed between 12-18 months.
Fedcap will offer an individualized mix of face to face and virtual support to assist 132,100 individuals develop their employment skills, obtain training in high growth sectors and secure employment.
Christine McMahon, President and CEO of The Fedcap Group said, “The Fedcap Group believes in the importance of work, seeking to create opportunities for individuals to achieve economic wellbeing. We are pleased to have this opportunity to leverage the skills and experience we have developed over our 86-year history to assist governments as they rebuild and transform their economies and the lives of citizens impacted by the pandemic. We are honored that the UK Department for Work and Pensions has chosen us as a partner, and we will work diligently to meet and exceed expectations.”
Grant Collins, President, Workforce Development for The Fedcap Group noted, “The Fedcap Group is one of the highest performing employment support providers, helping 250,000 people annually advance–through education, jobs, career training and coaching. We are committed to assisting individuals achieve societal inclusion and economic wellbeing and look forward to working on this innovative scheme to support those whose livelihoods were lost or impacted due to the pandemic.”
About Fedcap Employment UK
Fedcap Employment delivers services across England and Scotland helping people find suitable and sustainable work. The organization delivers an array of employment schemes including the Intensive Personalised Employment Support and Links to Work. Fedcap Scotland is the majority owner of StartScotland, which delivers Fair Start Scotland.
About The Fedcap Group
For 86 years, The Fedcap Group has developed innovative and scalable solutions to some of society’s most pressing problems. Serving over 250,000 people each year in the US, the UK and Canada, The Fedcap Group provides education and training, workforce and economic development and necessary supports—all targeted to helping people achieve economic wellbeing.
SOURCE The Fedcap Group
CONTACT: For more information, please contact Rose Anello at 646.830.9008 or RAnello@fedcap.org
Related Links
Fewer Jobs Than Anticipated In US Jobs Report
WASHINGTON – U.S. Secretary of Labor Alexander Acosta issued the following statement on the May 2017 Employment Situation report:
“May’s unemployment rate ticked down to 4.3 percent from the previous month’s level of 4.4 percent. The unemployment rate is the lowest it has been since May 2001, dropping 0.5 percentage points since President Trump took office. Non-farm payroll employment rose by 138,000 jobs, a positive sign that our economy is moving in the right direction. More than 600,000 private-sector jobs have been created since Inauguration Day. Multiple economic sectors showed job growth in May, including education and health services and mining. The mining sector posted its seventh straight month of employment increases.
“These continued improvements have real impact on the lives of American families, as more people take home a paycheck. Their spending will benefit themselves, their families, and the nation’s economy.
“While we continue to grow the economy, the U.S. Department of Labor is also working diligently to ensure that businesses have the workers they need, and that all Americans can find good, safe jobs by narrowing the skills gap in the labor market. Our shared mission is to expand economic opportunity and prosperity for all Americans.